ee Bl Table of Contents Chapter 1 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING PEN AaK ee Ne REPRPRReBeeeeenn A SAS SERESSERRARERES Planning of National Roads Maximum Speed of Cars Capacity of Roads Turnouts Parking Maneuvers Provisions of Safety Sight Distance Curbs and Gutter Traffic Lanes Highway Intersections Road Barriers Sizes and Colors for Traffic Signs Pavement Markers Lane Lines, Barrier Lines, Edge Lines Pavement Messages and Pavement Markings Interchanges Prohibitions of Traffic Signs ‘Types of Pavements (Rigid and Flexible) Joints in Concrete Pavements California Bearing Ratio Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction Plate Load Test Thickness of Flexible Pavement Using Graphical Solution Asphalt Mixture Components of Pavements Geometric Shape of Traffic Signs Types of Crack and Wearing of Concrete Pavements Practical Problems of Highway Costing 88-90 90 - 118 119-125 125 - 126 126 - 127 128 - 130Table of Contents Chapter 2 TRANSPORTATION & HIGHWWAY ENGINEERING ‘Traffic Capacity ; Min, Radius of Curvature for Horizontal Curves = ~ 135 3, Fundamentals of Traffic Flow (Braking Distance, Stopping Distance) 141, i 4, Tractive Force, Rolling Resistance, Aerodynamic Resistance’ > 156 and Grade Resistance tse 5. _ Space Mean Speed, Time Mean Speed and Mean Free Speed, ~ 160 Standard Deviation ‘a. 6. Peak Hour Factor ‘st 173 7. Capacity of Roads/Time Headway ~174 8, _ Jam Density, Free-Flow Speed and Space Mean Speed 174-195 9, Highway Safety and Accident Analysts (Average Daily Traffic) 6 ~ 183 10. Crash Reduction Factor i 192 ~ 193 11. Traffic Queue Under-Saturated Infinite Queue . « Under-Saturated Finite Queue 194. 199 12. Stochastic Queue 200 ~ 29; 13, Service Rates of Ramps Connecting Freeways 201 ~ 293 14, Sight Distance, Braking Distance, Stopping Sight Distance, 203-22) Distance for Horizontal Road Surface 15. Vertical (Summit) Parabolic Curves 221-229 16. Vertical (Sag) Parabolic Curves 223-227 17, Unsymmetrical Parabolic Curves 227-232 18. Spiral Transition Curve 233-236 19, Passing Sight Distance (Overtaking Distance) on a Level Road § 236-245, 20. Sight Distance for Vertical Summit Curves urface 246-248 21. Stopping Sight Distance for Vertical Summi 248-250 251vw Table of Contents 22. Passing Sight 23. Hele Danes Vertical Curves a 24, Stopping Sight Distance i 7 mn Distance) for Sag Vertical Curves a 25. Sight Distance for Horizontal a a 26. ilesietis Areas of | Earthworks 256-261 7 monic (End Area Method and Volume with on Method 261 - 265 26, Fished Grade of Roadway 266-269 29, Limits of Free-Haul, Economical Haul and Overhaul Volume 268 - 269 30. Mass Diagram io Chapter 3 PORTS and Harbor 1, Harbors 273-275 2, Waves, Wind and Tides 275-292 3, Shallow Water Waves 293 - 294 4. Deep Water Waves 294-299 5, _ Significant Wave Height 299 - 300 6. _ Saint-Verant and Flamant Theory (Distance from Stillwater and Center of Rotation of the Wave 300 - 301 7, Long Waves 301 - 303, 8, _ Relation Between Deep-Water Wave Length and Shallow-Water Wave Length 303 - 304 9. Length of Fetch 304 - 305 10. Residual Water Level 305-307 11, Seistnic Forces Acting on Marine Structures 307 - 309 12. Angular Frequency of a Wave 309-31013. 14, 15. 16. 17. 18, 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24, Table of Contents Mooring and Bollards Marine Structures Navigation Channels Wind Pressure and Wind Forces Acting on Vessels and Pier Maximum Width of Channels and Waterways Length and Width of Pier and Slip Elements of Standard Ships in Relation to Its Depth of Floatation Forms of Littoral Drift Motions of Ships Caused by Sea Water Waves Principal Dimensions of Vessel Dead Weight Tonnage, Gross Tonnage and Displacement Tonnage Design Water Depth 311-313 314-316 316-317 317-318 318-329 322-323 324-325 326 ~ 329 329-339 331-332 332 ~334 334-349y se —Se- — — Bo ah a eS [4.1 Problem: _] ible for zoning of What fee ejections and nal land ap ind zoning planes to be submitted to HLURB (Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board) for approval? icjpal Planning " beopment Ofte (MPDO) b) City Planning Development Office and [ 1.3. Problem: National Roads are continuous in g that form part of the main tung’ systom; al roads leading to national ol® national seaports, parks or Coatttoee National arterial roads. are classifi, ‘ into different groups from the iewpeint o function: wet a) —North-south backbone (CPDO) . b) East-West Laterais ©) Provincial Planning Development °) Other Strategic Roads Office (PPDO) "Sd Allotthe 5S gq) Allofthe above 1.4 Problem: 1.2 Problem: mn The elements to Consider when The following elements are to be National ‘ Planning considered when planning Expressways: ‘onal Roads are: 1. Limited frontage access |. No frontage access ll. Development set well back from the t Development set well back from the highway f highway ll Grade separated intersections for lll All access to premises i extremely high flows and other Provincial roads Provided via intersecting expressways V. Number of ii i, 'V, Number of intersections to be minimized imesectons to be minimize . * V. Where necessary or for emergency v. oe at-grade channelized Purposes, parking/stopping to be other elements minor flows and Provided clear of the main nem carriageway, Vi. No roadside vendors a) |, Vand Vonly a) 1.11, Vand Vi only b) I, Ill, (Vand V only b) ot, il, V and VI only co) 1M, Wand V only c) AI, Mand Vonly "Sq Allotthe above ®S qd Allof the above ”Y ENGINEER! B problem: 4 3 around. communities py0888%. sures aimed at improving count nd reducing the volume of through ssl) Speide the community. Where a 's can be justified, the most important pyPerrerations are: o ‘the opportunity should be taken to 4 Teinforce the road hierarchy by downgrading the old road to discourage through traffic; ‘acces’ to the bypass should be restricted to only a few points where safe intersections and spur roads can be provided to line the existing network. Direct access from frontage land should not be permitted; iu. Provisions should be left for future expansion or development of the community but such developments should be served by service roads ‘and spur roads. a) land llonly b) land tl only c) land WMlonly 5 qd) Allofthe above Where a bypass cannot be justified, countermeasures should be implemented to slow down the speeds of through traffic as it passes through the community or trading centers as follows: 1. Warning signs and rumble strips can be used to alert drivers about speed- reducic.g devices ahead; ILA series of road humps increasing in height from 40 mm to around 80 mm can be used gradually to slow down traffic in pedestrian predominated area; mg a Road narrowing (with due regard for Capacity needs) can be used to induce ower speeds as traffic passes iy, {hough the community; and; |. In order to alert drivers that they are ‘entering a community, it is generally Tegarded that some form of gateway treatment on the approaches is beneficial (@g., substandard curve, tree lining, or even non-rigid gate structure), a) |, and IV only b) II, Mand IV only ©) |,Illand IV only 5S q@ Allofthe above When choosing a design speed for a road | Project, the following factors need to be considered: |. Function of the road Anticipated operating speed {il, ‘Anticipated speed limit IV. Economics a) |, land IV only b) Ii tlland IV only )llland IV only 5S q) Allof the above 1.8 Problem: On open country roads with no “blind comers” not closely bordered by habitation, the maximum speed for passenger cars and motorcycles is: 5S a) 80kph b) 60kph ) 40 kph d) 30 kph4.9 Problem: roads with no “blind rin’ osely bordered | by the maximum speed for motor a) 25kph [40 Problem "or boulevards clear of On pect seo comers” when so designated, the maximum speed for passenger cars and motorcycles is: CF c) 40kph nh a) 25kp 4) S0kph b) 60kph 1.11_Problem: ” lear of “through streets’ or boulevards c! tls with no “blind comers” when so designated, the maximum speed for motor trucks and buses is: a) 25kph ©) 20kph b) 40kph =P q) 30Kph 1.12 Problem: On city and municipal streets, with light traffic, when not designated “through streets’, the | ‘maximum speed for passenger cars, ‘motorcycles, motor trucks and buses is: a) 25kph ¢) Fb) 30kph 4) 40 kph 60 kph Through crowded streets, approgc intersections at “blind comers pec School zones passing other vehici¢o td are stationary, or for similar dangtieh Clreumstances, the maximum deus SP0d for passenger care, motorcycles, motor ty and buses is: sinter a) 25kph °) 30 kph "SF b) 20kph 9) 40kph SS 1.14 Problem: The maximum speed for Cars and in high-risk pedestrian areas is: motor 2) 25kph BH Gy 5g b) 50kph 4) ome ee The maximum speed for cars and in lowerisk pedestrian areas is; matt "5 a) 60 kph °) 25k b) 30kph d aK 45 koh ee The speed limit appropriate on roads where there are no footpaths and pedestrians are required to walk on the road is: © a) 40 kph 9 35 kph b) 30 kph d) 25 kphCARNE Daa 1.17 Problem: The speed limit appropri standard duplicated cariageny reat where there is only occasional access from adjoining properties is: a) 50 kph c) 60k b) 30kph aoe "Fd 80kph 1.18 Problem: The speed limit appropriate on a very hi jh standard expressways, whi ve Io crash rate is: " neh have low a) 45kph = Ec) 100 kph b) 60 kph 4) 75 kph 1.19 Problem: At the start of a new speed zone, a speed limit sign should be erected on the left and right sides of the road. Then within the first kilometer, there should be two (2) farther pairs of repeater speed limit signs. After that, repeater signs should be placed at spacing. oS a) thm ce) 500m b) 2km 4) 1.5km 20 Prob The speed limit appropriate on lower standard expressways. a) 50or 60 kph b) 600r75 kph c) 900r 100 kph B= g} 30 or 90 kph [4.24 Problem: _ “] t Is the maximum number of vehicles, which have a reasonable expectation of passing over a given section of a lane oF a roadway in one direction or In both directions during one hour under prevailing road and traffic conditions. a) Flow of traffic 5b) Road capacity ) Density d) Free flow 1.22 Problem: The capacity of a route can be affected by the following factors: 1. Number of lanes UL. Lane and shoulder width Ill. Terrain and road gradient IV. Traffic composition V. Side friction such as the presence of road furniture and pedestrians Vi. Intersection capacity (priority of movements, traffic signal phasing, number of lanes etc.) a) {Il land IV only b) Ii tll, Vand Vi only ) LIV, Vand Vionly 0S qd) Allof the above eo Ideal capacity of a road is: tS a) 2000vph b) 1800 vph ) 1400 vph d) 1200 vphrte ENGINEERING specific location of bs ined on nt consideration the deter following conditions: a gud a ; Tuna ac where pedestrians are 4. concentrate ‘Atumout may be placed at least 50. Metre fer a road ion . Minimum distance betroen Wo tive turnouts in one Sra ot be ss than SD ites in Sieben centers. In other srs, the minimum distance shall not {ess than 1 kilometer. cot on o imouts should be pl “ Ment to horizontal and. vertical curves that limits the sight distances in either direction. normally a) |ll,and IV only 7 |, land IV 5 o) |, andillonly 4) Alofthe above _ 8 Nae »| Turnouts shall not be placed o 1.27 Problem: posite other but shall be placed not tess im meters apart. — a) 315 ©) 305 Fb) 300 4) 310 —_ 1.28 Problem: The pavement thickness of tumout ‘shall no case beless than ___for asphalt, a) 75mm 6) 100mm b) 150mm d) 200 mm —~_.W7T—-__ 1.29 Problem: The pavement thickness of ‘tumout. Shall no casebelessthan for, ‘concrete, a) 250mm ) 180mm °F by 230mm 4) 200mm ————_* 1.30 Problem: jired length of the turnout shall be emt oneng a length of ___ meters for each bus. way 150 c) 160 b) 145 d) 155 1.26 Problem: Turnouts shall have a minimum width of __ to accommodate all types of vehicles, a) 4.00 ¢) 3.80 Fb) 260 4d) 420 For adequate drainage of surface drainage facilities such as Curb and gutter’ inlets and storm sewer shall be provided within the turnout. The following shall be observed: |. The cross slope of the turnout shall be 0.50% steeper than the Cross slope of the adjacent lane of the existing Carriageway, I. The gutter alongside the tumout shall have the same slope as the existing carriageway. i. On Carriageway with existing storm Sewer, the turnout shall be provided with inlets (spacing of 20.0 meters) and connecting pipes to the existing sewer, Tun-off,fel ‘on level Carrlageways - gxisting storm sewe with : ", the alongside the tumout utter t0 0.30% shall be sloped 1.33 Problem: _ Vehicles parked near intersections can a) ‘land IV onty Sbstruct the flow of tuming traffic. Thus, b) Wall and 1V only Fai"a should be prohibited within the q) i llland IV only me mininum datances from C les of intersecting roads for ang ed) Allofthe above eg — mm on both approach and —_—-.]+>$ow_ a) 10 ey 2 1.34 P 2 retlouysevuenicmanes | C24 Problems | : The following guidelines should be |, Pedestrians observed for angle parking: 4, People with disabilities |. The word “Angle Parking” shall be i. Non-motorized vehicles indicated on the parking signs as well Vv. Motorcycles a the angle of parking to the curb. V._Ditapidated vehicles ‘Pavement marking of parking bays is desirable, particularly where the Tequired angle is not 45 to 90 degrees. os a) |i, MandWonly | Angle parking shall not be installed b) I, Hland IV only where visibility restrictions would c) 1, lll, Vand V only create a hazardous operating d) Allofthe above environment, such as the inside of a bend or on a crest. ene a) land llonly b) Land tlt only ~ ©) Mand tll only 152 _Problens ®F q Allofthe above Vehicles parked near intersections can obstruct the flow of turning traffic. Thus, parking should be prohibited within the following minimum distances from the boundaries of intersecting roads for 1.35 Problem: When considering parking adjacent to barrier lines the following factors should parallel parking -__m. on both approach be considered: ines Lf parking maneuvers can be made w= clear of through lanes. Generally, at a 8 least 3 meters needs to be available b) 6 for moving traffic between the parked ¢) 3 vehicle and the barrier line for a single 4 8 lane of traffic.during parki Laon ty ee xi Tempetely clea of through lanes. safety and potential of vehicles The ing the barrier line to pass a cocle in a parking or unparking maneuver ‘even though this is an unlawful maneuver. a) land Il only b) land tll only ) Wand Il only 5 d) Allofthe above 1.36 Problem: f safe road design is to Liye remain safely on the road This depends on the following factors: a sound road surface; | an adequate width or cross-section; horizontal and vertical alignment; good visiblity/sight distance; delineation and signing; provision for pedestrians, pedal cyclists and people with disabilities; Vil. management of traffic conflicts at intersections; and ‘Vill. speed management Ss<2RF> a) 1,11, Mand Vionly b) ILIV, V, Vil and Vill only ¢) 1, 1V, Vand Vil only 5% @ Allotthe above 4-37 _ Problem: The areas where the State of th Surface condition ang © toaq toad ‘surface is parteane uF ty uit where vehicles are to peettant ‘maneuver suddenly such as: m8 or | Onthe approach t Ml. Atroundabouts"™" tignals WM. Around tight curves 'V. On downhill siopes 2) |, and ti only b) |. tMand Vv onk ©) Util and IV only "Fd Allofthe above 1.38 Problem: Other aspects that Could contrib, of control on curves are: | Adverse superelevation; ll. Poor sight distance; and Wl. Poor surface Condition a) land tl only b) and il only ©) Mand tit only i wy All of the above Ute to logs 1.39 Problem: The provision of Safety sight distance depends on the characteristics of the driver such as: 1. Alertness of driver Il Recognition of the hazard |. Actions available to the driver - to stop or to change direction 'V. Decision of the driver a) |, land only 41, Ill and IV only 1, Hand Ill only Allof the aboveLOA [4-40_Problem: | The provision of safety sight distance depends on the ch, vehicle such as: Senate of the 1. Type of vehicle ~ car and truck Il, Friction between the tire and the road IM Eye height of the driver IV. Speed of vehicles a) |, and tllonly b) |, Mand 1V only ©) llland IV only 5 d) Allof the above 1.41 Problem: The provision of safety sight di depends on the characteristics of the oad environment such as: |. Road geometry - grade sight limitations Sal and covet Il. Road surface ~ sealed or unsealed, smooth or rough , I. Road illumination at night 1v. Road topography 6 a) andi only b) |, land IV only c) I, Mand 1V only d) _Allof the above 1.42 Prob! Each type of sight distance consists of three elements: |. Driver Eye Height IL Object Height Ill. Sight Distance IV. Velocity of Vehicle se a) i, Mand Monly b) i, fland IMonly ¢) li Mand IV only d) Allof the above Tas Probiems What are the components in stopping sight distance? 1. Reaction distance - the distance traveled while the driver percelves & hazard, decides to take action, then acts by starting to apply the brakes to start slowing down; and I. Braking distance - the distance required for the vehicle to slow down and stop Ill Height of driver's eye above the roadway V. Height of object a) I,lland IV only © b) tandionly ) bland Monty d) Alot the above 1.44 Problem: The reaction time to be used for road safety design is_ seconds. This value is applied to the whole range of design speeds. a 15 Fo) 28 b) 12 d) 20 —_— 1.45 Problem: The length of superelevation development from zero cross slope to full design superelevation is known as: a) _Superelevation runout EF p) Superetevation runoff c) Tangent runout 4) Tangent run off[4as Probiem: levation development The longth of wiForose alope to the zaro rea ope point on the tangent is known ion runoff >) Superelevation runol 3 Tangent runout @ Tegetnnof [a7 CE Board May 2016 ical curves should be vale itn ‘basis of the lferent s " controling factors: LL Sight distance Is a requirement in all "situations for driver safety; I. Appearance Is generally required in * Iqw fill and flat topography situations; na neral ding comfort is a ger " vqulement with specific need on approaches to a floodway where the length of depression needs to be minimized. a) land Il only b) and tllonly ©) Hand il only 5 q) Allofthe above 1.48 Problem: Criterias used for the establishment of sag vertical curves: |. Headlight sight distance IL Passenger comfort WW, Drainage control 'V. General appearance V. Velocity of cars passing thru the curve a) 1,11, Vand V only && by 4,0, Mand IV only ©) ti Vand Vonly 4) Allofthe above 1.49 Pro! Shoulder paving s a valuable Meth Providing: of |. Integrity of the pavement I. Width to place edgeline markings Pavemen MW. Additional safety to prevent Vehig Bidding or drWvers losing con® gravel tn Vv. Low maintenance Costs co, with unpaved shoulders °™P&req a) |, land IN only b) | Ill and IV only ©) I, Mand IV only SF qd Allotthe above ——. a 1.50 Problem: Types of curb & gutter: |. Barrier curb & gutter Ml. Barrier curb IM. Mountabletdrop curb & gutter 'V. Mountableldrop curb a) I, land tl only b) | tlland IV only ©) M,tland IV only ay al Of the above T_— 1.51 Problem: Types of curb suited for the edge of the traveled way where it is generally Considered that drivers should Not mount the curb or sidewalk. This types are ‘used for areas where Operating speeds are Generaily less than 60 kph and where Barking of vehicles is allowed, * Barrier curb & gutter Barrier curb Mountable/drop curb & gutter Mountableldrop curb1.52 Problem: ‘Types of curb that provide less vauiting of the errant vehicle on is impact with less likellhood of the driver foi conte and less damage to occ vehicles. compared to banter cubs. Ths type shall be used for all traffic islands, mediane and te Tight side of the roadway ve ing Speeds are greater than 60 a) Barer curb & 8) Bartercurb ) Mouintableldrop curb & gutter EF d) Mountable/drop curb They are essential part of any road not on fill and must be ieopaied ite the road cross-section. These are designed to accommodate the expected rainfall but can often be hazardous to vehicles that run off the road. 5 a) Longitudinal drainage ditches b) Transverse drainage ditches ) Drop curb and gutters d) Shoulder _ 1.54 Problem: The most important criteria to consider to avoid safety hazards created by the drainage ditches is_ the actual reconnaissance survey during wet whether to identify the natural run-out locations. Slopes on the side nearest the road should not be steczer than ___ and preferable flatter ac cis will _minimize accident severity. Zhe slope farthest from the road may be as steep as the ground will permit. a) 1.5 FS) 34 b) 24 gd) 44 a a [4.85 Problem: ] A pedestrian bridge adjacent to the bridge used by vehicles can be an option where Insufficient width is available for pedestrians. This can be cantilevered off fhe structure of the road bridge, A minimum width of should be provided, although it may need to be wider for the higher pedestrian and cycle volumes. a) 18m o) 2m b) 1.2m oer gy 1.5m TT 1.56 Problem: They are lane in fatto rolling terrain, which are used to break up platoons of traffic and to improve traffic flow over 2 section of road, A series of such auxiliary lanes for both directions of traffic can greatly improve traffic flow and driver satisfaction. a) Line lanes b) Climbing lanes 5 ¢) Overtaking lanes d) Auxiliary lanes TT AA special form of overtaking lane but they are only provided on inclines where truck speeds fall to 40 kph or less and upgrade traffic flow rate in excess of 20 vehicles per hour. 5 a) Climbing lanes b) Tapered lanes ) Ramps ) Diverging lanesThe design of overtaking lanes and climbing lanes requires the consideration of the: |. Initial diverge taper il. Auxillary lane length Il, End or merge taper a) land lonly b) Land Illonly ) Mand it only 6 q) Allof the above A very short section of fully constructed shoulder or added lane that is provided to allow slow vehicles to pull aside and be overtaken, It differs from an overtaking lane due to its short length, different signing and that the majority of vehicles are not encouraged to travel in the right lane, a) Climbing lanes 5 b)- Tumout ¢) Diverge lanes d) Merge lanes 1.60 Problem: Turnout is a very short section -of full constructed shoulder or added lane that is Provided to allow slow vehicles to pull aside and be overtaken. The length of tumout lanes for an average approach ‘Speed of 30 kph is equal to:” a) 180m c) 50m " b) 60m 4) 200m 19 stegy desirable to Provide emerge ty Famps, There are to be loosen’? Cape gop an out of contro} @ main trafflc stream’ Vehicles result from divers oat Cont Of their vehicle. The following snd onto, of escape ramps; "928 the nes |. Sand Pite I. Descending Grade IN. Horizontal Grade 'V. Ascending Grade a) |, land It only b) |, Illand IV only ©) I Mlland IV only © q) All of the above 1.62 Problem: Delineation of the ro: be considered as Process to ensure th: is provided to road generally provided following devices: ad alignment needs to Part of the desi tat adequate guidance Users. Delineation is by the use of the 1. Pavement Markings M. Signs Ri. Guide posts iv, Reflective delineators ¥ Lighting Curb or other physical devices a} A, Mlland IV only b) IN, Vand Vi only ©) 1,1V, Vand Vi only ES qd) Allof the above1.63 oblem: ‘An intersection is the junction where two road elther cross or meet. The types of intersections that generally exist on the road network are: 1 Unflared and unchannelized intersections (without widening or traffic Islands) M1. Flared and unchannelized intersections (with widening but without traffic islands) and Ill. Channelized intersections islands to guide traffic) Multiple intersections ’ 5 a) |, Nandilionly b) |, Illand iV only ©) Willand IV only d) Allofthe above (traffic parallel type of 4 leg intersection b) _unchannelized intersection c) _ muttleg intersection d) flared type of intersection ee __ 1.64 Problem: Common types of intersections are: 1, Cross-intersections Il, T-intersections Il, Y-intersections IV. Other multi-legged junctions V. Roundabouts a) 1,1, llland IV only b)|.llland IV only {tll Vand V only All of the above [ais | eS | The figure shown is one type of a highway This is or road intersections at grade. commonly known as : The figure shown Is one type of a highway intersection at grade which Is commonly known as: 1 a) flared type of 4 leg intersection b) _unchannelized intersection ) parallel type of 4-eg intersection d) _mult-leg intersection _ 1.67 Problem: ‘The figure shown is one type of a highway intersection at grade, which Is commonly multi-leg intersection b) _unchannelized intersection ©) _ flared type intersection d) parallel type of intersection4,68 Problem: ‘own is one type of a highway grade which Is commonly == 2) mult-eg intersections flared type intersections ») nchannelized Intersection Lal 7 paral type intersections shown Is one type of highway — at grade which Is commonly A, Se a) channelized yintersection b) rotary intersection EF ¢) 3 leg intersection with y-turning roadways d) four leg channelized type intersection a 1.70 Problem: The figure shown is one of highway intersections at grade which is commonly known as: a) channelized intersection b) channelized y-intersection ¢) flared intersection 5 d) 3 leg intersection The figure shown Is one type of hy intersections at grade, which is commen a \ a) —y-with tuming roadways, US b) 4g channelized type intersection ©) rotary intersections roundabout d) channelized y-intersection ee 1.72 Problem: The figure shown is one type of highway intersections at grade which is commonly known as: YN fs" 3) ohannelized y-intersection yewith turning roadways ) rotary type intersection 3) 4-4eg channelized intersection4.73. Problem: The figure shown is one type of highway Intersection at grade which Is commonly a) rotary intersections roundabout leg channelized type ©) muttiteg intersection 4) flared type intersection 1.74 Problem: The figure shown is one type of highwa intersections at grade which is per known as: SN a) clover leaf b) partial clover leaf ) directional interchange rotary intersections roundabout Principles cf good design to reduce the likelihood of traffic accidents include: 1 Minisnize the speed of vehicles at ' coltision points 2 movements and points of ‘by channelization, or in some situations, prohibit certain movements (and provide for them at I. Control movements to reduce the possibility of conflict and IV. Clearly define vehicle paths by use of pavement markings a) |,Mland Illonly b) I liland IV only c)th'lland IV only All of the above 1.76 Problem Traffic can be controlled at intersections by traffic control device such as 1. Regulatory signs 1, Traffic signals MW, Roundabouts a) land Il only b) land Ill only ¢) —Iland Ill only All of the above 1.77 Problem Signs facing the minor road approaches at an intersection are used to give priority to the major road. a) thru street signs b) _ fast moving vehicles ahead signs 5 ¢) stop or give way signs 4) _ slow down signs 1.78 Problem other intersections along the route) Purpose of traffic signals placed on controlled intersections is to: 1. Separate vehicle movements in time. This minimizes conflicts.atan a 0 Mics from a a _ ‘the major Moss or gatians in erossing the N. a“ |, tand il only By) tand V only iland IV only 0) 5a qj Allofthe above where two tr A conte ese, Safe intersection ae es the following principles: 1. Minimizing the number of conflict i of conflict izing the area i ena points of conflict 1. Giving preference to. major ovement Ve Mining relative 8p or conflcting movements a) |, lland [V only b)Lilland IV only ) Ill Vand Vonly 5 qd) Allof the above 1.80 bik The speed of vehicles through an intersection depends on the following: |. Alignment 'w Road environment Ml. Traffic volume and composition 'N. Traffic control devices a) |, and il only 4) land tv only 9) U,and tv only "Fd Allotthe above 1.81 Problem Low relative speed Conditions intersections can be obtained by: * |. Choosing a layout where confi movements cross at angles teas or equal to 90 degrees " Providing a layout oF alignment slows down approaching vohiciog Il, Providing declaration lanes a) land tl only b) Fand I only ©) Mand Illonly 5 q Allof the above —_—_ 1.82 Problem The safety of an intersection can be Improved by provision ‘of right and ten auxiliary turning lanes. Turning lanes also improve intersection Capacity and traffic flow. They are particularly important if the volume of traffic making these moves ig high or ifthe through or oncoming traffic flows are high. Provision for turning lanes can generally be provided in the following ways: | Shared turning and through lane Ml Flaring and tape Ml Separate lane for deceleration ang storage WV. Establishment of a traffic island oS a) 1, Wand ill only b) 1, lll and IV only ce) H Mand iv only 4) Allof the above ee sp lanes are Provided to {ne delays for tight turning vehicies and to Make the right tum Movement easier and safer. ab aaehUlUul!]ENGINEERING AA traffic Island is. provid treatment to: Provided with thie 1. Guide traffic into defined paths 1. Separate through, — turnin opposing traffic movements. as ane Wm. Give advance warming of th Intersection to approaching drivers ° IV. Provide refuge for pedestrians V. Prohibit undesirable o traffic movements yr Oancesaety a) 1.1, land tV only b) S,illand IV only ©) LMM Vand V only 5 d) Allofthe above The types of slip lane arrangements are: |. High entry angle slip lane Il, Free flow slip lane IM, Slow entry angle slip lane © a) Jandilonly b) Land Illonly ¢) Mand tit only d) Allofthe above 1.85 Problem One of the safest type of intersection treatments. a) T-intersection Roundabouts may be appropriate In the following situations: 1. At intersections. with high accident rates IL When physical control of speed Is desirable When the flows on each approach are balanced and capacity analysis indicates that volumes can be managed IV. When the volume of left turners Is significant If traffic signals may be Inefficient ¢.9. due to a large number of phases VI. For mutti-legged intersections a) 41h llland IV only b) tll, Vand Vi only c) 1, 1V, Vand Vi only 5 dg) Allof the above a 1.87 Problem Roundabouts may not be appropriate in the following situations: 1. Where satisfactory geometric design cannot be provided due to insufficient ‘space of unfavorable topography ll, Where unbalanced flows with high volumes are on one or more approaches MW, Where a major road intersects a minor road and a roundabout would result in unacceptable delay to the major road IV. Where there is considerable pedestrian activity and due to high traffic volumes it would be difficult for pedestrians to cross at the intersection a) |,ll,and [Vonly b) Il land IV only ©) IMlland IV only EF qd) Allofthe abovewm design speed through The about should be generally tran areas However, it must be Fecognized that ri and riders are only hy man nd sometimes make mistakes and wai of thelr vehicles. 988 Contra The reasons that they might are many, for example: * (8 Conte, 60 kph a) 50K 5 Total |. Excessive speed seb) 4kph 4. Fatigue or inattention — I Alcohol or drugs TT 'V. Road condition 4,89 Problem __ a) |, land it only through ) Llland 1V only The xii dgienrten ¢) Willan V only roundabout shou © qd) Allofthe above in rural areas. 5 ¢) 50kph oo 60 kph , 7O kph 4) 40koh 1.92 Problem 4.90 _ Problem Things to avoid in a design of a roundabout: Straight approaches on high-speed roads I, Central island too small to provide deflection IM, Unbalanced traffic flows WV. Spliter islands 5 a) |, Wandilonly b) Lllland IV only ¢) Uilland IV only 4) Allofthe above 1:91 Problem TW frst objective in road safety is to keep road users safely on the road Pavement with @ reasonable width, a sound road Surface, a predictable alignment and good delineation and signs, Some typical road environment hazards are: 1 Ml MH. NV. v. vi. vi. vill. Poles Trees Steep side slopes Water courses, dams Culvert endwalls Fences and encroaching buildings Bridge piers and abutments Speed management a) 1H llland Vionly >) II, Vand Vil only ©) MNL1V, Vand Vi only d) Allof the above Rlemiove the hazard Move the hazard outside the clear zoneHWAY ENGINEERING Ul Modify the hazard so that it is not so dangerous Iv. Replace the hazard with something that Is not so dangerous y. Shield the hazard with a barrier system a) |lland IV only b) I, Vand Vonly c) Ill Vand V only «= d) Allofthe above They are used to shield errant vehicles from running into hazards that cannot be relocated or made more frangible. a) roadside poles 5S b) roadside barriers ) frangible wooden posts 4) drivable culvert end 1.95 Problem In accordance with the National Corporative Highway Research Project 350 (NCHRP350) procedures, there are six test levels to provide a range of restraint requirements and impact severity conditions. The criteria is based on: 1. Structural adequacy of the barrier system Occupancy risk and the impact velocity and ride down acceleration limits Il Vehicle trajectory after impact a) land only {and Ill only c} and tl only 5S i) Ail of the above Different types of road safety barrler systems: |. Flexible Wire Rope Safety Barrier ‘Systems I, Semi Rigid Systems I, Rigid Systems WV. Road Work Systems a) |.Mand Monly b) |. llland IV only ©) Willan IV only TF q) Allofthe above 1.97 Problem The location safety barriers in the vicinity of curb and gutter is to be considered carefully. if curb and gutter Is essential in high-speed locations, the face of curb should be located: 1. Atleast 3 m from the face of concrete safety barriers 1. At least 3 m from W-beam and wire rope safety barriers for concrete barrier curb IM. At least 3.0 m from W-beam safety barrier or wire rope safety barrier for concrete mountable/drop curb & gutter 'V. In areas where the operating speed Is less than 70 kph, an offset of 0.2 to 0.3 m can be tolerated to minimize damage to vehicles a) |ylland il only b) [lll and 1V only ©) I Mand IV only 5S d) Allof the aboveES ts 1.101 Problem [4.08 _€E Board May 2016 for the use of safety barriers The warrant gned considering: can be establis! Fore slope or back slope steepness 1 and height 1. Unforgiving ater hazards within the clear zone hazards within the clear a) Land lonly b) Land Il only Wand tl only se g Allofthe above 1.99 Problem ice mounted on a fixed support fpareceat signs) or portable support (temporary signs) whereby a specific message is conveyed by means of words or symbols placed or erected for the purpose of regulating, warning or guiding traffic. a) Roadwork signs b) Overhead signs 5 ¢) Traffic signs d) Special instruction signs 1.100 Problem Signs that inform road users of traffic laws and regulations which, if disregarded, will constitute an offense. a) Roadwork signs ©S b) Regulatory signs ©) Trafic signs 4) Waming signs Signs that instruct roag certain traffic rule condition. wi a) Roadwork signs b) Overhead signs, ©) Traffic signs Special instruction signg —_ — 1.102 Problem Warn road users of condition on or adjacent to the road. th unexpected or hazardous, "= "#Y by a) Roadwork signs © b) Warning signs ©) Traffic signs d) Guide signs Users to ements o, Meet OF oad TT 1.103 CE Board Nov, 2016 Inform and advice road users of di distance, routes, the locatio : and points of interests, of serve, © a) Guide signs b) Regulatory signs ©) Warning signs d) Traffic signs a [1.104 “Problem | or advise of temporary hazardous ‘ns that could endanger road users s men and equipment engaged on b shead signs ©) Guide signs ¢} Special instruction signs pp om tf a —HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 4.105 Problem | signs which provide means of displaying essential traffic information on wide multi jane roads, where some degree of lane use control is required, or where side-of-road clearance Is insufficient to accommodate a road side sign. a) Roadwork signs b) Guide signs" 5 ¢) Overhead signs d) Special instruction signs Highway appurtenances designed to prevent vehicular penetration from the travel way to areas behind the barrier such as to minimize damage to impacting vehicles and their occupants, and to reduce the risk of injuries to pedestrians and workers. a) Traffic cones b) Delineators 1S ¢) Barriers d) Temporary curbing 1.107 Problem Warning devices used to supplement other controls and devices necessary to alert motorists of construction and maintenance activities or obstructions in the roadway. a) Traffic cones 1.108 Problem | Light retro-reflecting devices mounted at the side of the roadway, in series, to Indicate the roadway alignment. a) Traffic cones 5S b) Dolinoators ©) Flexible post or bollard 4) Flashing Lamps — 1.109 oblem Devices which may be conical in shape oF tubularshaped capable of performing channelization of traffic which miay be set ‘on the surface of the roadway oF rigidly attached for continued use. 0S a) Traffic cones b) Delineators ) Flexible post or bollard d) Barriers TT Roadwork devices consisting of pre-cast concrete sections, sandbag, and others which, may be used to guide traffic at the construction site. a) Barriers b) Delineators 5 ) Temporary curbing @) Flexible post or bolardof rigid barrier posts ed Ph a minimum of 48) om or trafic evade with alterate bands of by 50 Ty color as seen by approaching comer delineation of traffic. Device us a) elreccs Deline . 4 Temporary curbing 6& q Bollard 1.112 Problem Signs ae classified inthe folowing groups according to their use. I Rentacy Se Waming Signs _ Ti. Glde Ss or formative Sign IV. Signs for Expressways V. Signs for Special Purposes Vi. Hazard Markers: a) 1,1, Mand IV only b) Il, tH, [Vand VI only co) |.IM, Vand VI only 5 q Allofthe above 1.113 Problem Tobe effective, the road sign should meet the five basic requirements: | Fulflla need |". Command attention | Convey a clear, simple message 'V. Command respect: and V. Give adequate time for proper response a) I,Mandiv only b) ALM IV and V ont ) il, Wand V only Allof the above Standard sign shape tor stop. Sign, a) 0c ») Circle ©) Equilatera tiangle 4) Rectangle 1.115 Problem a Sta | indard sign shape for GIVE Away. Sign, a) Octagon b) Circle " c) Equilateral triangle 4) Rectangle oo Sta dard sign shape for regulatory sign, a) Octagon "S b) Circle ©) Equilateral triangle 4) Rectangle “eng 1.117 Problem Standard sig IN shape for addi information is; _ a’eral triangle ‘engle a a a aeeae edie [a-t4 8 Problem | standard sign shape for warning signs. a) Pentagon b) Circle 5 o) Equilateral triangle 4) Rectangle 1.119 Problem Standard sign shape for directional signs, roadwork signs, signs for special purposes, and supplementary plates for warning signs. a) Pentagon b) Circle c) Equitateral triangle © q) Rectangle 4.120 Problem [4.122 Problem J Standard color used 2s a background for STOP signs. oH 4) Red b) Black ©) Yellow d) White — 41.123 Problem Standard color used as legend color for signs having white, yellow, orange, fluorescent orange, fluorescent yellow green background and as chevron for hazard markers. a) Red UF p) Black ©) Bue d) Brown ; gg pein ( ‘Standard sign shape for facility information signs, instruction signs, guide signs, and destinations of point of interest. a) Pentagon b) Circle ¢) Equilateral triangle & q) Rectangle 4.121 Problem Standard sign school crossings 5 pe for pedestrian and © a) Pentagon b) Circle ©) Equilatera triangle d) Rectangle _ =i hh 41.124 Problem 4 Standard color used as background color for roadwork signs. a) Red b) Black © ¢) Yellow d) White 4.125 Problem Is the background color for most signs and legends for some colored background. a) Brown b) Green © o) White d) Bleground color for signs baci ts used a8 jan movement, school rolated pedestr azard markers to zones onal ‘emphasis and guidance to ive Fohicle operator. Fluorescent yellow green = 7 Fluorescent Orange c) Green d) Blue a 4.127 Problem ound color for roadwork late to personnel sede endl working. a) Fluorescent yellow green 5& p) Fluorescent Orange ) Green d) Blue _ Js used as background color for direction signs. a) Fluorescent yellow green b) Fluorescent Orange SF ¢) Green d) Blue es 1.129 Problem Is used as background color for service signs. a) Brown b) Fluorescent Orange ¢) Green Sy Blue 1.130 _ Problem \s reserved as background tourist facility directional ang nor fF ay Nation ‘signs. 5S 9) Brown b) Fluorescent Orange ¢c) Green d) Blue ig How many letters and numer: for signs? al being useg a) 5 0 4 = 6 43 oe What series of letters and numerals are used in directional signs? a) Modified series A b) Modified series F 5S c) Modified series E d) Modified series C ee 1.133 Problem Series of letters and numerals not used on ich have to be used for moving as the legibility distances are ES 9 Sees AandB nes C| 1.135 Problem PTrcTalicane ENGINEERING series of letters and numerals used in special cases of traffic signs. a) Seties Aand B 1% b) Series o) Series F d) Series D Series of letters and numerals for traffic signs, which are commonly used as they provide the best legibility and aesthetics. a) Series A and B b) Series C o) | Seties F 1S q) Serles D and E 1.136 Problem Series of letters and numerals of traffic signs, which are not often used on large signs due to the wide space required. a) Series A and B b) Series C © ¢) SeriesF d) Series een 1.137 Problem Standard letters and numerals of traffic signs for capital letters comprises 3 steps of spacings. a) small, medium and wide b) small, medium and large 5 ¢) narrow, medium and wide 4) narrow, medium and large - a thh a What spacing Is always used case letters of traffic signs? a) small spacing b) medium spacing c) narrow spacing wide spacing aa ‘The letter size of a traffic sign indicates the standard size as 160 DM which means: 5 a) 160 mm series D letters at medium spacing b) 160 inches series D letters at medium spacing ) 160 mm series DM letters at medium spacing 2 d) 160 inches series DM letters at medium spacing ee 41.140 Problem The letter size of traffic sign indicates the standard size as 90 LC would mean: a) 90 inches lower case letters that are always at wide spacing 90 mm lower case letters that are always at wide spacing ©) 90 inches lower case letters that are always at medium spacing 90 mm lower case letters that are always at narrow spacing & pb)ene vin judgr fave bee foHOwed, Oe ag sign fun be exercised ora rules are efements. The ‘shen designing the sign face. to be appl . of legend Is to be avoided; tl conte areas of lank panel, m Pay anpoed onthe symmetrical ; ends side by tee a ance Signs) si fesary et juste et it te ght justify te right lst Iv, Elements such as arows and |. Elars may sometimes have t0 ' pales than the principal legend woul normally require. For ‘example, an w relates to several lines of fegends ona direction sign =e a) and Il only b)Illland IV only ) Illland IV only © q Allofthe above Signs are normally located on what side of the road? a) center b) left 5S ¢) right ) mounted over the road acta cd Generally there should not be mor one signs ofa particular type on ear’ except when one sign guppig ?™% another or where route or directing m8 must be grouped. When it bec necessary to convey two or more Aitoren messages at one locaton, separates must be located & minimum tataneg™t than a) 30m b) 40m 5c) O6V where V is the a percentile speed in kph 4) 0.5V where V is the a5» speed in kph Peroentg —___ The following conditions ‘should considered inthe erection of overhead sgt displays: |. Traffic volume at or near Capacity I. Complex or closely Spaced interchanges Ml. Three or more lanes in each direction IV. Restricted sight distance, Vv. Multi-lane exits Vi. Large percentage of trucks VIL. Street lighting background Vill. High speed traffic IX. Consistency of sign ‘message location through a series of interchanges X. _ Insufficient space for ground mounted signs a iV and V only + Vi and Vil onty 13, X and X only i y 3) Ali af the above a saa Aa 2Signs should be mounted approximately at right angles to the direction of and facing the traffic they are intended to serve. At curve alignments, the angle of placement should be determined by the course of approaching traffic rather than by the roadway edge at the point where the sign is located. To eliminate possible and undesirable reflection from the surface of the sign, it ‘should be turned about __ away from the normal to the headlight beam. After signs are installed, it is good practice to test them by trial approach run in a motor vehicle both by day and night. way so 9 8 » 6 4 10 1.146 Problem What are the classifications of regulatory signs? L.__ Priority Signs I. Direction Signs I. Prohibitive or Restrictive Signs IV. Speed Signs V. Parking Signs VI. Miscellaneous Signs a) 1,11, Vand Vionly b) 1,1, Vand Vi only c) 1,1V, Vand VI only 1 q) Allof the above What are the different sizes for regulatory signs? 1. Size A for urban low speed roads Il. Size B for rural roads with speed limits between 60 and 70 kph . Il. Size C for high-speed rural highways mutti-lane urban roads IV. Size D for Expressways V. Size E for Municipal roads a) Ill, Vand V only © p) 1,1, Mand IV only ©) Uilland Vonly 4) Allof the above a Signs used to warn motorists of potentially hazardous conditions on or adjacent to the road. Warning signs b) Regulatory signs ©) Direction signs 4) Prohibitive or restrictive signs. — 1.149 Problem What are the classifications of warning signs? |. Horizontal Alignment Signs Il Intersection and Junction Signs ill. Advance Warning of Traffic Control Device Signs IV. Road Width Signs V. Road Obstacle Signsrae aaa TS pedestrian and Schoo! Signs Railway Level Crossing wn Su ry Signs x Other Warning Signs a) blll, Mand V only IV, V, Vand Vil only 1M, Vill and IX only °) se q) Alot the above ee reas, advance warning signs In urban at tancalot id be placed at a di imeavance of the hazardous area. oF 4) not less than 30 m. or more than 100m. b) not less than 25 m. or more than 50m. 3 c) not less than 20 m. or more than 45m. d) not less than 40 m. or more than 100m. eS In rural areas, advance warning signs should be placed at a distance of in advance of the hazardous area. a) not less than 60 m. nor more than 150m. b) not less than 80 m. nor more than 200 m. =F «not less-than 75 m. nor more than 225 m. ) not less than 50 m. nor more than 120m. The different general size of Hortzonta Allgnment Signs: |. Size A, for use of urban or | roads low Speeq W. Size B, for rural roads with limits between 60 and 70 kph = °*d Ml, Size C, for high-speed rural highway, 'V. Size D, for high-speed urban Toads a) |, land Ill only b) I, Iland IV only c) Il, Illand IV only &F q Allofthe above a 1.153 Problem Types of Horizontal Alignment Signs, which are used to indicate the type of roay curve ahead of the motorist. 1 Sharp turn IL Reverse turn | Mi. Curve turn | 'V, Reverse turn V. Winding road Vi. Hairpin curve a) II, llland V only b) Hl, Ill, [Vand VI only ©) Ill, Vand V only 5S d) Allof the above i 1.154 Problem Type of sign used in advance of an on where two roads cross at a point vr ority cross & Srossroad sign unction sign Skewed intersectionIGHWAY ENGINEERING Which of the followi i a ipplementary sign? sign is not a a) Advisory sign Fb) Crossroad sign ©) Playground @) School 1.156 Problem Which of the following sign is not a intersection or junction Sign? " a) Priority cross b) Crossroad sign EF ¢) Advisory sign 4) Skewed intersection Sign used only in conjunction with another warming sign to indicate the desirable speed in good weather, traffic and road conditions. [S a) Advisory speed sign b) Supplementary speed sign ¢) Crossroad speed sign d) Side road speed sign 1.158 Problem Clearance sign shall be rectangular in shape which should be in black letters on white reflectorized background. The size the sign shall not be less than a) 4000 mm x 500 mm with the long axis horizontal b) 800 x 400 mm with the long axis horizontal 1500 mm x 600 mm with the long axis horizontal d) 4200 mm x 600 mm with the long axis horizontal uF ee 1.160 Problem The low clearance sign shall be rectangular in shape and not less than 4950 mm x 600 mm in size with the long axis horizontal. It shall be installed on all bridges, underpasses and other structures where the vertical clearance above the road pavement is or less to warn motorist Of the restricted height of the approach structures. Vertical clearance shall be reckoned from the highest flood level. a) 50m o) 52m 1b) 48m 4) 45m _ 4.161 Problem The Slow Down Accident Prone Area or Bumagal Madalas ang Aksidente Dito signs shall be rectangular in shape and not less than, A supplemental sign use to warn the road users of a hazard on a side road in close proximity ¢o the through road. 2) Bind sign b) Advisory speed sign ©) Siping road warning sign © gj) Onsideroad sign us a) 1600 mm x 600 mm in size with ong axis horizontal b) 4200 mm x 600 mm in size with Jong axis horizontal ¢) 1000 mm x 500 mm in size with long axis horizontal d) 1400 mm x 500 mm in size with ong axis horizontal1: about the road users that inform f destinations on in so ae te tpt nereet a FOU signs ) Supplementary St 1.163_Problem Classification of signs in the Directional Signing series are: l _— installed in advance of the intersection. I Those installed at the intersection. Ii, Those on departure from the intersection. IV. Those installed on expressways. a) |, and Ill only b) Iilland IV only c) Il, Mand IV only 5 q Allofthe above Which of the following is not classified as a guide sign? ) Intersection direction signs b) Street name signs 9 signs 4) Tourist information signs HIGHWAY ENGIN 1.165 Problem The background color should be ag} recognizable “by motorist ay tly applicable to the particular Category Guide signs for which i is used, Why the color combination of info a street name signs and kilometer poste?" a) White legend on blue b) White legend on Standard ‘Steen background Black legend on White background 4) Blac legend on yellow backorung "So 1.166 Problem What is the color combination OF advancy direction signs, intersection and g direction signs, and reassurance a signs, including signs giving direction b expressways from the adjacent oad ang street system? "5 a) White legend on standard green or blue background b) White legend on brown background ©) Black legend on yellow backgroung @) Black legend on white background, __2 Reset What is the color combination of ‘signs e ing roadside service and legends ick legend on white background legend on yellow background legend on green background 5S d) White legend on be background eeAA can iat 7,168 Problem Clssicalion of guide signs: 1, Advance Direction Sign i. Intersection Direction Sign i, Reassurance Direction Sign IV. Finger Board Direction Sign V,_ Street Name Signs vi. Town Name and Geographical Feature Signs Vil. Service Signs vil. Tourist Information and Destination Signs Tome 1X. Route Markers a) Lill, IV, Viland IX only b) HIN, V, Vl and Vil only ) INV, Vil, Vill and IX only 5S d) Allofthe above a 1.1741 Problem ‘When distances are shown on guide signs, the following rules shall apply: |. The distance shall be shown in meters for distance up to 999 m The distance shall be shown in 0.1 km increments for distances from 1 km to 49km WM. The distance shall be shown in 0.5 km increments for distances from 5 m. to 9.5 km 1. To the nearest kilometer for greater distances. a) {land llonly b)I.liland IV only ©) Ailland IV only && qd) Allofthe above [4.160 Problem What is the color combination of signs for tourist interest? a) White legend on blue background 1% b) White legend on brown background ) Black legend on green background d) Black legend on white background 1.170 Problem The principal legend on a guide sign should be limited to the number of words a in time he can turn his road to the sign. The legend or destination names. a 4 9 5 » 6 wg 3 _— — — -_ 1.172 Problem Lighting in signs more than 2 m. high normally requires lighting on _ a) _ both sides only © b) both top and bottom c) bottom only d) top, bottom and both sides 1.173 Problem Generally roadside guide signs should be located on the where a driver would expect to see them. US a) right side of the road b) _ left side of the road ) at the.top of the line post d) atthe bottom of an underpass[1.175 Problem ing overhead A type of Advance Direction typical methods of supporting list destinations together wits 27% Mic, ce direction arrows and if Tequired cantover Suppor names and route markers, rat a) Intersection signs b) Route markers Fc) Stack signs , 4) Diagrammatic signs — 1.176 Problem ~ ‘Types of Advance Direction Signs: 5m ei 1 Stack Signs I Diagrammatic signs Ill, Reflectorized signs smn) a) Mandl only b) and Il only my 5c) landitonly iL Butterfly Support 4) Allofthe above 1.177 Problem Stack signs shall indicate the following information: 55m |. Destinations together with | | appropriate direction arrows oe p— | i, Road names Route markers | a) and llonly a) land llonly | {and It only b) land Ill only | 5) land Ill only c) Mand Il only SF qd Allofthe above | d) Allofthe above7 oa i i. ANRae oreo te 1.178 Problem [4.4180 Problem What is the shape, color and reflectivity of an advance direction sign? 5 a) rectanguler in shape, reflectorized white legend and reflectorized gréen background b) rectangular in shape, reflectorized yellow legend and’ reflectorized blue background ©) rectangular in shape, reflectorized white legend, and reflectorized blue background 4) rectangular in shape, reflectorized white legend, and reflacorized brown background Advance direction signs are used in advance of an intersection to indicate destinations along each route leading away from the intersection, providing prior information of the routes ahead by showing place, names, arrows, symbols and instructions to indicate directions. Advance Direction signs should usually be erected: |. in advance of intersections where two arterial roads meet or cross; or an arterial road crossing a feeder road Il. in advance of intersections where the arterial road tums Mil. on feeder road intersecting arterial road \V. in advance of intersections where arterial road may be confused with another road The vertical sequence of panels of a stack signs: 1. Straight ahead arrow - top of sign I. Angled arrow above horizontal arrows: ML Alternate panels to have arrows at opposite ends of the sign a) land ltonly b) Land It only ¢) Wand Ii only 5S qd Allof the above 1.181 Problem Other factors which may affect the size of letter or sign include: 1. Distraction due to road side activities il Signs composed of short legends may be enlarged to increase conspicuity MM. Signs containing short and long legends require a balance of legend size to ensure equal visual impact 'V. The need to emphasize a more important direction by making larger than other names on the sign, a) I, land Ml only b) [lll and IV only ©), Mand IV only 5 d) Allofthe abovewhich Advance Direction Th eye located In 2 of an sign n varies. according to the wtaeertepeed of approaching vehicles. In expec, Advance Direction signe rhould be located at a minimum distance prev the Intersection of ___ if the 85 percentile speed (xph) Is between 71 - 80 kph. we a) 125-150 b) 100-125 o) 75-100 ) 180-250 4.183 Problem Which of the — following ‘standard abbreviation of signs is not correct? 1] 4) EX for expressway ) HWY for highway c) RD for road @) AVE for avenue Street name signs should be located on posts as near as practical to the intersection so that they are clearly visible to both pedestrians and drivers. When the signs are erected in the footway, the height shall be: a) not less than 2.5 m. or more than 3m, measured to the bottom of the ‘sign not less than 2.2 m. or more than 4m, measured to the bottom of the sign ©) not less than 3 m. or more than 3.5 m. measured to the bottom of the sign 4) not less than 4.8 m. or more than 2.8 m. measured to the bottom of the sign = yy Steet name signs shall be rectangug shape with thelr long axis horizon” length of the signs should be" @) not less than 800 mm or 1.4 m and vertical dimensese °® have a minimum of 250 mm sign contains both street name the house numbers and not less 150 mm for street signs hay," one street name "9 ony b) not less than 400 mm 1.8 m and vertical dimensoe have a minimum of 180 mm gt! sign contains both steet name house numbers and not less i! 150 mm for street signs havi one street name ony 5 ¢) not less than 500 mm or than 1.2) m= and dimension shall have a ming’ of 200 mm if the sign conn” both street name ang numbers and not less theres mm for street one street fla faving only 4) not less than 600 mm or 1.2 m and vertical dimension a have a minimum of 250 TM if the ‘sign contains both street name and house numbers and not less 200 mm for street signs having only one street nameY ENGINEERING Town names signs and names of local geographical feature si ee on igns should be 1. tight side of the road 1. atthe boundary or entra: Ill, left side of the road nee oa town IV. atthe entrance and exit to a town a) land Vonly 5 b) J andilonly c) |, land i only d) Il, lNland IV only 1.187 Problem The national highways could be identified by the shield of a route marker that has black numerals and border on reflectorized white background. The size of the shield for route markers when erected as an individual sign on national roads shall be a) 350mm x 400 mm b) 360 mm x 400 mm c) 300mmx 360mm Fg) 310 mm x 360 mm 1.188 Problem The Route Markers should be incorporated in the sign where advance direction signs are erected at an rection or junction. Other Route ers are focated as follows: Lat ctions and junctions wi s need to be assured of the Il. beyond intersections and junctions before which markers have been incorporated in the directional signs M, beyond all intersections and junctions with important roads to Indicate the correct route number of the highway IV. just outside the bullt-up area leaving a city or town in rural areas at intervals of not more than 2 km except where reassurance signs have been erected beyond Junctions which are spaced less than 2km apart Vi. in urban areas at intervals of not more than 2 km except where reassurance signs have been erected beyond junctions which are spaced less than 2km apart VIL. at other locations where reassurance Is considered to be desirable a) (U1 lll, Vand Vi only b) Ii, Ill, Vand V only c) IN, IV, Vand Vi only tS qd) Allof the above 1.189 Problem Asian Highway Route Markers when erected as an individual sign, the size of the shield on national road is: ©] a) 600mmx 750mm b) 600 mm x 800 mm c) 700mm x 800 mm d) 700mm x 850 mm 1.190 Problem Asian Highway Route Markers when erected as an individual sign, the size of the shield on expressways is: a) 800 mmx 950 mm b) 820 mmx 950 mm 6S ¢) 720mmx 900mm d) 700 mm x 900 mm7.191__ Problem is one of the 32 member To EY UNESCAP. ‘As part of our Route Markers and ‘Signs shall be put along the Asian au Our country has been eectgned the Asian Highway route number she route links major seaports and cities In the country comprising mostly of the Dasng Maharlika which commence from L20ag - Manila ~ Legaspi-Matnog - ‘= Allen-Tacloban (-Ormoc-(Ferry)- Cebu) — Liloan - (Ferry) ~ Surigao-Davao (- n de Oro) - General Santos ~ Zamboanga. The total length of AH26 is about _- oe a) 3,517km b) 3625km ) 425k d) 4,675km oe 4.192 Problem ‘Supplemental arrow board signs can be installed and shall have black arrows or legend and black border on reflectorized white background. The direction of the arrows on the arrow board will depend on the road or intersection geometry. In rural areas, at intervals of not exceeding ___except where reassurance signs have been erected beyond junctions located within these limits. a) 12km and not less than 8 km 5S b) 10 km and not less than 5 km ©) _8km and not less than 4 km 4) 6 km and not less than 4 km Supplemental arrow board. sign installed and shall have black a legend and black border on reflect & white background, Sctoreag CaN by The direction of the arrows on ¢ board will depend on the regay intersection geometry. In urban areay °* intervals not more than _. except we, reassurance signs have been gi beyond junctions, which are spaceq gt! than 2 km apart. ‘ety a) km 8k b) 4km Fd) Sim oS 1.194 Problem Traffic instruction sign should not ca long messages and where possibig ‘more than ___ lines of messages Should be used, a) 6 3 b) 4 Fy 5 as Major types of instruction signs used: |. Supplementary signs Il, Movement instruction signs lll. Hazard marker signs 'V. Advance direction signs i), land IV only ‘Vand Ill only d I only of the above1.196 Problem The following signs are called Supplementary Signs: |. USE OVERPASS I. USE PEDESTRIAN CROSSINGS Ill. TRUCK USE LOW GEAR IV. CHECK BRAKES a) |, land only b) I, land IV only ¢) Myilland IVonly 5S d) Allof the above 1.197 Problem Type of sign used when there Is a possibility that through traffic may enter a dead end local road in error. a) DONOTENTER 5S b) NO THROUGH ROAD c) ALTERNATE ROUTE d) ROAD CLOSED 1.198 Problem What are the types of Hazard Markers? 1. One-Way Hazard Markers 11. Two-Way Hazard Markers WW. Width Markers WV. Obstruction Markers a) b) ¢) i @ All of the above [1.199 Problem One-Way hazard markers indicate to the approaching driver the direction to be followed if the marker appears in the driving path. They may point to the left or right as appropriate and are used as follows: > To delineate an abrupt narrowing of pavement, for example, at a lane drop; I. At exposed ends of raised median islands where traffic is required to pass to one side; IM. On central island of a roundabout facing entering traffic; and IV. To delineate the curve approach just prior to entering an intersection. a) land lonly b) |, Hand Ill only ) Shllland IV only 5& q) Allofthe above a 1.200 Problem Signs used to guide drivers through a change in horizontal alignment of the road. Chevron signs b) Supplementary signs c) Guide post signs 4) Delineators 1.201 Problem It is recommended that the spacing of the Chevron signs should allow the driver to see at least __ signs in view while negotiating the curve until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the sign. a) 5 c) 4 1S py) 3 d) 2Peete NES aed =a TN wnat are the types and sizes of Chevron signs? HM-1A, 450 mm x 600 mm 1. HM-1B, 600 mm x 800 mm i, HM-1C, 500 mm x 800 mm IV. HM-1D, 600 mm x 750 mm a) liland IV only b) |, Wand Ml only. 5& ¢) fandilonly 4) Allofthe above 203 Probl ed where it is necessary to waneie an exposed obstuction on traffic island nose at which traffic may pass to either side. This sign can be used on a wide column of an overpass structure, or a median island separating the carriageway with traffic proceeding in the same direction. Two-Way Hazard Markers b) One-Way Hazard Markers c) Width Markers d) Obstruction Markers where any bridge less than 2 Mm, than the approach Pavement running portion of the cai CF IV. where there Is no shoulder we approach road thy a) Il, land IVonly CS bh) |, and iit only c) land Il only d) Allof the above _ A, 1.205 Problem =~ The size of markers to approaches to road bridges; be used x 1. A size - rural area where traffic volume is less thant vehicles per day I. B size —all other cases lll. C size - where average traffic 1.204 Problem Conditions when Width Markers are used at approaches to road bridges: |. where clearance to bridge curb from the end of the running lane is less than the shoulder or curb width of the approach road ll where there are non-fragile vertical obstruction less than 600 mm clear behind the bridge curb than 300 vehicles per day ‘Slew IV. D size - where average traffic ig less than 300 vehicles per day a) only b) Honly ©) Mlonly 5S qd) fandilonly Se [4.206 Problem 7 hts nl They are used to mark the edge of the road and assist the road users by ig the alignment of the road ahead it horizontal and vertical curves, Shevron signs Obstruction markers Guide posts a} Concrete barriersNGINEERING [4.207 __ Problem Guide posts should be erected at or near the edge of the road formation with a uniform distance from the pavement edge. The nominal spacing of guideposts on a straight section of road shall be ___ with post in pairs, one on each side of the formation. a) 120m 0 5 b) 150m 4) 200m 250m Spacing of guide posts when used in curves, having radius up to 150 m. UF a) S=03R+5 b) S=0.6R+5 ce) S=0.2R+5 d) S=O04R+5 1.209 Problem Spacing of guide posts when used in curves having radius over 150 m. a) S=05R © p) S=06R ) S=03R+5 d) S=05R+5 4.210 Problem ma tive ganeis or buttons mounted v3 or guard fence as an Jineate the roadway for driving at nig! a) Reffeciors b) _liluminators 5S c) Delineators d) Barriers Problem (4.214 They are made of reflective materials capable of reflecting light clearly visible under normal atmospheric conditions from a distance of 300 - 500 m. when illuminated by the upper beam of @ standard automobile head lamp. a) Reflectors b) —tluminators 1 «) Delineators 4) Barriers ee Pavement markings have definite functions and limitations: They are subject to traffic wear and require proper maintenance; Il, They may not be clearly visible if the road is wet or dusty; I. They may be obscured by traffic; Their effect on skid resistance N. requires careful choice of materials; and V. They cannot be applied on unsealed roads. a) |, Mand IV only b) I. Mlland Vonly c) I, Wand V only 5= q) Allofthe above[4.213 CE Board May 2016 | What are the four types of pavement and curb markings? a) longitudinal lines, transverse lines, transition lines, and stop lines longitudinal lines, transverse lines, other lines and other markings ¢) longitudinal lines, transverse lines, stop line and center line d) longitudinal lines, transverse lines, center line and lane lines b) 1.214 CE Board May 2016 Types of Reflectorized Markings: 1. Retro Reflector Raised Pavement Markers Wl. Hazard markers Ill, Delineators a) land Illonly b) Land Ill only c) tand Il only IF q Allof the above 1.217 Problem ‘The color of curb markiny of parking. 9° Fr prota || a) white ° Ted 5S b) yellow qd) blacx 1.218 Problem The color of marki fone ings of islands in tine oy a) white ted °F b) yellow @) black The color of markings for bus and py lanes. W a) white ¢) red Fb) yellow 4) black as [1.220 “Problem [4.215 Problem The color of pavement markings is__. 5S a) white c) red b) black d) blue 1.216 Problem The color of pavement markings for an unbroken portion of no-passing lines. a) white c) red 5S b) yellow d) black The color of Keep Intersection markings. on a) white c) ted Sb) yellow d) black witr of No Loading/Unloading Zone » EF red a) white d) black b) yellow[4-222 Problem ‘| The color of Fire Lane Zone markings. a) white SS oc) red b) yellow ¢) black 1.223 Problem ‘The width of solid or broken lines used as pavement markers. 5 a) varies from 100 mm to 300 mm b) varies from 150 mm to 300 mm ©) varies from 100 mm to 200 mm d) varies from 150 mm to 200 mm 1.224 Problem _ Color used in hazard markers to warn road users at locations where the protruding objects such as bridge, piers, traffic signals and other permanent objects on or near the roadway. a) white ted b) yellow = Fd) black 4.225 Problem ‘Atype of line that consist of line segments with equal lengths separated by uniform gaps. The speed of vehicles on the section taken lengths of the line strokes and of gaps between ther. 5S a) broken lines b) solid unbroken lines c) solid line d) straight line [4.226 Problem A type of line that is used where crossing of the line Is elther discouraged oF prohibited. ts generally used to replace oF ‘supplement a broken line where eg. barrier lines, and center tines. it may be either yellow or white depending whether or not crossing the line ts legally prohibited, a) broken lines © pb) solid unbroken lines ¢) lane fine d) straight line a 7 1.227 Problem Means any traffic control device marked on the surface of the carriageway used to regulate traffic or to warn or guide road users. a) Chevron signs b) Delineators c) Lane Line 5S qd) Road Markers _ 1.228 Problem Shall mean any public thoroughfare, public boulevard, and avenue, but shall not include roadway upon grounds owned by private persons, colleges, universities, or other similar institutions. 5S a) Highway b) Expressway ©) Cartiageway d) Intersectionroad, junction, Means any level cross n including open areas formed by sucl crossroad. a) Lane b) Expressway c) Interchange 5 q) Intersection 1.230 Problem ‘Max. speed limit for urban roads. 1.233 Problem A center line may be marked on an Urb or rural road if one or more of the ‘ollonig, conditions are met: L Two lane road (greater than ¢ mi width) carrying an Annual ayn Dally Trafic (ADT) In excons of vehicles road (leas than 6 Two lane less than 6 m but than 5 m in width) carrying an ane excess of 300 vehicles : Winding roads with widths of 5 ™ more. %, IV. Two lane roads greater than 19 i width a) 80kph 5S c) 60kph 5S a) 1, Mandi only b) 90kph d) = 75kph b) |, Illand IV only c) Ui, Mand IV only d) Allofthe above 1.231 Problem Max. speed limit for rural roads. a) 50kph b) 30kph tC) SS ¢) 60kph 70 kph 1.232 Problem It is used to separate opposite traffic movements of an undivided roadway and is generally placed centrally on all roads and bridges 6.0 m or more in width. Under Some circumstances this line may be Placed off-center (eg., where an extra uphill traffic lane is provided or parking on ‘one side of the road only) a) Edge line >) Banier line ©) Continuity ine Conter line 1.234 Problem If the bridge is 5 m. or more curves, center line marks shall be a) discontinued across the bridge ©S b) continued across the bridge ©) discontinued 30 m. from the trig abutments 4) discontinued 25 m, from the bridge abutments if curb: ns $e +235 Problem | | the bridge is less than 5 m. rhe er line ‘marks shallbe___, *'scontinued across the | bridge ‘inued across the bridge ciscontinued 30 m. from the bridge abutments 4) discontinued 25 m, from the bridge abutments.HIGHWAY ENG [4.236 Problem 1.240 Problem _] The center line on a two-lane two-way rural toad or any other road where the 85" percentile speed (or speed limit) is greater than 60 kph, shall be a broken line, with a minimum width of 150 mm and 3 m. long with gaps of __ spacing. Fa) 9m °) 6m b) 8m d) 10m ee 1.237 Problem A line used to separate adjacent lanes of traffic moving in the same direction. Lane line b) Transition line ¢) Transverse line d) — Continuity line Lane lines must not be continued-on the following cases: Across signalized intersections. However, lane lines of low priority road must be discontinued at the intersection. . I. Across side street entrances unless the street is one-way street (going in only) |. Past the start of the taper at which a multi-lane road narrows down IV. At approaches to widened or ‘signalized intersection V. On divided roads a) Illand IV only SS p) |, Wandilonly ©) I, Mand V only d) Allofthe above 1.238 Problem 1.241 Problem Lane lines on roads with 85% percentile speed (or speed limit) of 60 kph or less shall have a minimum width of 150 mm and 3m. long with _ gaps. a) 9m Sc) 6m b) 8m d) 10m [4.239 Problem with 85% percentile excess of 60 kph shall be 156 mx 3m. long and gaps. ca) 9m c) 6m b) 8m 4) 10m ‘As a guide, lane lines should be used in the © following cases: 1. Where the road is wide enough for two or more lanes of traffic in one direction with a two way annual average daily traffic (ADT) of 8000 or more (depending on whether parking is permitted) ll, At approaches to widened or signalized intersection Mil, On divided roads IV. Across signalized intersections |, Mand i only b)|.lltand IV only c) Ill and IV only d) Allofthe aboveHIGHWAY salaial [1.242 Problem J Lane lines which indicates that overtaking from both directions of the road are Prohibited. However, cross movernents are Permitted. Vehicles must always keep to the right of the double yellow lines. a) b) °) = Double white line with a broken yellow line Single yellow ine with a broken white line Double unbroken yellow line Single unbroken yellow line 1.243 Barrier lines may consist of either: 1. Two unbroken yellow lines I, Single unbroken yellow line Il, Single yellow line with a broken white IV. Single white line with a broken yellow line oe a) b) ©) a |, Mand i only I Ill and IV only 4, lll and IV only Allof the above 1.244 Problem Lane lines which indicates that overtaking from both directions of the road and all crossing movements are prohibited. a) 4) wy 4d) Single white line with a broken yellow line Single yellow line with a broken white line Double unbroken yellow line Single unbroken yellow line { 1.245 Problem The following are the cases where ba lines should be used: ee 1. As center fines on a, signalized Intervections osches tb I. As center lines of multi-la where overtaking must be prone because of sign restrictions ite Ill, ‘No-Passing’ zones where there i restricted sight distance dug” a horizontal or vertical curves, or IV. As conter lines on approaches railway crossings to a) |, Mand IVonly b) I, Illand IV only ©) ti lland IV only && qd) Allofthe above = [4.246 Problem) Markings to ‘No-Passing’ Zones are to Applied |, Vertical and horizontal curves on two-lane sealed road ll. Barrier lines shall not be unless the sight distance availabe falls below the appropriate minimum ‘sight distance for at least the length allowed If the length of road, with sight distance below the minimum sight distance, is less than the minimum length of barrier line allowed, IV. Where the distance between the end of one barrier fine and the beginning ext barrier line restricting same direction is less sliowed for roads and a) |, and Monly b) |, Wand 1V only c) 1, [land 1V only ES g) Allof the above[1.247 Problem [a-280 Problem Lines used to delineate the edge of the traveled way to distinguish it from the shoulder area. tt should be a solid white line between 100 mm and 200 mm wide. a) Transition lines 5 b) Edge lines ¢) Transverse lines d) — Continuity lines 1.248 Problem ‘The purpose of installing edge lines is generally based on the following: 1 to discourage travel on road ‘shoulders I. to make driving safer and more assured, particularly at night and during inclement weatherby providing a continuous guide for the driver I to act as a guide past objects, which are close to the edge of pavement and which constitute a hazard IV. to prevent parking at or near intersections a) |, Mand il only b) illand IY only ©) ti litand 4V only SF qd) Allof the above ey 4.249 Problem The recommended width of edge lines for urban road with outer lane width of 3.5 m. ea) 100mm c) 300mm b) 200mm 4) 50mm ec i ‘The recommended width of edge lines for rural roads with outer lane width of 3.5 m. 9 100mm ) 300mm b) 200mm 4) 50mm 1.251 Problem ‘The recommended width of edge lines for expressway with outer lane width of 4 m. a) 100mm = 5c} 300mm b) 200mm 4) 50mm een een 1.252 Problem The road curb for No Parking Zones shall be painted a) white iF ¢) b) blue d) yellow red 1.253 Problem Lines used to indicate the portion of a carriageway assigned to through traffic. It is intended to be crossed by traffic turning a an intersection, or entering or leaving an auxiliary lane at its start or finish. a) Transition line b) Laneline ©) Transverse line © qd Continuity line1.254 Problem ] 1.257 Problem Lines used to guide traffic safely past obstructions on roadways such lands, median strips, bridge piers indicate changes in the width of the traveled portion of the roadway and an increase or Stop lines may be supplemented by “Stop” marked on the carrié y. distance between the word STOP and the stop line should be between . a) 12mto30m reduction in traffic lanes. b) 8mto15m a) Transition lines EE c) 10mto25m b) Lane lines qd) 12mto25m ©) Transverse lines d) Stop lines 1.258 Problem 1.255 Problem ~ Types of Pedestrian Crossings Transverse lines may be classified into the following types: 1 Zebra I, Crosswalk 1. Stop lines I. Give Way lines tl, Giveaway Il. Pedestrian Crossing Markings IV. Transition Crossings IV. Roundabout Holding lines ow a) |, land tll only a) tand i! only b) |, Illand IV only b) I, Hand Ill only 6) $i, Mand IV only c) Mllland IV only 6S q) Allofthe above d) Allofthe above ee 1.256 Problem If a stop sign is used in conjunction with the stop sign (P-1), it should generally be placed in line with the Stop sign. The stop sign should be placed at what distance from the nearest pedestrian crossing line? a) 4m OS 6) 3m oc) 2m qd) im 4 zebra (non-signalized of a_ series 20 mm or 600 mm wide 1 a) b) 5m c) 3m d) 6m 4m| HIGHWAY ENGINEERING Crosswalks are defined by a pair of solid white lines across the road surface with a distance between the line which i a) — not less than 3 m. but not more than 6 m. = b) not less than 4 m. but not more than8m. ¢) not less than 5 m. but not more than 8 m. d) not less than 4 m. but not more than 6m. 61 Lines used to guide vehicles through a turning movement at intersections. It, if used, should be designed as to indicate the proper course for turning vehicles without being needlessly confusing to through traffic or the traffic making other turns. a) Holding lines b) Roundabout holding lines ¢) Types of parking bays |. Parallel parking IL Angle parking Ml, Double parking IV. Curb parking 6 a) Jandilonly b) |, Hand Ill only c) I, land IV only d) Allofthe above To ensure that the flow of turning traffic is not impaired, parking near intersections should be prohibited within the distance of ___ from the boundaries of lateral roads for parallel parking. a) 3m. on both approach and exit sides b) 6m. on both approach and exit sides ©) 4m. on both approach and exit sides © q) 5m. on both approach and éxit sides 1.264 Problem To ensure that the flow of turning traffic Is not impaired, parking near intersections should be prohibited within the distance of __ from the boundaries of lateral roads for an angle parking. a) 8m.on the approach side and 6m. on the exit side b) 10 mon the approach side and 8 m. on the exit side ES ¢) 12m on the approach side and 9m. on the exit side d) 6m. onthe approach side and 4m. on the exit side oe 1.265 Problem To ensure that the flow of turning traffic is not impaired, no parking is allowed within a minimum distance of ___ from the traffic signal post. a) 15m c) 10m 1 b) 20m d) 8mpei Caanei cain ae 1.266 Problem 1.269 Problem — Painted median islands are used on wide roads where light traffic volume cannot Justify the installation of solid curbed median island. The painted outline of the median shall be at least 100 mm wide with a minimum median width of 2 . No painted median a be installed on roads less than _ wide. c) 16m oF qd 10m a) 12m b) 15m 1.267 Problem The Bus and PUJ lane line is an unbroken yellow line 150-300 mm wide used to Separate other vehicles from buses and PUJs. The BUS and PUJ lane line can be supplemented by raised pavement markers on concrete pavements. The line is tapered at the approach to the signalize? intersection. The distance between the taper and the stop line shovic determined according to the capacity of ths intersection and should generally be less than. EF a) 100mm ©) 200mm b) 120mm d) 150mm 41.268 Problem Markings that are often used to guide traffic into the right tuming lanes separated by an island, such as a comer island at a signalized intersection. a) Pedestrian crossing markings ~ b) Diagonal markings 5 ¢) Chevron markings d) Zebra Markings which are placed on sealed shoulders or other sealed portion of the road where traffic is not desired. Such markings are of the same bar width ay other diagonal markings. The spacing between bars is generally 6 m. a) Pedestrian crossing markings TF b) Diagonal markings ©) Chevron markings d) Zebra 1.270 CE Board Nov. 2016 Is a type of thermoplastic lane marking designed to aid and provide motorist with visual, audio and motion warnings on the road. Rumble strips ») Chevron markings + Painted median i) Diagonal markings SE Board May 2046 Messages when painted on pavement should be limited to_ words or less. a) 5m c) 6m b) 4m oq 3m TO —_— The color of Messages when painted 0” pavements. SS a) white red b) black d) yellow a aHWAY ENGINEERIN Length of letters or numerals used on Messages painted on pavement in urban areas. a) 2m 5S) 25m b) 3m 4) 35m Lengths of letters or numerals used on messages painted on pavement on high- speed highways. a) 3m c) 6m b) 4m oq 5m 1.275 Problem Lengths of pavement arrows used for lane use control on high-speed roads. a) 6m c) 6.5m ws 4) 7.5m dé) 55m [4.276 Problem Length of pavement arrow used for lane itrol on urban roads. ust a) 6m 3 7m CS pb) 5m d) 4m _ Se 1.277 Problem 1.278 Problem Small devices which are fixed to the concrete pavement surface to stimulate or supplement painted pavement markings. Raised pavement markings b) Rumble strips c) Zebra d) — Chevron markings 1.279 Problem Hazard markers either as signs or painted markings are to be used on objects so close to the edge of the roadway as to constitute definite hazard. These include such encroachments as underpass plers, abutments, culverts headwalls, utility poles and ornamental buildings. Other adjacent objects which are not likely to be hit unless a vehicle runs off the road, ‘such as guardrails, trees and rocks must be painted . a) _reflectorized silver b) _reflectorized yellow ©) _reflectorized red Sq) _reffectorized white i 1.280 Problem Obstructions in the roadway, if not illuminated shall be — marked with reflectorized hazard markers. For additional emphasis, it is advisable also to mark obstructions other than islands with reflectorized white paint with no less than __ alternating reflectorized black and white stripes. a) 6m c) 3m [Sp 5m d) 4m ‘Type of raised pavement markers placed on undivided roadway. a) Yellow raised b) White raised ¢) Single faced = g) Double facedY ENGINEERING 1.281 Problem 1.284 Problem Type of raised pavement markers placed on divided roadways. J Markers supplementing center or lane tngy may be placed in the gaps mi ‘ between the line segments at a spacing of By aera where fog or heavy rain occurs inthg = raised pull-up areas. 5S ¢) Single faced d) Double faced a) 12m ¢) 6m © b) 9m 4d) 8m 1.282 Problem TT Because of the high cost of installation and 1.285 Problem maintenance, use of raised pavement Markers may be considered on the following condition: |. In hilly areas where fog and rain are frequently the causes of traffic accidents I In winding roads and accident-prone areas In overpass or underpass © a) Jandionly b) land i only c) Mand tit only 4) Allofthe above 1.283 Problem Reflective markers placed ct intervals in gaps along a line may hei define the line particularly at night or uncer foggy or wet conditions, The lines usually treated in this manner are: |. Center lines ML Tum lines IV. Giveaway lines ©F 4) Jandionly b) |, land tll only ¢) Hi, land V only d) Allofthe above Markers supplementing center or lane lines may be placed in gaps midway between the line segments at a spacing of ___ if these is less likelihood of fog and where there ig No street lighting in the rural environment, SS) 12m d) 15m a) 10m b) 9m [4.286 Problem Signs has its own numbering system such as R2-7A(L). What does this sign denotes? a) It denotes a special traffic instruction sign in the Direction Type - R2 and the seventh in the Series, the smallest available and is. left hand version, b) It denotes a warning sign in the Direction Type - R2 and the seventh in the series, the smallest available and is left hand version, ©) It denotes a guide sign in the Direction Type - R2 and the seventh in the series, the smallest available and is left hand version. It denotes a regulatory sign in the Direction Type - R2 and the seventh in the series, the | ‘smallest available and is Ie hand version,HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 4.287 Problem Standard road signs fall into different categories: 1. those for which a complete graphic design is preset, or substantially preset Il. those which are “made to measure” I, those which conform to the graphic design IV. those which include regulatory and warning signs 5& a) Jandilonly b) |. land ttt only c) th land IV only 4) Allofthe above The figure shown is a type of freeway interchanges known 28: 5] a) tor trumpet b) _ partial clover leaf ©) diamond interchanges d) trumpet interchanges oo 1.290 Problem 4.288 Problem The figure shown Is a type of freeway interchanges known as: et. 5S a) clover leaf b) _ partial clover leaf c) diamond interchanges 4d) _ trumpet interchanges The figure shown Is a type of freeway interchanges known 2s: a) cloverleaf © p) partial cloverteat c) diamond interchanges d) trumpet interchanges1.291 Problem 41.293 Problem i of fi The figure shown is a type of freeway The figure shown is a type of freeway interchanges known as: interchanges known as: nr > SS a) _y-interchange b) directional c) _ trumpet interchanges 53 q) flyover with round-about © a) diamond b) clover leaf oe ) partial cloverteaf d) trumpet interchanges 1.294 Problem OO The figure shown is a type of oeney interch: known 4.292 Problem _ — The figure shown is 2 type of freeway interchanges known as: SX S J | ; | => oe 5 a) directional a) directional b) " y-interchange 5S bh) y-intorchange ¢) _ flyover with round-about d) trumpet interchanges ¢) flyover with round-about 4) trumpet interchanges7.295 Problem The figure shown is a type of grade intersection known as: a) channelized b) flared ~ = ¢) muttileg intersection 4) rotary intersection 1.296 Problem The figure shown is a type of grade intersection known as: A é The figure shown is a type of 4leg intersection known as: 5S a) Unchannelized b) Flared c) channelized d) — Multileg intersection 1.298 Problem The figure shown is a type of 4leg intersection known as: a) Unchannelized b) Flared channelized d) Multileg intersectionENGINEERING 1.299 Problem [4301 Problem .301 Problem hown is a type of 3-leg The figure shown is a type of 4-leg The figure st i intersection known as: intersection known as: a) Y with turning roadways b) Flared T © ¢) Unchannelized T d) Unchannelized Y a)‘ Unchannelized 1.302 Problem 5S b) Flared c) channelized The figure shown is a type of 3-leg d) — Multileg intersection intersection known as: 1.300 Prob! | a) Y with turning roadways The figure shown is a typeof3leg "* 6) FlaredT intersection known as: ¢) Unchannelized T 4} Unchannelized Y 302 Problem The figure shown is a type of leg ¢) Unchannelized Y 4) Y with turning roadways | intersection known as: . | a) Y with turning roadways | b) Flared T ¢) Unchannelized T IN ZX "Sq Unchannelized Y "Sa Twith turning roadways b) Unchannelized Tets oe Faerie aca cal dt stad Pipa ‘The figure shown Is a type of 3leg Ne intersection known as: jo parking is a traffic sign classified under ha @ a) Twith turing roadways b) Unchanrielized T 5 a) Regulatory or mandatory signs ©) Unchannelized Y ) eo ory sig informatory signs 1 qd) Ywith turing roadways ©) warning or cautionary signs d) warning or mandatory signs SESSREERsesRReneRnnner 1.305 Problem A highway intersection particularly adopted to toll road connecting where the ; toll can be collected from both ingoing and Speed limitisatraffc sign classified under outbound traffic at the stem of the interchange. 5S a) Regulatory or mandatory signs b) _Informatory signs ©) Waming or cautionary signs a) muttileg intersection ) Waming or mandatory signs b) Trumpet intersection ¢) rotary intersection d) — Orthotropic bridge1.308 Problem A type of interchange which provides for transfer of traffic from one road to another crossing it but with a reduced speed is known as: \ Z\5> \ \ SV a) trumpet interchange b) rotary flyover "¥ ¢) Diamond interchange 4) directional interchange Parking sign is a traffic sign classi under Parking FS 4) Informatory signs b) Regulatory or mandatory signs ©) warning or cautionary signs d) warning or mandatory signs 1.309 | Problem A type of interchange which is sometimes Called a high speed interchange is known @) diamond interchange _>) trumpet ©) y-ype interchange clover leaf ee See 1.311 Problem End of freeway is a traffic sign classified under, informatory and guiding signs b) regulatory or mandatory signs ¢) warning or cautionary signs @) warning and regulatory signs5 a) _informatory and guiding signs b) regulatory and mandatory signs ) warning or cautionary signs d) warning or regulatory signs 1.314 Problem “An interchange with inner loops and outer ~~ '\Z YL——— af PX by over lea a) trumpet & p) clover leaf c) diamond interchange d) rotary interchange 1.313 Problem ‘An at-grade intersection in which there is division or regitlation of conflicting movements ints definite paths of travel by the use of pavement markings, raised islands, or or suitable means to facilitate the safe and orderly movement of vehicles and pedestrian. _—SS = a Four leg channelized ‘ype intersections a) interchange "© b) Channelized intersection c) _ intersection roadway d) highway or grade separation oo 1.315 Problem An interchange with a single one-way: ramp in each quadrant of a shape and position to provide easy exit from and entrance to the major highway and to confine necessary left turns at grade to the minor highway or crossroad. a) trumpet b) clover leaf diamond interchange d) rotary interchange1.316 Problem A system of inter connecting roadways in Conjunction with one or more highway ‘separations providing for the inter change of traffic between two or more intersecting highways, usually without at grade crossing of through and major turning Movements. ¥-Type Interchange interchange b) _multleg intersection ©) channelized intersection d) rotary intersection ‘An at-grade intersection in which the number of traffic lanes or the pavement width exceeds the normal number of lanes. or the normal width of the approach a) _unchannelized intersection Flared intersection c) channelized intersection d) — muttileg intersection HIGHWAY ENGINEERING An interchange with one or more highway separations and direct connections for the major turning movements. Directional Interchange a) trumpet b) clover-leaf © ¢) directional interchange d) diamond interchange a) skyway b) overpass ¢c) interchange 5S d) freeway41.320 Problem An area within a roadway or between roadways from which vehicular traffic is intended to be excluded, ae a) median F p) island ©) outer separation d) —undererossing An intersection with five or more approach roadways. a) clover leaf b) partial clover leaf © ¢) multiple intersection d) diamond interchange ‘An at-grade intersection operating with one-way traffic counterclockwise around a Central area, circular or elliptical in shape, or sufficient size to produce weaving maneuvers In lieu of direct crossing between the various movements. rotary intersection b) mattileg intersection ©) channelized intersection 4) _unchanneiized intersection The figure shown is a type of fully directional interchange which Is commonly known as: i} (It alt lit © a) three —_leval_~—_directional interchange b) four level directional interchange ©) twolevel directional interchange @) _ level directional interchangeis shown is a type of a highway The figure shown is a type of highway The figure sl fy interchange at grade which is commonly interchange at grade which is commonly 5S a) Unchannelized-T b) Flared-T c)_T-with tuning roadway a) Unchannelized-T 4) Channelized-T b) Flared-T 5& ¢) T-with turning roadway 1.325 Problem d) . Channelized-T The figure shown is a type of a highway 4.328 Problem wes interchange at grade which is commonly known as: The figure shown is a type of a freeway _) \ entrance which is commonly known as: | | ee 4s er Pc a amie aks 30m- a) Unchannelized-T b) Flared-T @) taper type entrance we 5} channelized entrance 7 Tl frniny roachry __ 9) unehannelzed entrance _ ©= d) parallel type entrance [1.326 Problem ] | [4:329_Probiem ] The figure shown is a type of a highway The figure shown is a type of a freeway interchange at grade which is commonly entrance which is commonly known as: known as: JL = ' = a T— 180m a) Unchannelzed-T "S a) taper type entrance © b) Flered-T b) channelized entrance ©) T-with turning roadway ¢) _ unchannelized entrance @) Channelized-T ) parallel type entrancea ced ee Mtoe ad 4.330 Problem The figure shown is a type of a freeway exit which is commonly known as: 75.00m- L a) _ taper type freeway exit b) channelized freeway exit c) _unchannelized freeway exit parallel type freeway exit a) right turn only no right turn ©) nouturn d) no entry for all vehicles 1.331 Problem The traffic signs shown indicates the following prohibitions: 2) no stopping b} no overtaking for trucks cc) no entry to all vehicles prohibited to for trucks The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) pedestrians only b) pedestrian crossing c) walk signal prohibited to pedestrians no overtaking for vehicles whose weight exceeds 3.5T b) no entry for cars and buses ©) no parking for cars and trucks d) prohibited to cars and trucks The traffic sign shown indicates: prohibited to all motor vehicles b) no parking to all motor vehicles c) _nostopping to all motor vehicles d) —noovertaking to all motor vehicles1.336 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: 5S a) prohibited to ‘animal drawn vehicle b) animal drawn vehicles ahead c) slow down, animal drawn vehicles ahead d) animal drawn vehicles crossing thru street The traffic sign shown indicates: a) noentry b) no stopping end of all indicates prohibition d) _endof speed limit 1.338 Problem 4 The traffic sign shown indicates: a) min. speed limit b) max. speed limit US ¢) end of speed limit d) — distance to the next municipality NGINEERIN 1.339 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: ae End of prohibition weight greater than 3.5 Tons b) _ noentry to all cars and trucks c) _ nostopping to all cars and trucks d) no overtaking for all cars and trucks 1.340 Problem The traffic sig 8) parking area for buses only ’) no entry for buses Bus stop &" 4) ent of reserved lane for buses a) drive slow b) no blowing of homs c) noise prohibition end of prohibition using audible warning signal2) _ use tight lane only 5 p) obligation to follow the right direction ¢) obligation to tur right, d) obligation to tur the obstacle by its 1.344 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: EF a) obligation to continue straight ahead b) continue straight at your own rist ©) notrafic straight ahead d) dead and straight ahead right side 1.343 _ Problem 1.345 Problem ‘| The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indicates: 4 4 tt q { | a) use left lane only 5¥ b) obligation to follow the left direction ) _ fast moving vehicles use left lane d) obligation to tur the obstacle by its left side. a) obligation to follow the - right direction 5S p) obligation to turn right ©) no right turn on stop signal 4) right turn at your own rist1.346 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: a) _utum to the right b) obligation to tum around obligation to turn the obstacle by its right side d) obligation to follow the right direction 347 Problem ign shown indicates: a) u-turn to the left b) obligation to turn around obligation to turn the obstacle by its left side d) — obligation to fotiow th: 1.348 Probie: The traffic sign shown inci a) noleft tum b) left tum for fast moving vehicles ©) obligation to follow left direction © d) obligation to turn left HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 1.349 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: a) right tum then go straight ahead b) noright turn straight ahead 1 ¢) obligation to go straight aheag orto turn right d) go straight ahead then tum right on the next comer 1.350 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: 5S a) bbligation to go straight or to turn left b) go straight ahead then tum left on the next corner ©) _lefttum then go straight ahead d) _ noleft tum straight ahead | 4.351 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: obligation to turn left or right b) tum left then tum right ¢) — noleft or right turn qd). turn lef or right on the next comerWAY ENGINE The traffic sign shown [see _tevien ——__] The traffic sign shown indicates: a) _utum ahead A @) right curve ahead 53> ) obligation to use the roundabout b) curve toright ) counter clockwise trafic ahead ¢) dangerous double curve at ight 4d) _noleftor right tum alowed OF @) dangerous ight 1.353 Problem 1 [4.386 Problem ——id| rrokleni The traffic sign shown indicates: The traffic sign shown indi | \ \ dangerous ft curve 5 a) dangerous double curve at left dangerous double curve at left 7 zag road ahead 3 c) cure FS") dangerous curve 4) tumleftthen straight ahead [4534 Problem [4357 Problem __—ids The traffic sign shown indicates: The fraffic sign shown indicates | a) left curve ahead 1 a) dangerous double curve at right b) tumleft b) tum right then straight ahead c) curve to left c) curve to the right d) zigzag curve ahead © g) dangerous left curveThe traffic sign shown indicates: warning cross road b) entering cross road ©) entering major cross road 4) accident prone area The traffic sign shown indicates: curve to the right b) dangerous right curve ©) _sigzag curve to the right d) dangerous double curve at right 1.359 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: a) waming cross road | © b) entering cross road ©) entering major cros: d) accident prone area 1.360 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: a) _ entering cross road b) —waming cross road ¢) road intersection at grade entering major cross road 1.362 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: curve to left b) dangerous left curve ¢) — sigzag curve to the left 3) dangerous double left curve ‘The traffic sign shown indicates: a) airport ahead ®F b) airport vicinity c) warning airplanes ahead d) airplane Parking areaetre ta ican ania eisai ica ‘The traffic sign show indicates: AN a) parallel road b) merging traffic lane ) merging traffic narrowed road The traffic sign shown indicates: uf a) headlights required b) roads under repair c) construction holes ahead approaching traffic light The traffic sign shown indicates: A 3} entering major cross-road t) road intersection ahead c) 03d under repair merging traffic 1.368 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warming signs for: Q a) men working ahead b) _ slow men working ahead ¢) excavation ahead roads under repair 66 Prob! The traffic sign shown indicates; a) toil bridge b) river ahead = ¢) Hanging bridge d) approaching river 1.369 Probl The traffic sign shown indicates warning a) school zone pedestrian crossing ©) disabled crossing d) parents and students areaThe traffic sign shown indicates waming Signs for: A @) animals plowing Animal crossing ©) disabled crossing ) pedestrian crossing alle hi Zane anon (ia73_emtien Problem The traffic sign (e273 teste indicates waming signs for: | steep downward road b) steep upward road ) excavation ahead d) watch for falling objects 1.371 Problem , The traffic sign shown indicates warning signs for: narrowing road b) parallel roads ©) cars movement towards center d) _twoway road 1.372 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warning signs for: rough road b) cutand fil ahead ©) excavation ahead d) smooth road [4.374 Probiem Problem [iota proten traffic sign shown indicates warning _ a) steep downward road © b) steep upward road °) head a) ling objects The t signs fer a) check brakes b) inclined road ¢) exhaust free zone slippery roadThe traffic sign shown indicates warning signs for: fa river ahead b) lf ahead ©) watch for faling objects 1.377 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warming signs for: a) 5) °) oF a) opproaching 1.378 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warning signs for: a) _ reversed direction b) merging traffic 5S) twoway road d) _noovertaking on both sides 1.379 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warming ‘signs for: a) land fil area b) excavation ahead ©) caution for landslide caution falling stone 1.380 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates warning signs for: a) entering cross road b) no entry for pedestrians ¢) disaster area railroad crossing roblem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: = zigzag right b)’ dangerous curve c) curve at right d) accident prone areaIGHWAY ENGINEER] 1.382 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: SS a) zigzag loft b) dangerous curve ©) cuneatleft d) accident prone area 83 The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) railroad crossing b) pedestrian lane’ 5¥ ¢) level crossing (guarded) 4) _ level crossing (unguarded) a) railroad station b) railroad crossing ©) level crossing (quarded) + level crossing (unguarded) 4.385 Problem — The traffe sign shown Inde 4. following: a) pedestrian crossing b) athletic stadium ©) running track and field EF q) school 1.386 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates following: : a) culdesac b) side road ) _ T-intersection 5S q) dead end cross road - ae! 1.387 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates th foliowing: a) entering major road 5S b) side road (right) ¢) intersection grade d) tum rightaire cene ENGINEERING 7.388 Problem ‘The traffic sign shown indicates the following: end of overtaking prohibition b) no entry of all cars <) no parking for all cars d) carpark 1.391 The traffic sign shown indicates the . following: 1.389 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) entering major road 5& b) side road (left) ©) intersecting grade The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) _ parallel road narrow bridge ©) narrowing road 4) embankment d) turn left [asso Problem The teffic sign shown indicates the following: steep hill b) steep downward road c), steel upward road d) caution for land slide 1.393 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) follow direction of arrow b) entering cross roads c) nolefttum no tunHIGHWAY ENGINEERING 1.394 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) 90 straight ahead or tun at your ‘own risk =F ) no overtaking ¢) overtaking allowed qd) noutum The following: traffic sign shown indicates the comfort room b) no entry for both men and women, c) only men and women allowed d) gays not allowed 1.395 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: (GN a) bicycle lane b) noentry to bicycle 5® ¢) _fordisabled person d) bicycle crossing 1.396 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) EMT b) telephone office oy emergency telephone ) telegraphic transfer _ The traffic sign shown indicates thy following: 1.398 Problem 5S a) picnic area b) forest zone c) agricultural zone 4) pine tress ahead 1.399 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) road crossing b) Red cross ©) Green cross hospital with emergency use4.400 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) _ left lane move slow b) two way traffic c) right lane move fast Priority to this direction 4.401 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates the following: a) road closed b) dead end c) culdesac no through road 1.402 Problem The stop sign shown indicates what type of traffic signs. Than © a) guide signs b) — waming signs 5S ¢) regulatory signs d) prohibitive signs The speed limit sign shown indicates what a) guide signs b) warming signs regulatory signs d) _ prohibitive signs 1.404 Problem The traffic sign shows indicates what type 1 of traffic signs. F® a) guide signs b) warming signs c) regulatory signs d) prohibitive signs 1.405 Problem The traffic signs shown indicates what type of traffic signs. Not Less Thani ale = x a) guide sign 5 b) warning sign c) regulatory sign 4) prohibitive signThe traffic sign shown indicates what type of traffic signs. a a) guide sign = b) warning sign c) regulatory sign d) — prohibitive sign 1.407 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates what type of traffic signs. a) guide sign 5S ) warning sign c) regulatory sign d) prohibitive sign 1.408 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: end of speed limit b) donot enter ¢) resume speed d) dead end IGHWAY ENGINEERING 1.409 Problem ‘The traffic sign shown indicates: parking b) no parking c) _ police station d) thru stop 1.410 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: a) gosstraight ahead b) cross road ahead ¢) — tumleft or right road junction approach 1.411 The traffic sign shown indicates: Problem no parking b) park at your own risk ©) parking from 8:00 - 11:00 AM. only 4) parking from 2:00 - 4:00 P.M. onlyno blowing of horns b) cross road ahead c) dead end ahead d) quiet zone 1.413 Problem The traffic sign shown indicates: [Post | [> Pefation Ground Level route marker sign b) _ road junction approach c) warming sign d) regulatory sign —— 1.414 Problem Chevron signs shall be used to guide drivers through a changé in horizontal alignment of the road such as curves and less than sharp turns. It is recommended that the spacing of the chevron signs should allow the driver to see at least __ signs in view while negotiating the curve until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs. Sb) 3 Reflectorized thermoplastic rumble strips ‘shall be bonded to typical asphalt or concrete surfaces to provide the following traffic controls. |. Warn/alert . drivers" of roadway condition such as intersections, sharp _horizontal curves, narrow bridge approaches, toll plazas, ages and tunnels I Use as complimentarylenhancement to advance warning signs such as the Stop Ahead or the various Curve signs. Ill Use to preventilessen the effect of drowsiness during long drive, in upcoming attention and highway synopsis. a) land llonly b) land Ill only ¢) Wand Ill only 5 q@ Allof the above 1.416 Problem ‘Types of Chevron signs: L HMA < 60 kph , HM-1B> 60 kph I, HM-C< 70 kph IV. HM-1D >70 kph and it only b) Hand It only c) |, Mand IV only 4) Allofthe aboveBase Subbase Shoulder” Travel way Shoulder Asphalt concrete pavement Aapha Portland coment concrete ‘concrete pavement Asphalt See age : Soe Subgrade ~ abbas ret Aggregate Tse fe ‘Shoulder Travel way ‘Shoulder Portland cement concrete pavement - Multilane General Typ: tA A. Flexible Pavements A flexible pavement is constructed with asphaltic cement and aggregates and usually consists of several layers. The lower layer is called the subgrade. santo 100mm? neon te vsmcesemn ef er B. Rigid Pavements A rigid pavement is constructed with Portland cement concrete and aggregates as shown with flexible Pavements, the subgrade (the lower Pavements), the base layer is optional, Teeth cae ENGINEERING “Sebarade (od) f er PN a sed Expansion Pressure Method ___ expansion pressure = erage pavement density Citi mae cob (Olders baila 2 © Without dowels or tie bars: The critical section is at the edge of a contraction joint it will’ crack approximately 45° with the edges. * M=Wx critical, bli (thickness of pavernent fat edge and at conter) f= allowable tensile stress of concrete in psi or kg/m? W= wheel load in Ib. or kg ® With dowels or tie bars: Purpose of dowel is to transmit the stresses due fo the load from the adjacent pavement.CLL eo teed Pavement § CSI Bile eyes P T?K O95 P= whee! load ‘subgrade pressure = constant value from table California Bearing Ratio — (CBR) opine | car=—___P/A _ CBR for 5 mm penetration ‘A=area of piston plunger P=had applied ~ Modulus of Subgrade = of P= load causing a settlement of 0.125 cm in kg area of standard plate (75cm diam) K = modulus of subgrade in kg / om* besene= 11111. :1* (BL 5°) ieee gz=| 2% |100 146, S= shrinkage factor 2, = void ratio after compacting Joints in Cement Concrete i asin = N= 111-11) © Meena Location of joint: TES SLAB LENGTH _[Sf eF eco Sealing Compound — Filler joa Expaniion Cap with coton waste ‘atthe Back hie Contraction g PIT Aiea x2) 0k-1 zoe Sealing conned 18mm asals —| DOWEL BAR Rie ee ag ado) bemoans Tit Stace (A) Butt Joint With Dowel Bar Sealing Compound 12mm Fully Bonded POWELBAR — Painted (B) Butt Joint With Tie Bar Seating Compound 2mm (B) Butt Joint With Tie Bar Sealer Te Bar (C) Tongue and Groove Warping 1.418 CE Board May 2015 Compute the thickness of a flexible pavement for a wheel load of 50 KN, if the allowable bearing pressure on the base of the pavement is 0.15 MPa and the equivalent radius of the contact area of the tires is equal to 165 mm. Solution: t= 0.564 J— a t= 0.564 54000 * 465 0.15 t=173.4mmWAY ENGINEERING 7ai9__CE Board May 2015 what is the stiffness factor of a pavement if modulus of elasticity is 180 MPa and woe subgrade modulus of 40 MPa? solution: E E, = modus elastty SF. E, = subgrade modus 40 = J— = 0.605 a 7.420 Problem ‘A flexible pavement carries a static wheel load of 53.5 KN. The circular contact area of the tire is 85806 mm? and the transmitted load Is distributed across a wide area of the subgrade at an angle of 45°. The subgrade bearing value is 0.14 MPa, while that of the base is 0.41 MPa. Design the thickness of pavement and that of the base. Atne 85806 = x r? = 165mm ———t. t,=0:564 ft “ wa PZ Ry A 53600 t, =0564, [2 ‘ on 0 t, = 39mm (tickness of pavement) tett, t, = 184-39 t, = 145 mm (thickness of base) : Determine the thickness of a rigid Pavement of the proposed Nagtahan road to carry a max. wheel load of 60 KN. Neglect effect of dowels. fc’ = 20 MPa. Allowable tensile stress of concrete pavement is 0.06 fe. Solution: = [SM = | 60000) ft dena) 773mm ep UR eelilad LNCS Joints placed in concrete pavements, which are usually placed transversely, at regular intervals, to provide adequate expansion space for the slab to expand when the pavement is subjected to an increase in temperature. a) Hinge joint b) Contraction joint ©) Construction joint 5 ) Expansion joint —_ - rn ~2.-~Joints placed in concrete pavements, which ne usually placed transversely fegular intervals across the width of the Pavement to release some of the tensile Stresses that are induced due to @ decrease in temperature. @) Hinge joint Contraction joint ©) Construction joint 4) Expansion joint Joints placed in concrete pavements, which are placed transversely across the pavement width to provide suitable transition between concrete placed at different times or on different days. a) Hinge joint b) Contraction joint Construction joint 4) Expansion joint 1.425 Problem ._ Determine the spacing between contraction Joints for a 3.0 m. slab having a thickness of 20 cm. Coefficient of friction between Concrete and subgrade is 1,5 and unit wt. Of concrete 2400 kglcu.m. Allowable tensile stross of concrete is 0.8 kg/cm? and that of steel is 800 kglcm2, Unit weight of steel is 7500 kg/cu.m steel bars having a diameter of 1.6 cm. Total reinforcement is 4 kgim? and is equally distributed in both directions. For plain cement Concrete (without dowels). b=3m 5=300cm. Consider only half ofthe section (Using Principles of Mechanics) = {4} 22 }(a,(2400) = 720 kg w-(5} 3 ) N=720L kg. FeuN F=1.5(720L) F=1080L kg T=300(20)(08) T=4800 kg TsF 4800 = 10801. L=4.44m. Le 2x10" 2(0.8)10)¢ _ 1.426 Problem A conerete pavement 8m wide and 150 mm thick is to be provided with a center longitudinal joint using 12 mm @ bars. The unit’ weight of concrete is 2,400 kg/m’, Coefficient of friction of the slab on the subgrade is 2.0. Assuming an allowable working stress in tension for steel bars at 138 MPa, determine the ‘Spacing of the longitudinal bars in mm.sean =) 5 re EE 12 ratte? HI 2pN F=2(14126.4)S f= 2825285 TF 5600 = 2825288 g=0552m $=552mm Pavements =" 4.427 Problem A412 mm a bars is used as the longitudinal bars of a concrete pavement. It is spaced at 600 mm on centers. The width of roadway is meters and the coefficient of friction of the slab on the subgrade is 20. Thickness of slab is 150 mm. If the allowable bond stress is 0.83 MPa, determine the length of the longitudinal bars. Solution: 5-600 piety W = 0.60(0.15\4.5)(2400)9.81 W=9536.32 W=N=9 535,32 F=uN F=2(9535,32) TSF T= 1907064 T=ndLU 19 070.64 = (12) L (0.83) L=609.5mm * 2L = 1219 mm (length of bars) 3 The width of expansion joint gap is 24 mm in a cement concrete pavement. If the laying temperature Is 12°C and the maximum slab temperature is 50°C, calculate the spacing between the expansion Joints. Assume coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete to be 9.5 x 104 per C’. The expansion joint gap should be twice the allowable expansion in concrete. ETO es Solution: Expansion in concrete = S =12mm Expansion in concrete = 0.012 A=0.012m. A=KL(T, -T) 0.012=9.5x 10 (50- 12)L. L= 33.24 m. (spacing botwoen expansion jonts)HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 1.429 Problem Determine the spacing - between Construction joints for 3.5 m. slab width having a thickness of 200 mm, coefficient Of friction is 1.5. Allowable tensile stress In Concrete and steel are 0.8 kgicm? and 1400 kglcm? respectively. Use plain cement concrete, W= 5 (2520) x W=840L kg ee 1.431 Problem 7 ” Compute the pavement thickness by N= 840 L kg as expansion pressure method, if T= 350(20)(0.8) } expansion pressure Is 0.150 kg/cm? and the T= 5600 kg se o{ average pavement density is 0.0025, 5600 = N 5 kglcm?, 5600= 1.5 (640). Solution: b= 444m. t = —_©*Pansion pressure ‘Solution: = —— = 333.33 in? Contact area 120 $= 44 (333.33)(2.1) $ =2860071 b. P T=Kbg, & 40000 T= 50100 F9500 71 T=7.21 inches (thickness of grenuler base) CUT el aril) Using E DEC e te fo Ott Rela tren ty Lite} Lila l=Cey 1.430 Problem In a plate bearing test, a pressure of 41 psi was required to deflect a 30 inches diameter plate by 0.2 in, A flexible runway Pavement is to be designed for a deflection Of 0.5 in under a Single wheel load of 40000 Ib. with 2 tire pressure of 120 Psi. Compute the thickness of a granular base using McLeods method. Use the value of ke 50 for the actual contact area and a conversion factor of 2.1 for a ‘subgrade Pressure corresponding to the actual Contact area and deflection of 0.5 in. 1.432 Problem The CBR value of a standard crushed rock fora 5 mm penetration is 76 kg/cm? when it was subjected to a penetration test bya piston plunger 6 cm. dia. moving at a Certain speed. What is the CBR of soil sample when subjected to a load of 105 kg it produces a penetration of 5 mm?3.71(100) _ caR= aq = 488% te Ww] 475 1 . CBR pr. a t= [A 6 8K t= 31.74em, 7.433__ Problem The thickness of a pavement is cm. Awhoel load of 4000 kg with a tire pressure of 8 kg/cm? is acting on the Surface of the pavement. What is the maximum CBR value of subgrade soil upporting this load? Use the formula developed by U.S. Corps of Engineers. 1.434 - Problem Compute the thickness of a pavement if the CBR value of subgrade soil is 6%. Wheel load is 4000 kg with tire pressure of 8 kglcm?, Use the formula developed by the U.S. Corps of Engineers. The soil sample was obtained from the project site and the CBR test was conducted at field density. The sample with the same surcharge imposed upon It is then subjected to a penetration by a piston plunger 5 cm. diameter moving at a ‘speed of 0.127 cmimin. The CBR value of the standard crushed rock for 0.1 Inch (2.5 mm) penetration Is 70.45 kglcm? (1000 Ibfin2) and for 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration Is 1500 Ib/in? (105.68 kg/cm”). Compute the CBR of the soil sample whose results were as follows: Penetration Load Penetration Load (ram) (ha) (mm) (ka) 0.0 0 3.0 59.6 0.5 6.2 4.0 68.5 1.0 15.4 5.0 75.2 15 30.2 75 90.3 20 40.5 10.0 86.4 25 55.33 125 101.4 Solution: CBR(%)= Unit load 0.10 nch penetration 499 1000 thin? Unit oad at 0.2 inch penetration cary = oe x 100 Note: The CBR vali6Q0 thinStandard crushed rock for 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration is 1500 Ibfin? (105.68 kg/om?) and for 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) penetration is 1000 Ibvin’ (70.45 kg/cm?)IGHWAY ENGINEERING For the 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) penetration : (Using a 5.cm diam. plunger) F Pieenes = 55.33 Te Pressure = 2.818 kgfom? 22H, 70.45, CBR=4% For the 0.2 inch (5 mm) penetration : (using a5 om. diam. plunger) CBR= 100 CBR = 3.62% Use CBR = 4% (use the bigger value of either 2.5mm or 5 mm penetration) 6 Problem Compute the CBR of the soil sample shown if the sample with the same surcharge imposed upon it is subjected to a penetration by a piston plunger 1.95 inches in diam. The CBR value of the standard crushed rock for 0.10 inch penetration is 1000 Ib/in? and for the 0.20 inch Penetration is 1500 Ibvin2. Penetration Load Penetration Load (inches) (Ib) (inches) (Ib) 0.025 705 0.200 = 2102 2.050 4129 0.300 2359 0.075 1422 0.400 (2574 . 1631 0.500 = 2675 0.150 1896 Solution: ss . For the 0.10 inch penetration, using @ plunger diam. of 1.95 inches. Pressure = © rk _ 1631 Pressure = Foy Pressure = 546.13 Ibvin” _ 546.13 CBR= For the 0.20 inch penetration, using @ plunger diam. of 1.95 inches. x 100 = 54.6% say 55% F Pressure =“ = 2102 703.84 bin? Pressure F957 703. 703.84 1500 Use CBR = 55% (use bigger value between 0.4 inch and 0.2 inch penetration) i 1.437 Problem Using the design curves for flexible pavements with a given California Bearing Ratio, compute the thickness of the base and sub-base of a flexible pavement with 3 inches surfacing on top of the base for a 12000 Ib wheel load. CBR for poorly graded sub-base is 35% and CBR for (sand) subgrade is 20%, CBR= x 100 = 46.9% say 47% Solution: For CBR = 35%, draw a horizontal line from the intersection of the 12000 Ib. wheel ioad diag. and the CBR rating which is 35%, and the thickness 6 inches is indicated. Draw another horizontal line from the intersection of the 12000 Ib. wheel load and the CBR rating which is 20% and the thickness of 8 inches is indicated.sp CURVES FOR FLEXIBLE ROADS ESOT SYA BEARING RATIO-PER CONT cau 61 0 1+ + mL nu fRakric Base I Surfacing | leysleusteed Poorly graded Sub-base CBR= 35% (Sand) Sub-grade CBR=20% From the figure, the thickness of the sub-base is 8-6 = 2 in, and the thickness of the base is 6-3=3in. _ ut: eee 1.438 Problem ‘An undisturbed sample of material taken from a borrow pit has a void ratio of 0.70. Results of the Proctor compaction test indicate that the material as compacted on the roadway will have a void ratio of 0.48. What shrinkage factor should be used in computing borrow and embankment quantities? Solution: ‘Shrinkage factor = (| 100 te, Shrinkage factor = { 270-048 | = 1.94% 1+0.70 a Modulus Of Subgrade A Reaction 1.439 bI The loadings and the corresponding settlement readings are recorded to obtained the modulus of subgrade reaction of soll sample. The standard diameter of plates used is 75 cm in diameter. Compute the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil sample, Loads (kg) _Settlement (cm) 0 0 500 kg 0.025 1000 kg 0.050 1200 kg 0.075 1400 kg 0.100 4900 kg 0.425 2000 kg 0.150 2250 kg 0125 Solution: For a settlement of 0.125cm P_ 1900 =——— =043 Foe or ke 0.125 my) 0.125 K=3.44kg / cm? (modus of subgrade eacon) 1.440 Problem : Upon completion of grading operations, a subgrade was tested for bearing capacity by loading large bearing plates. it was found out that a load of 22290 N produced ‘a deflection of 3 mm under a plate 450 mm in diameter. Based on this load, what Is the modulus of subgrade reaction?ra Solution: P=oA 22280 = 0(§) (4507 3 =0.140 MPa Modulus of subgradewgacton = —SHess_ Deflection Modulus of subgrade reaction = 0.140 3 ‘Modulus of subgrade reaction = 0.04667 Nim? Modulus of subgrade reaction = 46670 KN / m? ee 1.441 Problem Compute the modulus of ‘subgrade reaction for a 15 cm. thick cement ‘slab, having a Modulus of elasticity of 210000 kgicm?, Poisson's ratio of 0.13 and a radius of relative stiffness of 67 cm. Use Westergaard equation: Solution: ee L=|— _ [ae _ J _2to000(15)° J a E ft ts 4 ers (ee) anit 21 = 8007781507 k= 2.98 kg/cm? ——r aa MMe a aT 1.442 Problem Determine the modulus of sy reaction for a standard plate 75 cm in The loadings and the correspon, Settlement dial readings 28 obtained yt 30 cm. diam. plate. " Loads Settlement (mm) 470 kg 0.25 mm 940 kg 0.50 mm 1200 kg 0.75 mm 1390 kg 4100 mm 1490 kg 4.25 mm 4600 kg 4.50 mm 41650 kg 4:75 mm Solution: Keo (modulus of subgrade reaction) P fee For a settlement of 0.125 0m the load P= 1490 kg = 1400_ #30" F = 2.108 kgicm? K, = 16.87 kglem? For a standard plete the alam. is 75 om. K,a=Ka 1687 (30) =K (75) K=6748kg/ om?ompletion of grading operation: veer ade Was tested for bearing capacity subsieding large bearing plates. if the by Ming modulus of subgrade reaction is cual to 196.49 psi per inch, compute the oad which produces a deflection of 0.10 than under a plate having radius of9 in, olution: son = 8085S subgrade reaction = tection sg: SES 198.49" “O10 Stress = 19.649 psi uF Sess" F = 19,649 (n)(9)° F = $000 Ib. Oya Tee Oe eiuiisttl =) ALLL |< iienermemeed ‘A pavement slab 15 m. wide and 200 mm thick is laid in three strips, each 5 m wide. The coefficient of friction between pavement and subgrade is 1.40, allowable tensile stress in steel is 138 MPa and the allowable bond stress between concrete and steel is 0.76 MPa, Determine the length and spacing of 16 mm round tie bars. Solution: W=S(0.2)(5)(2400)(9.81) W=23544S NeW TAL T= E16) (138 T= 27746.55N TsF T=pN TTAB 55 = 1,4(23544)S $=0.842m = 842mm T=11(16)x(0.76) 2774655 = 11(16)(0.76)x x= 726mm x= 1452mm a Een eee eater Design the total thickness of a highway pavement using the plate load test method if the base course has a constant value of 90, The wheel load is 4100 kg. The total subgrade pressure for the same contact area, deflection and number of repetitions of the load Is equal to 2100 kg. Provide 5 ccm, of bituminous surfacing on the top of the computed thickness. Use Mcleod method. Solution: eKn? TKhdy ¢ 4100 T= 606 2509 T=26.15.m. (Thickness of granular base) Total thickness = 26.15 +5 Total thickness = 31.15 cm. =}HIGHWAY ENGINEERING Traffic Index 1.446 Problem Compute the traffic index if the annual value of equivalent wheel load (EWL) is 32,600,000. Solution: Traffic index = 1.35 (EWL)2-"1 Traffic index = 1.35 (32,600,000)9-11 Traffic index = 9.05 CCE ESE Sey 1.447 Problem Compute the residual strength in concrete slab (pavement) at the edge region if the allowable flexural stress of concrete is 40 kg/cm? and the warping stress at the edge is 21.8 kg/cm”. Solution: Residual strength = allowable flexural stress - warping stress Residual strength = 40 - 21.8 Residual strength = 18.2 kg/cm? ee se ( om Mel \ ke Beers 1.448 Problem Compute the edge load stress for a concrete pavement having a residual strength of 20.56 kg/m? and a factor of safety of 1.07. Solution: __ residual strength Factor of safety = edge load sess Edge load stress = 19.21 kg / cnt” ee ieee ecg in Pavements 1.449 Problem Aconcrete pavement having a thickness of 15 cm. carries a wheel load of 5100 kg, Compute the stress if the load is acting the comer of the slab. Use Goldbecks Formula: Solution: 3-2 8, = stress due to comer load, kg/om? P = comer load in kg h= thickness of slab in cm. _ 35100) S, = 68kg/ cm? eutsek mdd jie os 41.450 Problem - Laboratory tests indicate that a certain subgrade has a CBR of 5. What thickness of flexible pavement structure should be specified for a 12000 Ib. wheel load?WS S67 E10 1S 203040 oo tO (CBR in per cent at 0.1 inch penetration ‘for compacted and soaked specimen Using the design chart for CBR Method of design of flexible pavements for highways and airport runways. Thickness of pavement = 17 in. uivalent Thickness of Eee ey j (eel gece 1.451 Problem Compute the equivalent thickness in gravel of a bituminous concrete surface course having a thickness of 10 cm. and a cohesiometer value ¢ = 60 if a gravel sub base having a thickness of 10 cm. has a cohesiometer value c= 15. Solution: 15 ° (:] ¢ . 4 .( 60)" 10 (15 t= 1320m, ne Using the design curves for a flexible pavement, compute the thickness of the sub-base (silty sand) having a CBR of 15%. The sub-grade (sandy clay) has a CBR of 8%. The pavement is subjected to 12000 Ib. wheel loads, Use 3 in. as thickness of the surfacing. Solution: DESIGN CURVES FOR FLEXIBLE ROADS. CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO-PER CENT 0234 5678910 90 1“ 6 8 ~» 2 ‘4 FZ wwe La 4 AVY TRAC) i 7 Surfacing tT * 4 | Base & Silty sand Sub-base 4” CBR=15% (Sand) Sub-grade CBR=8% Draw a horizontal line from the intersection of the CBR reading of 8% and the 12000 Ib. curve, it indicates a thicknéss of 13 inches. Draw a horizontal line from the intersection of the CBR reading of 15% and the 12000 Ib. curve, it indicates a thickness of 9 inches. The thickness of the sub-base is 13-9 = 4Pau ear y Using Expansion Pressure adr 1.453 Problem Compute the pavement thickness by Pressure method if the expansion pressure is 0.150 kg/cm? if the density is expansion average pavement 0.0025 kglem?, Solution: t= 04180 kglom? 0.0025 kglom? t= 600m, OO Sie i ieee 1.454 CE Board May 2015 What is the stiffness factor of a pavement if its modulus of elasticity is 180 MPa and whose subgrade modulus of 40 MPa. Solution: 1.455 Problem Hf pavement and sub grade are considered as two layer system a stiffness factor is to be introduced to take into account the different values of modulus of elasticity of the two layers. If the modulus of elasticity of the subgrade is 100 kg/cm? and the modulus of elasticity of the pavement is 1000 kg/cm?, what is the stiffness factor? ASPHALT MIXTURE 1. 3. Absolute specific gravity of composite aggregates g-— _ Foe 6, G, G, where: G = absolute specific gravity of composite aggregates Gs= sp.gr. of sand Gr= spgr. of filer Ga= sp. gr. of asphalt cement Ps = percentage weight of sand P1= percentage weight of filer Ps = percentage weight of asphat cement Bulk specific gravity (apparent Sp.gr.) where: d= bulk sp.gr. or apparent sp.gr. We = weight of compacted test specimen inair Ww = weight of compacted test specimen in water Porosity:‘A sheet asphalt mixture is to be made using the following percentages by weight of the total mix. Material Specific * Percentage ’ Gravity of Weight Sand 2.68 80% Filler 2.70 12% Asphalt Cement 1.01 8% ‘Acompacted test specimen weighing 11.18 Nin air was found to weigh 6.33 N when suspended in water. © Compute the absolute specific gravity of the composite aggregates. @ Compute the bulk specific gravity. @® Compute the porosity. Solution: @® Absolute specific gravity of the composite aggregates es a O28 268 270 1.01 =237 ® Bulk specific gravity ® Porosity G-d _ 237-231 ne = SS 50.0235 G 237 N= 253% When a sample of sand having a dry weight of 600 grams Is passed through a set of standard sieves, the weight in grams retained on the various sieves are as follows. , % of individual fraction Ses the retained in grams 38 0 4 108; #8 90 #16 150) #30 66 #50 114 #100 72 Determine the fineness modulus. Solution: %ot individual | Commutative | Commutative Sieve | fraction | % passing in | % retained in No | retained | grams grams in grams 38 ° 600 “4 108 492 | 600-492=108 #8 % 402 | 600-402=198 6 | 150 2 | 600-252-048 #0 6 1a | 600-t86=414 0 | 114 2 600-722528 #00 | 72 ° 6000 =600 500 2196 2196 us = Fineness Modulus. 600 Fineness Modulus = 3.66HIGHWAY ENGINEERING 1.458 m A core of compacted asphalt concrete pavement was tested for specific gravity. The following weights were obtained. Weight of dry_— specimen in air = 2007.5 grams ‘Weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in alr = 2036.5 grams Weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in water = 1135.0 grams Bulk specific gravity of the paraffin = 0.903 Calculate the bulk specific gravity of the core. Solution: O-E- = bulk specific gravity of the core ‘A= weight of dry specimen in éir (D = weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in air E = weight of specimen plus paraffin coating in water F = bulk specific gravity of paraffin ue 2007.5 (20365-1135) - 20885-70078) d=2.309 4=2.31 (buik specific gravity of core) 1.459 Problem A bituminous mat is to be constructed using the upper limits of grading based on AASHO Specifications. This aggregate mixture is composed of 92% crushed rock (sp.gr. = 2.63) and 8% limestone dust (sp.gr. = 2.72). Determine the theoritical maximum density of the combine aggregate. Note that this is also the absolute specific gravity of the aggregate mixture. G = absolute spect gravity of composite aggregates . = percentages of coarse materials by weight = percentages of fine materials by weight G,, = specific gravity of coarse material G, = specific gravity of fine meter 1.460 Problem A bituminous mat consisting of an aggregate mixture which is composed of 90 percent crushed rock (sp.gr. = 2.64) and 10 percent limestone dust (sp.gr. = 2.71), Determine bulk sp.gr. of the bituminous mixture so that the compacted mixture will have a porosity 5 percent. Solution: 100 G= d= 25175 (bulk spgr,)4.461__ Problem sheet 3 phalt mixture is to be made ag the fo following percentages by weight of total mix sand (sp-t- = 2.67) 78% filler (sp.g0- = 2.71) 12% Asphalt cement (sp.gr.=1.01) 10% Find the theoritical maximum denalty of the mixture. Solution: 100 es |= +t 2\.0 O | 0 @ , 100 7%, 12, 10 267 * 271” 401 G=230 (absolute sp.gr,) Density = (2.30)(1000) Density = 2300 kg / m* Ge 1.462 Problem A sheet asphalt mixture is to be made using the following percentages by weight of total mix. Sand (sp.gr. = 2.68) 80% Filler (sp.gr. = 2.70) 12% Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 1.01) 8% ‘A compacted test specimen welghing 1140 g in air was found to weigh 645 9 when suspended in water. What is the Porosity of the compacted specimen. Solution: = PG. +PG, +P.G, 100 12 2,8 268" 270 * 401 G=2.37 (absolute sp.gr) Bako = = buk spar. A plant mix is composed of materials combined in the following proportions by weight. Crushed stone (sp.gr. = 2.70) 50% Sand (sp.gr. = 2.65) 39% Limestone dust (sp.gr. = 2.70) 5% Asphalt cement (sp.gr. = 1.01) 6% The compacted mixture has a bulk sp.gr. of 2.36 after rolling. Determine the porosity of the compacted mixture.OH, BM, 5, 6 270° 265° 270 101 1.464 Problem An asphaltic concrete is made up of the following materials proportion by weight as shown. Crushed stone (sp.gr. = 2.67) 45% Sand (sp.gr. = 2.70) 44% ‘Stone dust (sp.gr. = 2.60) T% Compute the weight of a 50 mm thick surface course in kg/m?. Solution: 4 44 7 4 + so he ss 267 270 260 098 W=VxD W= (1) 0.05 (2.5)(1000) W=125kg/m* GINEERING , A bituminuous mat is to be constry, using an aggregate mixture which jg composed of 90 percent crushed (sp.gr. = 2.60) and 10 percent lir dust (sp.gr. = 2.70). What is the apparen, or bulk specific gravity of the bituminuoys mixture if the compacted mixture will hayg ‘a porosity of 5 percent. G=261 (absolute sp.gr.) 2G: nem (porosity) 005= 261-d 261 261 -d= 0.1305 d=24795 (apparent or bulk sp.gr.) 1.466 Problem Data on a particular asphalt concrete paving mixture are as follows: Materials Specific Percent Gravity by Weight Asphalt cement 1.02 63 Limestone dust 282 9.0 Sand 2.65 40.0 Crushed gravel 2.65 447 For this mixture, determine the theoritical specific gravity of a voidless mixture.WDA cd a ed eis oe oe B, G, Gy, 0, 0 aT too’ 282 265 265 From the given data of a particular asphalt concrete pavement mixture, compute the percent voids, if the measured bulk specific gravity is 2.37. Materials Specific Percent . Gravity by Weight Sand 2.64 40.0 Crushed Gravel 2.64 47 Limestone dust 2.82 9.0 Asphalt cement 1.02 63 vs (241-237) Ta x100 V= 1.66% (percent of voids) The proportion of the weight and specific gravities of a particular asphalt paving mixture are as follows. * Materials Specific Percent Gravity by Weight Asphalt cement 1.00 10.4 Limestrone dust 2.80 122 Sand 2.60 288 Crushed gravel 2.65 86 Calculate the weight of a square meter of 38 mm wearing surface composed of this sheet asphalt mixture. Solution: G= 104, 122 , 208 , 486 +00 * 280 * 260 * 265 G=2.26 (theortical sp.gr of asphalt mixture) W=VD W=(1)(0.038)(2.26)(1000) W= 85.88kg/ m? 1.469 Problem During a working day of 8 hr, a particular hot plant produces enough asphalt conerete to lay 11500 m? of wearing course 75 mm thick, compacted. Mix proportions, by weight, sp.gr. are as follows: Materials Specific Percent Gravity by “ee Asphalt cement 1.02 Limestrone dust 275 : Sand 2.66 a“ Crushed stone, 2q7 45ey) The capacity of the mixer, counting all Ingredients is 90 kN per batch. Determine the number of batches that must be run to produce 11500 m? of surfacing. W=VxD WE 11500 (0.075)(2.47)9.81) W= 20898.98 kN (required wt of surfacing) No. of batches required = es No. of batches required = 232.21 batches ee 1.470 Problem The following data of a particular asphalt Concrete mixture. Compute the percentage of voids in the laboratory molded ‘specimen, Materials Specific Percent Gravity by Weight Limestone dust 2.80 17.0 Sand 2.60 73.0 Asphalt cement 1.02 10 A cylindrical specimen of the mixture was molded in the laboratory and weighted in air and water as follows. Weight of dry specimen in air= 110 grams Weight of saturated surface - dry specimen in air = 114 grams Weight of saturated Specimen in water = 60 grams HIGHWAY ENGINEERING @ y= 228-208) 2.28 V = 10.53% (percentage of voids in the laboratory molded specimen) }00 ee 1.471 Problem | The following are the. ingredients to be used in preparation of a trial mixture. Materials Percentage Specific of total mix gravity by weight Coarse aggregate 47.4 2.716(bulk sp.gr) Fine aggregate 47.3 2.689(bulk sp.gr) Asphalt cement 5,3 1.03 Max. — specific gravity of paving mixture = 2.535 Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture = 2.442 Compute the bulk specific gravity of tot aggregate. -mn: seg 066) PtP, Se RB d 4, 473 +474 6,773. TA M3 ATA 2689 * 2716 G, = 2702 SSS 4.472 Problem . From the given data shown in the table for \-?|- amix design for asphalt concrete. Materials Buk Spr. of spgr. weight ‘Asphalt cement 1.03 5.3 Fine aggregates 2.689 473 Coarse aggregate 2.716 474 Max. specific gravity of pavieg mixture Gmm= 2.535 Bulk specific gravity of compacted mixture Gmb = 2.442 Compute the effective specific gravity of aggregate. G_, = max. spgr. of paving mixture G, =sp.gr. of asphalt F, = asphalt (percentage by total wt of mitre) ¢, = 100-53 100 53 2535” 103 =2.761 A tabulation shown are materials and its Properties which are used in a compacted Paving mixture: Materials Spor. Bulk. of spgr. weight Coarse aggregate 269 46.2 Fine aggregate 272 46.0 Asphalt cement = 1.2 78 Compute the asphalt absorption of the aggregate expressed as percentage by weight of aggregate. Max. sp.gr. of paving mixture Gum = 2.54. Solution: 109 (8278018, G,, = effective sp.gr. of aggregate G,, = bulk sp.gr. of aggregate G, = spgr. of asphalt 269 272 (2906-2705) 149) P= 100 705 (2.906) P, = 261Compute the effective asphalt content of a paving mixture which are as follows: Materials: Bulk = =Spgr = of sp.gr. weight ‘Asphalt cement 1.03 53 Fine aggregates 2.689 413 Coarse aggregates | 2.716 ATA Max. sp.gr. of paving mixture Gym = 2.535 = ATR HATA 473 + 474 2689 2716 G,, = 2.702 (bulk sp.gr. of aggregate) G, = 2.761 (effective sp.gr. of aggregate) Asphalt absorption of the aggregate : 6, -G,)6, 6, S, (2761-2702) 4 99 2.761 (2.702) P., =0.81% by wt of aggregate P, =100 P, = 100 meee Effective asphalt content : P, £473 +474 P =947 0.81(94.7) 100 P., = 4.53 (effective asphalt content) P, =53- a 1.475 Problem ] The following ingredients are used in the preparation of an asphalt concrete paving mixture. Materials Percentage of Total Specific ‘Mix by Weight Gravity ‘Asphalt coment 7.0 1.030 Mineral filler 70 3.100 Fine aggregate 30.0 2.690(bulk spr) Coarse aggregate | 56 © 2.614(bulk spgr) Max. specific gravity of the paving mixture Gmm = 2.478 Bulk specific gravity of the compacted paving mixture sample Gmp = 2.384 Compute the percentage of voids in the compacted mineral aggregates. Solution: = th th wR AR 9 9 9% g, = 649047 me gg 2611 2690 3.10 G.uae fois inte mineral ppregtes Gas Pe waz 100- 230+ 56 778 2.384 (86) wwa= 100° > 668 MA = 28.154% of voids inthe mineral aggregates eaueaaneean! Compute the percentage of voids filled with asphalt If the maximum sp.gr. of paving mixture Gon = 2.535, Bulk spgr. of compacted mix Geo = 2442, Percentage weight of asphalt cement is 5.3 while that of fine aggregates and coarse aggregates are 47.3 and 47.4 respectively. The bulk of spr. of aggregates Gu» = 2.703 and the effective specific gravity of aggregate Gus = 2.761. Solution: haved (y,)= Smad 10 v= 2535224) 499 2535 \V, =387 (ar voids) Percentage of voids in the mineral aggregate: va t00- Saf G, e was 109. 2442(87.3+ 47.4) 2703 VMA= 1444 Percentage of voids filed with asphalt Vea = OOVMA-V,) VA ven= 1044-36) | 14.44 = eG Fine aggregates, coarse aggregates, mineral filler and asphalt cement are use for an asphalt concrete paving mixture. If the maximum specific gravity of the paving mixture Grm = 2.478 and the bulk specific gravity of the compacted paving mixture sample Gm = 2384, compute the percentage of air voids in the compacted mixture, Solution: V, = 100 Sa-Se) ) v= 100 (2478-2384) 2478 V, =3.79% (percentage of air voids in the compacted mixture) The proportions by weight and specific gravities of each of the constituents of a particular sheet asphalt paving mixture are as follows: Materials, Specific Percent by . Gravity Weight Asphalt cement 1.04 10.0 Limestone dust 2.82 16.5 Sand 2.66 735 A cylindrical specimen of the mixture was molded in the laboratory and weighted in air and in water with the following results. Weight of dry = specimen in air = 111.95 grams Weight of saturated, surface-dry specimen in air = 112.09 grams Weight of saturated specimen in water = 61.20Compute the bulk specific gravity of the compacted specimen. Solution: Buk sp gr, B-C ‘A= weight of dry specimen in air 11.95 grams B=weight of saturated, surface - dry specimen in air B= 112.09 grams C=weight of saturated specimen in water + C=61.20grams 111.95 d=) 112.09 - 61.20, d=220 (bulk sp.gr. of compacted specimen) — 1.479 Problem The dry mass of a sample of aggregates is 1206 grams. The mass is a saturated dry Condition is 1226.8 grams. The volume of the aggregates, excluding the volume of absorbed water is 440.6 cm. Calculate the bulk specific gravity of the sample of aggregates. Solution: Wt of water = 1226.8 - 1206 Wt. of water = 20.8 kg Vol. of water Density of water 8 Vol. of absorbed water = a Vol. of absorbed water = Vol. of absorbed water = 20.8 om? M, G,= yw V,, =total volume of aggregates including vol.of absorbed water __ 1206 °° 461.40(1) G, = 2614 1.480 Problem The dry mass of a sample of aggregates ig 1978.6 grams. The mass in a saturated surface dry condition is 2005.4 grams. The volume of aggregates excluding the volume of absorbed water is 732.6 cm’. Compute the apparent specific gravity, Solution: Apparent sp.gr.: Ga W=VxD 1978.6 = 732.6(1)(Ga) Ga=2.70 1.481 Problem The dry mass of a sample of aggregates is 1240 grams. The mass in a saturated dry Condition is 1268.4 grams. The volume of the aggregates excluding the volume of absorbed water is 446.2 cm’. Calculate the Percentage absorption. Solution: Mass of absorbed water = 1268.4 - 1240 Mass of absorbed water = 28.4 grams Percentage of absorption = x x 100 Percentage of absorption = 2.29%y ENGINEERING si f oot 7 cBR=4 Prowing 3 must clay nysibra subgrade CBR= 15 Sal 7 CALIFORNIA $9 10 e thickness of pavement, sub-base and base for a wheel load of 12000 Ib., with the Base material CBR = 80 BE : ARING RATIO (CBRY re roan ‘Gravel with clay poorly graded ‘Value a]Foundation Pale ‘Sand fri ean DESIGN OF PAVEMENT AND THICKNESS BY CALIFORNIA METHOD. For subgrade CBR = 4, drawn a vertical line until it will intersect the curve line (12000 Ib.) and from this intersection draw a horizontal ling and read on the lefiside which is 19.4 in. say 20 in, For subtbase CBR = 15, draw a vertical line Untl it intersects the curve line (12000 Ib.) and from this intersection draw a horizontal ine and reed on the lefiside 9.09 say 9 inches. mr the base material CBR = 80, draw a tt 2009 line until it intersects the curve line [b.) and from this intersection draw a ‘ontal line and read on the left side 3.3 in. S273 inches, Thickness required of each material ‘Compal ed sub-@rade Bearing Rarionng Therefore the thickness of the pavement is 3 inches thickness of base material is 6 inches and the sub-base material is 11 inches.HIGHWAY ENGINEERING Design the thickness of a rigid pavement (concrete) having a modulus of rupture of concret, equal to 700 psi. The modulus of subgrade reaction based on plate load test is 200 psi. The wheel load Is 75000 Ib. Use a factor of safety equal to 2. Solution: 21 x = a ee y 7, 7 1 « 7 & 5 Z i Z iv Z V ximpie# | 7 7, 4 “A _Iz 5 7 A 8 4 4A_lz gue , 4 Aceserioy” | | 7 I L ‘6 Refer to table From the table at left, locate 350 psi and draw @ Using factor of safety = 2 horizontal line until it intersects the curve K = 200 Modulus of rupture = 700 psi (modulus of subgrade reaction). From this point draw @ vertical line until it intersects the load line of 75000 Stress = 200 lb. At this point of intersection draw @ horzontal ine 2 and read on the right side which the required thickness Stress = 350 psi of the pavement, 14.75 in. say 15 in.e the thickness (uniform) of petermine vvement to carry an 18000 Ib, concrete PAY NGual tires using Sheets axle of - doweled joints with modulus of let 700 psi and a modulus subgrade ruplur ‘of 100 psi per inch, Assume a factor of safety OF 2 100200 «300=—« 400500 ‘Modulus of subgrade reaction K g= 0 2 $= 360 psi g: 1 2 : 4 994inches eR CC ete colar] bits) where: W= extra widening required imber of lanes tandard wheel base of vehicle (6.1 m) design speed (kph) R= radius of horizontal curve 1.485 Problem Determine the extra widening required for a Pavement width of 7 m. (2 lanes, at 3.5 milan) on a horizontal curve of radius 250 m, if the longest wheel base of the vehicle expected on the road is 6.1 m. Design ‘speed is 70 kph, omy 2 95VR 24647 , 70 w=, 2(250) "95,1250 W =0.610 (0.305 m.on inner and outside of the curve) Romie ee ary ral and Cubic Parabola 0.0702" CR 4 C = allowable rate of change of centrifugal acceleration in m/sec? R= radius of the circular curve V= design speed in m/s Ls = length of transition curveENGINEERING g Rate of Increase 0! Centripetal Acceleration The design speed for a spiral curve Is 100 kph. The length of spiral is 70 m. If the radius of the central curve is 400 m, determine the rate of increase of Centripetal acceleration in misec’, Solution: 1 = 20702v2 + RG 0.0702(100)* 79 = .0702(100)? 400 C C=251m/ sec! ee ECO ae ntiy 1.487 Problem Td ‘A newly constructed building at the LT, Park is expected to add 1200 pedestrians to a 6 m. sidewalk during the peak 15 minute period. The sidewalk has already a flow of 1800 pedestrians during the peak season. Because of parking meters, light standards and other obstructions, subtract 0.8 m. from the actual sidewalk width to obtain the effective width. Compute the new pedestrian volume per width of sidewalk per minute. Solution: Total pedestrians = 1800 + 1200 = 3000 Pedestrian volume : for a6-0.8=5.2m.width of sidewalk 3000 P= = 38.46 1562) inoue 1.488 Problem horizontal curve has a limiting waant of 6.7%. If the radius of the curve @ 50 meters, compute the compensateq gredient after allowing for the curve resistance. Solution: 76 Grade compensation = ~~ 78 =—=152% Grade compensation = 57 Limiting gredient = 6.7% Compensated gredient = 6.7 - 1.52 = 5.18% binisiendet K-11 1 Ricca Crash cushion are used to decelerate errant vehicles to a stop, greatly reducing the severity of the head-on impact with a fixed object by spreading the energy of impact over time and space. A variety of crash cushions includes rows of barrels, entrapment nets and arrays of containers filled with sand or water. 1.489 Problem A crash cushion is to be placed along the elevated SCTEX to Safely decelerate a 2000 kg car traveling at 90 kph. Laboratory Studies have indicated that a dynamic force of 50 KN is required to crush one barrel from its original diameter of 0.6 m. to approximately 0.20 m. Determine the Number of barrels used as ci that will stop the car, mush cushionsoutien ergy consumption of each barrel ty - 0.20480) Bs? pkNn= kilo-joules Bs? energy of 2car moving at 90 Koh: xe = 72001257 KE = 625000 Joules xn=625K) No.of barrels required : we SB 23125 aay 32 barrels 1.490 Problem Compute the minimum length in meters of guardrail required to shield a hazard located 8 m. from the edge of a roadway which has two-way operation. The guardrail is to be located 3.5 m. beyond the wement ‘edge, The encroachment angle is Solution: Le es tort a =Lengthof gual y | aftr ‘etl tn igs 8 R L, =2388m tn tg'= 35 y ¥=13.06m xeL,-y X= 29.86 - 13.06 X= 16.80 m, ee Sa Cai bee A pavement rating method uses 6 distress types to establish the DR (distress rating). No. of points | Weighing (d) factors (W) Corogation 6 points 2 Alligator cracking 4 points 1 Raveling 2 points 0.75, Longitudinal cracking 4 points 1 Rutting 3 points 1 Patching 3 points 15 Determine the distress rating for the pavement (DR). Solution: OR =100- (d+ W) DR = 100 [(6)(2) + (4)(1) + 2(0.75) + 4(1) +:3(1) + 3(1.5)] DR= 100-29 OR=71@ Priority Numbers of @y Lecce LCC heesemmnenand Repair 1.492 Problem A pavement section has been observed to exhibit cracks for approximately 20% of its length. About 15% of the section has Previously been patched. The ADT (average daily traffic) is 3400 and the cost per km is P6800. The priority ranking is 8 for major structural Problem only, What Priority ranking would this section received? Solution: ‘ranking for Priory number = ©28t/km , Pumerrenkna problem only eae 6800 Priority number = — +g ‘ony 3400 Priority number = 10 Therefore, this section wil receive a priory of 10. A parking area of Solaire Casino had 300 Cars parked between 8 a.m. and 6 p.m. 12% parked for 2 hours 28% parked for 4 hours 60% parked for 10 hours Determine the space-hours of demand. Solution: ‘Space-hours of demand: D = 0.12(300)(2) + 0.28(300)(4) + 0.60(300)(10) D = 2208 space-hours 1.494 Problem ars parked between 7:00 a.m. and § nial the parking lot of Ayala, Makati, 10% parked for 2 hours 30% parked for 4 hours 60% parked for 10 hours if 10% of parking bays are Vacant throughout the day and assuming an efficiency factor of 0.86, determine the number of parking bays in the parking lot of Ayala, Makati. Solution: Space-hours of demand: D = 0.10(400)(2) + 0.30(400(4) + 0.60(400)(10) D = 2960 space-hours Total space-hours (assuming 10% vacancy) D = 2960 + 2960(0.10) D=3256 3256 = 10(N)(0.86) N= 379 spaces — 1.495 Problem Around 600 cars parked between 9:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. in a parking area of Manila Hotel. 8% parked for 2 hours 30% parked for 4 hours 62% parked for 10 hours 12% of parking bays are vacant throughout the day and the demand is expected to increase by 5% Per year over five years. Assuming an efficiency factor of 80%, determine the number of Parking bays Fequired to accommodate the cars. Solution: ‘Space-hours of demand: D = 0.08(600)(2) + 0.30(600)(4) + 0.6(600)(10) D= 4416 space-hoursPTE ag ENGINEERING hours if 12% are vacant: p= ast6 + 4416(0.12) p=4946 space-hours - jours of demand in 5 years: p= (1.05)° (4946) p= 6313 space-hours ‘Additional space-hours = 6313 - 4946 Additional space-hours = 1367 No. of parking bays required: 0.80N (10) = 1367 N=17f spaces 1.496 Problem Osmefia Blvd. and P. Del Rosario St. intersect perpendicularly. The minor road traffic (P. Del Rosario St.) is controlled by a yield sign. Speed limit of Osmefia Blvd. is 72 kph. Both roads are 2-lane roads. A building is located 38 m. from the centerline of the outside lane of Osmefia Bivd., and 10 m. from the centerline of the nearest lane of P. Del Rosario St. Determine the speed limit on P. Del Rosario St. to avoid collision. Assume friction factor = 0.35 and perception and reaction time of the driver to be 2.5 sec. Solution: o,saigg)+ 228) Fo siK035) D, = 108.25 m. 1.87 = V,(25) #2 MBT=V,(28) * 55035) V2 #17.47V, - 28752=0 V, = 10.42ms V, = 10.42(3.6) V, = 37.52 kph (speed limit of P. Del Rosario St)HIGHWAY ENGINEERING « J =) y, FH J—-- A) Xc = the distance within which a vehicle traveling at the speed limit V during the yellow interval “tn” sec. cannot stop before encroaching on the intersection, Vehicles within this distance at the start of the yellow interval will flave to go through the intersection, Xe® V Trio — (W+ L) where: V= speed limit in m/s Tmin = minimum yellow interval at an * intersection in sec. W= width of intersection in meters L = length of vehicle in meters B) .X_ = distance from the intersection Where vehicles has to stop to avoid collision. ve Xsvter CC) Tmin = minimum yellow interval at an intersection. t= tion reaction time in sec. V ped int in ms L = length of vehicle in meters a= constant rate of braking deceleration in mis? W= width of intersection in meters 1.497 Problem The width of an intersection of tw perpendicular roads is 12 m. Maximum allowable speed on the approach road is 4g kph. Average length of the vehicle is 6 m, long. If the constant rate of braking deceleration is 3.4 mis?, perception. reaction time = 2.5 sec., © Compute the minimum yellow interval (caution signal) in sec. ® Determine the distance of a vehicle from the intersection where it has to stop to avoid collision when the caution signal is on. @ Determine the distance of the vehicle from the intersection allowed to go through the intersection during the yellow interval. Solution:© Min. yellow interval at the intersection Wel is Mv t=2.5 sec. (perception - reaction time) 12+6 | 13.33 sito on "93.33 218.4) Tp, = 431 800. 4, ® Distance of vehicle from the intersection where it has to stop to avoid collision when the caution signal is on ve x, =v . (13.33)? x, =1as426)+ X, = 59.46 m. from the intersection @® Distance of the vehicle from the intersection allowed to go through the intersection during the yellow interval Xe = V tn -(W+L) Xe = 13,33(4.31) ~ (12 + 6) Xe = 39.45 m. iS 1.498 Problem A multiple regression analysis shows the following relationship for the number of trips per household. T= 0.80 + 1.2P +2.2A ate of Trips Per Day where: T= no. of trips per household per day P= no, of persons per household A= no, of cars per household Marial Luisa Subdivision contains 300 households with an average 6 persons and 3 cars for each household. Determine the average number of trips per day in that subdivision, Solution: T=0.80+1.2P +2.2A T= 0.80 + 1.2(6) + 2.2(3) T= 14.60 trips/household/day No. of trips in the entire subdivision: N= 14,6(300) N = 4380 trips/day CCTs em ets | een foyt of Belg MLR 1.499 Problem The current ridership is 2000/day at a fare of P6, if the fare is increased to P8 due to increase in the prices of gasoline and diesel, compute the new ridership if for each 1% increase in fares, there will be 1/3 of 1% reduction in ridership. Solution: Elasticty of Demand EW= percentage change in volume percentage chnage in service level Ax=8-6=2 New ridership = 2000 - 222 New ridership = 1778 passengers(org oe) LLL = ieeasiemnedl 1.500 Prob! The capacity of an existing highway Is 1500 veh/hr with average vehicle occupancy of 4.2 people. A carpool lane has been introduced to lessen the traffic during peak hours. The carpool lane is restricted to carry 3 or more passengers. If the carpool lane carries 800 vehicles/hour, determine the equivalent numbers of vehicle per hour without carpool lane. Assume the growth rate is 4% in the 6 months of operation without a carpool lane. Solution: No. of passengervehicle using the carpool lane: Ns = 800(3) = 2400 No. of passenger/vehicle without carpool lane: Na = 1500(1.2)(1.04) No= 1872 passengersiveh Diff. in passenger/vehicle = 2400 - 1872 Diff. in passenger/vehicle = 528 passengers 528 1.2 @ Velocity of Cars at Exit Fi Ramps from Expressway 1.501 Prob! ‘A motorist is driving at a speed of 105 kph along the NLEX. He intends to leave the expressway using an exit ramp going to San Fernando, Pampanga with a maximum. ‘speed of 56 kph. At what point on the expressway should the motorist steps on the brakes in order to reduce his speed to the maximum allowed by the exit ramp just before entering the ramp if the rate of deceleration is 3.4 misec?, The section of 4 expressway has a downward grade of Diff. in vehicles/hr = 440 vehicles / hr a kcim NNO Alb TN V, = 15.56 mis wieVe 2g(f +6) 2 = = (29.47) -(15.56)"_ 2(9.81(0.35 + 0.03) S=81.65mGINEERING Concrete Mixture == ‘the basic data for proportioning trial mixture for normal weight concrete with an average 28 day compressive strength of 24 MPa are 2s follows: slump = 75mm to 100 mm Water-cement ratio = 0.62 ‘Quantity of water (wet mixing) = 180 kg/m? Volume of _—dry-rodded = coarse 20.37 Unit weight of concrete = 23.6 kN/m? Unit weight of coarse aggregate = 13.7 kNim? For 4 cu.m. of concrete @ What is the combined weight of cement and water in kN? @ What is the weight of dry-rodded coarse aggregate in kN? ® Find the required weight of dry sand in KN. Solution: ® Combined weight of cement and water 180(981) 1000 Weight of water = 4.7858 kN Water cement ratio = 0.62 Weight of water Weight of cement Weight of water = = 0.62 ‘Combined wt. of cement and water = 1,7658 + 2.848 = 4.61KN ® Weight of dry-rodded coarse aggregate W=VD W=0.37(13.7) W= 5.10 KN ® Required weight of dry sand Weight of concrete = wt. of cement and water + wt. of dry rodded aggregate + weight of sand 23.6(1) = 4.61 +5.10 + We Wo= 13.89 KN a 1.503 CE Board May 1989 © Which of the following gives the number of bags of cement required for a 25 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2.5:5 mix. with the following data given. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 310 1506 kgim? Sand 265 1680 kg/m? Gravel 2.50 1525kgim? Assume: 1 bag per 0.028 cu.m. of concrete, Use 26 liters of water per bag of cement. @ Which of the following gives the quantity of sand, required for a 25 cum. of concrete of 1:2.5:5 mix. with the following data given. @ Which of the following gives the quantity of gravel. Solution : ® Number of bags of cement required: ., 1525(0.028)(5) . oe ae it 7501000) 0.0136 cum. _. 1680(0.028(2.5) Sand: —— = Lm. 765(1000) 0.0444 cum. ,. 1525(0.028)5) _ t 501000) 0.0854 cum. Water: 26 liters =0.026 cum. Total vol. of concreterbag= 0.1694 cum, No, ofbags of cement nesded = —>_ 0.1694 No.of bags of cement needed = 147.58 bagsHIGHWAY ENGINEERING ® Quantity of sand required: Vol. of sand=147.58(2.5)(0.028) Vol. of sand = 10,33 cum ® Quantity of gravel: Vol. of gravel = 147,58(5)(0.28) Vol. of gravel = 20.66 cum. 1.504 CE Board Nov. 1988 © Which of the following gives the ‘umber of bags of cement required for 425 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2:4 mix with the following data. Cement: Sp. gr.=3.10 Density = 1506 kg/m? Sand: Sp.gr-=2.65 Density=1680 kg/m? Stone: Sp.gr-=2.50 Density=1525 kgim? Use 26 liters of water Per bag of cement. : Which of the following gives the Volume of sand required. ® Which of the following gives the Volume of stone required. @ Which of the following gives the Volume of water required. Solution: Number of bags of cement: Materials Volume = 1506(,0283) Cement = = °3.10(1000) 0.0137 cum. = 1680(.283(2) Sand = = 2e5("000) ~ 0086 cum = 1525(.0283)(4) Stone = = 250(1000) 0.068 cum. = 0.026 cum, Total volume = 0.1447 cum, Water = 25 0.1447 Number of bags cement = 172.77 bags Number of bags cement = @ Volume of sand required: Sand = 172.77 (2) (.0283) Sand = 9.78 cu.m. @ Volume of stone required: Stone = 172.77 (4) (.0283) Stone = 19.56 cu.m. ® Volume of water required: Water = 172.77(26) Water = 4492.02liters Water = 4.492cu.m. — © Which of the following gives the number of bags of cement required for 10 cu, m. of concrete of 1:2:3 mixed its gallons of water per bag of cement are used. One bag of cement (1 cu. ft) =94 Ib, sp.gr. = 3.10 One cu. ft. of sand weights = 105 lb., sp. gr. = 2.65 One cu.ft. of gravel weighs = 100 Ib., sp.gr. = 2.70 @ Which of the following gives the Volume in cu. m. of sand. ® Which of the following gives the volume in cu. m. of gravel. Solution: _o® Number of bags of cement required: Cement = sph = 0.086 cu. Send = pay =12100un Gravel = ae = 1.781 cu,Wolter = 748 = 0.668 cu. Total volume = 4.205 cus. Volume of concrete = 10 cu. m. Volume of concrete = 352.88 cu.ft. + = 35288 Bags of cement = “595 Bags of cement = 83.92 bags @ Volume in cu. m. of sand: Sand = 83.92(2) sand = 167.84 cu. Sand = 4.76 cu.m. @ Volume in cu. m. of gravel: Gravel = 83.92(3) Gravel = 251.76 cu.ft. Gravel = 7.13 cu.m. —— 4.506 CE Board May 1995 A1.0 cu.m. design mix was proportioned at 4:2.25:3.25. Water content was specified at 437 kg. per cu.m. maximum, and cement content is 9 bags per cu.m. (40 kg. per bag of cement). The specific gravity of cement is 3.15 and that of the fine sand is 2.65 and coarse aggregates is 2.68, @ Which of the following gives the requirement in kg. of fine sand per cum. @ Which of the following gives the requirement in kg of gravel per cu.m. ® Which of the following gives the water- cement ratio of the concrete mix ? Solution: ® Requirement in kg. of fine sand per cu.m.: Weight of cement = 9 (40) Weight of cement = 360 kg/cu.m Ratio of mixture .25:3.25 Weight of fine sand = 2.25 (360) Weight of fine sand = 810 kg/cu.m ® Requirement in kg of gravel per cu.m.: Weight of gravel = 360 (3.25) Weight of gravel = 1170 kg ® Water-cement ratio of the concrete mix: Volume of water _ 437 ~ 1000 = 0.137 cum. = 137 liters water cement ratio = @ = 141 liters/bag of coment ee 1.507 CE Board May 1989 The following are the given data required for a 25 cu.m. of concrete of 1:2.5:5 mix. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 3.10 1506 kg/m? Sand 2.65 1680 kg/m? Gravel 250 1525 kgim? ® Which of the following gives the number of bags of cement required. @ Which of the following gives the volume of sand needed for the mixture. ® Which of the following gives the volume of gravel needed for the mixture. ® Which of the following gives the volume of water needed for the mixture in liters. Assume: 1 bag per 0.028 cum. of concrete. Use 26 liters of water per bag of cement. Solution : © Number of bags of cement needed: 1506 (0.028) (5) _ Cement: “349 (1090) = 0-0196 cum. . 1680 (.028)(2.5) _ Sand: “Fasc 00g) = 0.0844 cum.See 1525 (,028) (5) _ Gravel: “359 (1000) = 0.0854 cu.m. Water: 26 liters = 0.026 cum. Total vol. of concrete/bag = 0.1694 cu.m. No. of bags of cement needed = an No. of bags of cement needed = 147.58 bags ® Volume of sand needed for the mixture. Vol. of sand = 147.58(2.5)(0.028) Vol. of sand = 10.33 cum ®@ Volume of gravel needed for the mixture. Vol. of gravel = 147.58(5)(0.28) Vol. of gravel = 20.66 cu.m. ® Volume of water needed for the mixture in liters. Vol. of water = 26 (147.58) Vol. of water = 3837.08 liters 1.508 Problem A proposed concrete pavement has dimensions of 4 m. wide and 6 m. long by 200 mm in thickness. Unit cost for the 40 kglbag of cement is P110.00. Unit cost of sand and gravel are P500 and P450 per cu.m. respectively. Use the table of concrete proportions per cu.m. of concrete. Use class A mixture of this type of pavement. CONCRETE PROPORTIONS , 0. po2m 4m 6m @ Which of the following gives the CORt gy och ofthe following glves th Which of the 9 IVES the cost sand. . @ Which of the following gives the cogs gravel. Solution: © Cost of cement. Vol. of conerete required = 4 (6) (0.2) Vol, of concrete required = 4.8 cum, Cement = 4.8 (9) . = 43.2 say 44 bags @ 110 = Paggg ® Cost of sand. = 4.8 (0.5) = 2.4 cum @ 500 Sand = PM @ Costof gravel. Gravel = 4.8(1.0) = 4.8 cum @ 450 Gravel = P2160 1.509 Problem | A one cu.m. design mix was proportioned at 1:2.5:5. Water content was specified ata max. of 140 per bag of cement and cement content is 8.5 bags per cu.m. (40 kg per bag of cement). Specific gravity of cement, sand and gravel is 3.16, 2.61 and 28 respectively. ® Which of the following gives the weight of moist sand if it is found to have 5% free water. ®@ Which of the following gives the amount of water to be added in kg if the sand is found to have 5% free water. @ Which of the following gives the amount of water to be added in kg if the coarse aggregate is to have 2 absorption.soto moist sand: Mg cont= 6140) = SAD Kg Mgt of sand = 940125) = B60 Ko Mian f moist sand= -05(650) weight of moist sand = 892.5 kg ‘Amount of water to be added if sand has. 5% free water: Excess walter = 892.5 - 850 = 42.5 kg ‘Amount of water ‘to be added = 140 - 42.5 ‘Amount of water to be added = 97.5 kg @ ‘Amount of water to be added if coarse ° aggregate is to have 2% absorption: Weight of coarse aggregate = 340(50) Weight of coarse aggregate = 1700 kg Water absorbed = 0.02(1700) = 34 kg Amount of water to be added = 140 + 34 Amount of water to be added = 174 kg 1.510 Problem It is required to produce 25 cum. of concrete mix of 1:2:4 using 7 gallons of water per bag of cement with the following data. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 3.10 94 pef Sand 2.65 110 pef Gravel 2.60 100 pef © Which of the following gives the number of bags of cement required. Which of the following gives the damp ose volume of sand needed in cu.m. if the bulking factor of sand is 1.20. Which of the following gives the damp Se volume of gravel needed in cum. ifthe bulking factor of gravel is 1.06. Solution: © No. of bags of cement required: Cement: Ten = 0.4919 Sand: Teen = 1.33 8% Gravel: Sa = 24788 Water: a = 094 f° Vol. of concrete/bag .23 Volume of concrete = 25(3.28)? Volume of concrete = 882.19 f® No. of bags needed = 169 bags ® Damp loose volume of sand: Dry volume = 169(2) = 338 ft? Damp loose volume = 338(1.20) Damp loose volume = 405.6 fi? ‘Damp loose volume = od Damp loose volume = 11.49 m? @® Damp loose volume of gravel: Dry volume = 169(4) Dry volume = 676 ft? Damp loose volume = 676(1.06) Damp loose volume = 716.56 ft? 716.56 Damp loose volume = (3288 Damp loose volume = 20.34 m?HIGHWAY ENGINEERING & ‘A concrete mixture has a proportion of 1:2:3. The water requirement per bag of cement is 6.5 gallons. The volume of concrete under construction is 20 cu.m. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 3.14 94 pef Sand 285 110 pef Gravel 2.60 100 pof © Which of the following gives the weight of sand needed in KN if it contains 5% of moisture. @ Which of the following gives the weight of gravel needed in kN if it contains 2% of moisture. @® Which of the following gives the weight of the water to be added to the mixer in KN. Solution: ® Weight of sand needed: 1 s Cement : Fyq¢g2q) ° = 048° - 02) Sand 7e5624) = 1.33 f° . 1008). Gravel : 769624 7 1.85 f° . 65. : Water: 74g = 0.87 ft? Vol. ofconcretelbag == Faas - 20(3.28)3 No. of bags needed = 4.53 No. of bags needed = 156 bags Weight of sand = 156(2)(110)(1.05) ‘Weight of sand = 36036 Ib 36036 "22 (81) = 160688 N = 160.69 KN @ Weight of gravel needed: Wt of gravel = 156(3)(100)(1.02) Wof gravel = 47736 Ib. _ 41736(9.81) 22 = 212859 N = 212.86 KN @ Weight of water to be added at the mixer. ‘Amount of mixing water that is containeg in the aggregates = 156(2)(110)(0.05) + 156(3)(100)(0,02) = 2652 Ib. 156 (62.4) Total weight of water = 7.48 Total weight of water = 8459 Ib. Amount of water to be added to the mixer = 8459 - 2652 = 25894 N = 25.89 KN ————— 1.512 Problem Acconcrete is to contain 6.5 bags of cement per cu. yard and is to have a water cement ratio of 6 gallons per bag. The dry volume of sand in the mix is to be one half that of gravel. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 3.14 94 pef Sand 2.65 108 pef Gravel 2.65 102 pef © Which of the following gives the Proportion of the mix based on dry aggregates. @ Which of the following gives the weight of the sand. ® Which of the following gives the weight of gravel.—4 = coment = Zraeza) ~ O48 fe 6 = Water jae = 080P * 12688 lute vol. of cement paste in a cu.yd of aoe 5 (1.28) = 8.32 A jute vol. of mixed sand and gravel 277 -8.32= 18.68 f° 108 Vol of sand = Te5(gza) = 0.6500 102 Vol. of gravel = 65(62.4) = 0.62 ft since 1 cus. of sand is to be mixed with Zou. of gravel. ‘Absolute vol. of grave ‘Absolute vol of grave Vol of sand and gravel = 0.65 + 1.24 Vol. of sand and gravel = 1.89 f° soit vol of sand = 258 1868) Absolute vol. of sand = 6.42 8° 8.68 -6.42 Dry vo. of sand per bag of cement 88 =65 = 1.52 cu.ft. Dry vol. of gravel per bag of cement BT 3048. Required proportion is 4 : 1.52: 3.04 ® Weight of gravel 2.26 (2.65) (62.4) 2027 Ib Given the following data for a concrete mix of 1:2:4, Use 6.5 gallons of water per bag of cement. One bag of cement = 1 cu.ft. ‘Volume of concrete = 40 cu.m. Materials Specific Gravity Density Cement 3.11 50% Sand 2.60 48% Gravel 2.76 53% ® Which of the following gives the weight of cement in kg. ® Which of the following gives the weight of sand in kg. © Which of the following gives the weight of gravel in kg. Solution: © Weight of cement: Cement: 1(0.50) = Sand: 2(052) = Gravel : (0.47) = 65 Water Tas = Total vol/bag rd No. of bags of cement needed (3.28)° = OGL = 329 bags Wt. of cement = 0.50(3.11)(62.4)(329) Wt. of cement = 14,511 kg® Weight of sand = 1.04 (2.6) (62.4) (329) = 55,512 Ib = 25,233 kg © Weight of gravel = 1.88 (2.76) (62.4) (329) = 106524 Ib 48,420 kg On a paving job the following materials are to be used in the proportions 1:2:3 by weight with a water-cement ratio of 6 gallons of water per bag of cement. Determine the quantities of materials Fequired per mile of pavement using 8-in uniform thickness and 24 ft. width. Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weight Cement 3.14 94 pef Sand 2.65 110 pof Gravel 260 100 pef Solution: Materials Volume (cu.ft) 9401 . Cement: 314(624) 0.48 110(2) - Sand: 75(624) 133 100(3 . Gravel: 6062.4) = 1.85 6 7 Water: 78 = 0.80 Total volume 24.46 Vol. of concrete needed: 5280 @ (24) = 84480 cu.ft. No. of bags needed = Fa No. of bags needed = 20308 bags Sand = 20308 (2) = 40616 cu.ft. Gravel = 20308 (3) = 60924 cu.ft. aving job for the skyway project regu Rizal, it is required to dete the length of pavement that can be laid in g hr-day, if we allow 1} min per batch, Thy ickness of the pavement is 8 Inches ang the width is 26 ft. Water-cement ratio is 5 gallons/bag of cement. Use 1:2:4 mixture, Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weignt comet ata Gravel 2.60 100 pet Sauer Materials Volume (cu.t,) Cement: Tea = 049 Sand: Tea = 1.33 Gravel: cane = 247 Water: 7a = 0.67 Total volume = 4.96 f° No. of batches = 460) No. of batches = 320 batches Total vol. of concrete for 320 batches = 320(4.96) = 1587.2 15872= (2 ) (26) L = 91.57 tdayconcrete mixture of 3 Is to be used in’ ‘concrete pavement the sand has a loose vreight of 115 pof and a moisture content of 42% based on surface dry-weight. How many cubic yards of sand will be needed mile of pavement, using 8 inches uniform thickness and 24 ft wide. Use 6.5 gallons per bag of cement. Materials Specific Gravity Unit Weight canent 3.40 94 pef Sand 265 115 pot Gravel 260 110 pet Solution: Materials Volume (ous) | _94(1) . Cement: 3162.4) “a8 115(2) . Sand: 7562.4) = 138 4 110(4 . Gravel Fe0(62.4) =203 65 Water: Te = 087 Total volume/bag = 4.78 f° Total vol. of concrete needed = 5280 8 (23) Total vol. of concrete needed = 84480 cu.ft 84480 No. of bags needed = No. of bags needed = 17,674 bags Vol. of sand needed = 17674(2)(1.12) Vol. of sand needed = 39589.76 cu.ft. Va fsa eng SETS Vol. of sand needed =1466.29 cuyards Types of joints in cement concrete Pavements, |. Expansion join 1 Contracting joint Wi. Waring jan a) land itonly b) Land tt only ©) Mandl only "Sq Allofthe above es 1.518 Problem The layer of the pavement which finally Carries the load from the road is__. a) sub-base b) wearing surface c) base course "Fg sub-grade 1.519 Problem The component of the road structure which receives the traffic load and transfer it to the subgrade. a) sub-base b) wearing surface TS ¢) base d) formation 1.520 Problem Soil stabilized roads with cementilime cannot be used as: a) sub-base 5& ») wearing surface c) base course d) — sub-gradeBitumen stabilization is suitable when the Soil is made up of: 5H a) sandy soils b) clayey soils c) silty soils 4d) peaty soils A riers Coat over a road surface consists ofa. SS a) thin film of low viscosity bituminous cutback b) application of bitumen over which stone chippings are spread ©) thin application of bitumen blinded by sprinkling sand d) grant of bitumen over which key stones are laid 1.523 Problem One or more layers of crushed aggregate, which are bonded by bituminous materials and a seal coat laid on top is called: a) tarcarpet b) penetration macadam c) _ bituminous macadam surface dressing 1.524 Problem A 20 mm thick premix bitumen layer over which is laid a seal coat Is called: a) surface dressing b) penetration macadam 5S ¢) bitumen carpet d) bitumen macadam A layer consisting of properly designey mix od course aggregate fine aggregate, 4 filler and a bituminous binder is called: a) _ bitumen carpet b) _ penetration macadam 1 ¢) asphaltic concrete d) bitumen macadam 4.526 Problem A mixture of bitumen, fine aggregate and filler in suitable proportion heated to about 200°C in special cookers and laid is called: a) surface dressing mastic asphalt c) asphaltic concrete d) bitumen carpet 1.527 Problem The layered structure placed over a soil sub-grade for forming a road is called: a) — sub-base b) — sub-grade | c) base 5S qd) pavement -528 Problem | A pavement which has negligible flexural strength is called: a) rigid "S b) flexible ¢) macadam 4) all of the aboveof natural soil over which the Ti ymert of a road is laid is called: sub-grade b) sub-base c) base d) wearing coarse ote, 4.530 Problem The layer in a road pavement which provides resistance to wear and tear due to traffic is called: a) sub-grade b) sub-base c) base wearing coarse 1.531 Probiem The part of the road structure which is immediately above the sub-grade and composed of stone boulders or superior soil is called: a) subgrade 5} 5) sub-base c) base 4) wearing coarse 1.532 Problem The top surface of a road structure is termed as: a) sub-grade b) sub-base "0 base d) wearing coarse A road made of coarse a, ate, mechanically interlocked by rolling and bonded together with ‘Screening dust is called__, a) rigid = b) water bound macadam cc) flexible d) None of the above : An application of hot bitumen material given to the old surface to provide adhesion to the old and new road ‘surface Iscalled__. ‘ a) seal coat b) prime coat 5S) tack coat ) surface dressing 1.535 Problem A layer of stone chippings coat laid over a hot to make the surface water-proof is called__, . a) seal coat ©S b) prime coat ©) tack coat 4) surface dressing 1.536 Problem The application of one or two layers of bituminous material over a prepared base each layer covered with an application of Cover material and rolled is called__. a) seal coat b) prime coat c) tack coat surface dressing |A ‘very thin surface applied over a bituminous pavement, to make it impervious is called__. 5S 4) seal coat ») prime coat ©) tack coat 4d) surface dressing | 1.538 Problem The time for mixing of ingredients for a Concrete cement road should be done for at least. . a) 25min. 0c) 1.5min. b) 3min, qd) 2min. pa eae anes 1.539 Problem “The number of days final curing for a Concrete cement pavement is done for__. a) 2A1days 5 b) 12 days a) 14 days 18 days 540 Problem i Joints ‘provided in concrete cement pavements at right angles to the centre line ofthe pavementis called__. transverse joint b) longitudinal joint ¢) expansion joint d) construction joint 41.541 Problem Wherever work of constructing a cement pavement is suspendey, ne provided is called __. Fig a) transverse joint b) longitudinal joint c) expansion joint 6& qd) construction joint TT A of rigid pavement, which temperature steel or dowels for ve transfer. This type of pavement is mainly on low-volume highways or cement stabilized soils are used ag Ay base material. © a) Plain concrete pavement b) Simply reinforced conc pavement ¢) Continuously reinforced concree pavements d) — Flexible concrete pavement a 1.543 Problem A type of rigid pavement having dowels fo the transfer of traffic loads across joints with these joints spaced at larger distances than with plain pavements ranging from 10 m. to 30 m. Temperature steel is used throughout ‘the slab. a) Plain concrete pavement = b) Simply reinforced _concrelt pavement ¢) Continuously reinforced concrete Pavements d) Flexible concrete pavementMiienasss Loa blem qs Prol id pavement, which has no joints, except construction ransverse ‘expansion joints when they are or Mat specific positions such as at recess type of pavement Is typically bridges highwvolume, high-speed roadvay®- 2) Plain concrete pavement t) Simply reinforced pavement Continuously oo concrete pavements 4) Flexible concrete pavement ——— 4.545 Problem The measurement of the extent to which a road surface deviates from the plane is called: concrete reinforced 2). pavement deflection ) "pavement distress tS ¢) pavement roughness d) skid resistance Refers to the structural adequacy of Pavement section, ees ot the ®& a) pavement deflection b) pavement distress ©) pavement roughness 4) skid resistance ee 1.548 Problem Describes the effectiveness of a Pavement to prevent or reduce skid related crashes, a) crack resistance ) patching resistance ¢} raveling resistance skid resistance ee 1.549 Problem The following are the type of stresses that are developed in rigid pavements, @) Stress induced by trafic loads ) Stress due to temperature changes ¢) Stress induced by bending "Fd Allofthe above 1.546 Problem Refers to the condition of a pavement in terms ofits general appearance. @) pavement deflection * b) pavement distress ©) pavement roughness 4) skid resistance 1.550 Problem No Passing Zone is defined as: a) any section of the road is not passable b) any section of the road is closed temporarily fr trafic any section of the road with a passing sight distance of 460 m. or less d) Allofthe above wyCapacity for two-lane highways ranges from: a) 1000 to 1500 passenger car equivalents per hour b) 1500 to 2000 passenger car equivalents per hour 2000 to 2800 passenger car equivalents per hour d) 2800 to 3000 passenger car equivalents per hour Factors affecting capacity and service volumes on freeways and muttilane highways. uF og) a) Roadway factor b) Traffic factor ¢) Control factor All of the above 1.553 Problem Vehicles attempting to make a left turn and Caught within the intersection at the end of the signal phase are expected to discharge at headways of __ sec. and delay the Cross traffic accordingly. a) 15sec. ©) 3.0sec. 5S b) 25sec, d) 20sec, | Effective approach | Ga width due tof (ii -4 el Lem cele 1.554 Problem Given: Approach width of road = 9.15 m. Distance from the parked car to the Stop line = 10.7 m. Green time (K) = 26 sec. Compute the approach roadway width due to the effect of the parked vehicle. 0.9(Z-7.6) Los of width= 8-92-75) Solution: Loss of width = 1.68 - Effective approach roadway width = 9.15 - 1.57 Effective approach roadway width = 7.58 m The time interval between the arrival of a Vehicle wishing to cross an uninterrupted stream of vehicles on an intersecting path and the arrival of the next vehicle in that stream is known as: 09(9.18-78) <1, 2% a) lag c) b) gap d) headway time delay 1.556 Problem The separation between the Corresponding Points on two successive vehicles minus the separation occupied by a vehicle is known as: a) lag °) headway "= b) gap 4) time delayNGINEERING of the gap in sec. paurmie te ert and B traveling along highway if the headway between * Jes A and Bis 4 sec. The length of the ve hicle Is 6.2 m. long and travels at a went ‘of 12.5 misec. The length of gap will SPremine the number of cross street cles that can enter the intersection per cycle. 62 =4- —— = 3.5 seconds Gah 95 TT 7.558 Problem The geometrical shape of warning signs used In traffic control. The geometrical shape of School Crossing signs. a) Octagon ©) Circle © b) Pentagon d) Triangle ees 1.562 Problem The geometric shape of No Passing Zone warning signs. a) Pentagon b) Trapezoid ¢) Octagon Pennant with longer dimension horizontal :563 Problem i The geometric shape of recreational use guide signs, a) Rectangle ©) Trapezoid @ ‘Che 5) rapézoid b) Pentagon © d) Diamond b) Pentagon &) Odogon [1.559 Problem "| | [4-564 Probiem ] The geometrical shape of regulatory signs The geometric shape of Stop sign. used in traffic control. a) Circle ¢) Trapezoid 'S a) Rectangle c) Trapezoid b) Pentagon 4) Diamond ee The geometric shape of guide signs used in traffic control *F a) Rectangle 0 Trapezoid b) Pentagon d) Triangle b) Pentagon F qd) Octagon 1.565 Problem The geometric shape of Yield sign. tS a) Equilateral triangle with one point down b) Trapezoid c) Rectangle d) Circle1.566 Problem The geometric shape used for Railroad Crossing Advance warning sign and for Civil Defense Evacuation Route Marker. 5S a) Circle b) Triangle c) Trapezoid d) Pentagon 1.567 Problem A series of interconnected or interlaced cracks caused by fatigue failure of the asphalt concrete surface under repeated traffic loading. Alligator cracking b) Block cracking ¢) Transverse cracking d) Longitudinal cracking — 1.568 Problem Cracks forming large interconnected Polygons, usually with sharp corners or angle. These cracks are generally caused by hardening and shrinkage of the asphalt and or reflection cracking from underlying layers such as cement-treated base. a) Alligator cracking US b) Block cracking c) Transverse cracking d) Longitudinal cracking 1.569 Problem roximately at right angles to Cracment center. These may be cau by shrinkage or differential thermal ttre, of the asphalt concrete or maybe reflectyg cracks. a) Alligator cracking b) Block cracking 5 ¢) Transverse cracking d) Longitudinal cracking Ses 4.570 Problem Cracks approximately parallel to the pavement centerline. These are caused poorly constructed construction joints ang shrinkage of asphalt concrete surface. a) Alligator cracking b) Block cracking c) Transverse cracking 5 d) Longitudinal cracking -_— 1.571 Problem Wearing way of the Pavement surface caused by dislodging of aggregated particles and binder. This is usually a result of insufficient asphalt binder in the mix or stripping of asphalt from particles of aggregate. a) — Joint or crack spalling b) Flushing ¢) Bleeding wy Ravelingjsintegration of the surface ~ wheel paths caused by pea of gasoline or oil from vehicles. Spalling i Flushing c) Bleeding Drip track raveling The exuding of bitumen onto the pavement surface, causing a reduction in skid resistance. It is generally’ caused by excessive amounts of asphalt in the mix or low air voids content. It occurs when asphalt fills the voids in the mix during hot weather and then exudes out onto the surface of the pavement. a) Spalling b) Raveling ® ¢) Bleeding or flushing @) Abrasion re 1.574 Problem Elevation differences between adjacent Slabs at transverse Joints. tt is usually the result of Pumping and is a major source of Portland concrete Pavement failure. a) Spalling © b) Faulting ©) Bleeding 4) Raveling Peat Ah eeeeeeeneeetereemnaaeaeeeee LA Localized upward buckling and ‘shattering of the slabs at transverse joints or cracks. ‘They can occur when transverse joints are filled with incompressible solid materials. SF a) Blowups ©) Spalling b) Raveling 4) Fauting — 1.576 Problem The breakdown or disintegration of slab edges at joints or cracks, usually resulting in the loss of sound concrete and the Progressive widening of joint or crack. ) Joint abrasion b) Joint raveling 5S ¢) Joint spalling 4) Joint flushing ee ‘Abnormal surface wear, Usually resulting from poor quality surface mortar oF coarse aggregate. 5S a) Surface attrition b) Surface polish ©) Surface spaling d) Surface raveling 1.578 Problem 7 Loss of the original texture due to the traffic action. a) Surface attrition 5S b) Surface polish ©) Surface spaling d) Surface raveling1.579 Problem Metro Cebu has a population of 18 M people with an average vehicle ownership of 2 cars per person. Each car will consume 15 km per liter. If it is driven 30,000 km per year, how much tax increase per liter to raise 800 M for highway maintenance per year? Solution: No. of vehicles = 18,000,000(2) = 36,000,000 No. of km driven per year = 36,000,000(20,000) 72x10° 15 No. of liters consumed per year = 4800 x 10° liters Let x = tax increase 4800 x 108 x = 800,000,000 x= POAT 1.580 Problem The San Juanico Bridge connecting between Samar and Leyte was constructed with a total cost (excluding toll fees) to travel across the bridge, which is expressed as a cost function: C = (40 + 0.4V) where C is in cents per vehicle and Vis vehicle per hour. Demand function is 3400 - 10C. No. of liters consumed per year = @® Evaluate the volume of traffic (in vehicles/hour) across the bridge. @ If a 30 centavo toll was added to the original cost function, what is the new volume of traffic (veh/hr) crossing the bridge? @ Evaluate the amount of toll fee to yield the highest revenue for the first condition. Solution: . Vol. of trafic across the bridge v=3400- 10C v= 3400 - 10(40 +0.4V) v=3400-400-4V 5V = 3000 v= 600 vehicles/hr Vol. of traffic if the toll fee of 30 cent was added inorder to cross the bridge c=40+0.4V + 30 c=70+04V v= 3400-10C v= 3400 - 10(70 + 0.4V) v=3400-700-4V 5V = 2700 v= 540 vehicles/hr ‘Amount of toll fee to yield highest revenue for case “a” C=40+04V+T V=3400- 10(40 + 0.4V +7) V=3000-4V-10T 5V = 3000-10T = 3000 - 107 5 Revenue generated : R=VT pz (3000-107)T 5 Vv _ 30007 - 107? 5 3000-207 _ R oR dtyssing thru the new The volume of tafe Bridge connecting ve city and Lapu-Lapu City is 6000 Mandan vor day when the toll fee is P3 per vehicles Pine toll fee increases by 50 ae the volume of traffic will centgase by 1000 vehiclesiday. Determine the toll charge in order to © paximize the revenue. © Determine the traffic volume per day after the toll fee increases. @ Determine the total revenue with the new toll fee. Solution: @ Toll charge in order to maximize the revenue v=8000- ‘eee New fol fee charge: C=300+x. (centavos) R=VC R= (s- 5 a0 + R = (8000 - 20x)(300 + x) = oon 2091+ 200 +3920) =0 X=50 centavos X+300= 350 centavos = P3.50 (ota charge tomax. revenue) Traffic volume per day after the toll fee increase V =go99. 1000(60) 50 V=7000 vehicles / day ® Total revenue with the new toll fee R=VC R= 7000(350) = P2,450,000 per day The speed of.the car taking the Kennon Road to Baguio City is 60 kph. A warning sign is placed 100 m. from the hazard ahead due to landslide. The Treading distance of the driver is 20 m. while in Motion and the perception reaction time is 5 sec. If the skid resistance of the level Toad is 0.40, determine the legibility distance of the waming sign from the driver. Solution: ne | Tesibilty distance Reaction distance = Vt 60000 v= 0 867 3600 Reaction distance = 16.67(6) = 83.35 m v Broking cists * ro) se diese 667) Braking distance = 37 04 +0) 20+ 83.35 + 35.41 =x + 100 x=98.76meT tats Addriver of a car moving at 50 kph observes a warning sign ahead of him. After moving 32 m,, he started to read the sign then the "distance traveled while reading the sign until he finished reading the sign is 20 m. At the moment he finished reading the sign, it was observed that side mounted sign has a lateral offset of 1.80 m. from the path of the driver and the limit of comfortable vision of the sign is 10° for side mounted sign. Compute the legibility distance of the warning sign from the point where the driver observes the sign. Solution: = legibiity distance L=x+20+12 18 x x=10.21m L=10.21+20+32 L=6221m. 1.584 Problem The current demand (flow of traffic) of the Old Mactan Bridge is 5120 vehicles per day when the toll fee is P2 per vehicle. The demand will decrease by 800 vehicles per day for each 50 centavos increase in toll Determine the amount of toll increase in order to maximize the revenue. tan 10" aie in tol fee in centavos 00x v=5120- v=5120- 16x Toll fee = x +200 Total revenue: R= (5120- 16x)(x + 200) BR. (5120 - 16x)(1) + (x + 200) 16)=0 om §120- 16x = 16(x + 200) 32x = 5120 - 16(200) x= 60 centavos a 1.585 Problem A local tourist will pay P300 for each hour save when marking a trip from Manila to Baguio which is 280 km from Manila, Cost of Travel Time of travel By air: P6000 2hrs, Bytrain: P4500 4hrs. Bycar: P3000 7 hrs, Which mode will make this trip economical and how much will it cost him? Solution: By air: Total cost = 6000 + 2(300) = P6600 By train: Total cost = 4500 + 4(300) = P5700 By car: Total cost = 3000 + 7(300) = P5100 By car is economical with a cost of P5100 only.241 CE Board May 2016 It is defined as the number of vehicles per unit distance occupying a section of roadway at a given instant time and is usually measured in vehicles per mile or per km. "SF a) Density ©) Flow b) Capacity d) Volume Trasnportation & Traffic Engineering _ — Boi Ba, Bo — Se ee 2.4 Problem The max. number of passenger cary can pass a given point on @ lang \dway during one hour under the nearly jeal roadway and traffic condi which can possibly be attained. a) — Traffic volume b) . Traffic capacity c) Traffic density 6S q) Basic capacity SS et 2.2 Problem The number of vehicles moving in a Specified direction on a given lane or roadway that pass a given point during Specified unit time and is usually expressed as vehicles per hour or vehicles per day. "SF a) Traffic volume b) Traffic capacity ©) Traffic density d) Basic capacity The ability of a roadway to accommodate traffic volume. It is expressed as the maximum number of vehicle in a lane or a road that can pass a given point in unit time, usually an hour, that is vehicles per hour per lane or roadway. a) Traffic volume 5 b) Traffic capacity ¢c) Traffic density d) Basic capacity 2.5 Problem The max. number of passenger cars that can pass a given point on a lane or roadway during one hour under prevailing roadway and traffic conditions. Possible capacity b) Practical capacity c) Basic capacity d) Theoretical maximum capacity 2.6 Problem The max. number of vehicles that can pass a given point on a lane or roadway during one hour without traffic density being so great as to cause unreasonable delay, hazard, or restrictions to the drivers freedom to maneuver under the prevailing roadway and traffic conditions. "S a) Practical capacity b) Possible capacity ©) Traffic capacity 4) Theoretical capacityrossing of two or more traffic streams ‘The cl the same general direction wavelt cant path of highway without aia of trafic signals. a) Crossover b) Cross moving Weaving - 3 Permanence: ‘The instantaneous speed of a vehicle at a specified section or location. a) average speed b) running speed c) travel speed " spot speed 2.9 Problem The average of the spot speeds of all vehicles passing a given point in the highway. average speed b) running speed c) travel speed 4) spot speed 2.10 | Problem The average speed of vehicles in a certain road length at any time. @) instantaneous speed b) average speed "& 0) space mean speed 4) spot speed ‘The speed distribution of vehicles at a Point on the roadway and itis the average Of Instantaneous speeds of observed vehicles at the spot. a) instantaneous speed b) average speed ¢) space mean speed 5 @ time-mean speed es ‘The average speed maintained by a vehicle over a particular stretched of road, while the vehicle is in motion. This is obtained by dividing the distance covered by the time during which the vehicle is in motion, a) spot speed = b) running speed ©) travel speed 4) space-mean speed oS The time interval between the passage of Successive vehicles moving in the same lane and measured from head to head as they pass a point on the road. 5S a) Time headway b) Time of travel at a spot speed c) Time of travel at a time mean ad) Fine of rol al a spexemen speedThe distance between successive vehicles moving in the same lane measured from head to head at any instance. 5S a) space-headway b) merging ¢) clear spacing between vehicles d) space between vehicles ae ‘The distance ahead that must be clear to permit safe passing is called: 5S a) passing sight distance b) sight distance ©) non-passing distance 4) braking distance 2.16 Problem The ratio between parallel forces divided by the normal forces is known as: a) skid resistance b) coefficient of friction c) coefficient of adhesion and hysteresis SF d) Allofthe above es Divided arterial highway for through traffic with full or partial control of access and generally with grade separations at major Intersections, a) Freeway SS 6) Expressway c) Parkway d) Highway 2.18 Problem An expressway with full control of access, a) Freeway & b) Expressway c) Parkway d) Highway —_— 2.19 Problem An arterial highway for non-commercial traffic with full or partial control of access and usually located within a park. a) Freeway b) Expressway US ¢) Parkway d) Highway 2.20 Problem ‘aie Minimum sight distance Fequired for a driver to stop a vehicle after ‘seeing an object in the vehicle's path without hitting that object. This distance is the sum of the distance traveled during perception. Feaction time and the distance traveled during braking. a) sight distance b) braking distance ¢) passing sight distance *S ) stopping sight distancestance required on a two- imu sa ioneny that wal permit a lane, (wore plato @ passing mancuver jut colliding with an opposing vehicle and eat cutting off the passed vehicle. a) overtaking sight distance b) _non-passing sight distance 5& ¢) passing sight distance d) stopping sight distance 2.22 Problem The length of super elevation development from zero cross slope to full design super elevation in a circular curve alignment.. Super elevation run off b) Tangent run off ¢) Transition curve 4) Tangent distance ee The length of ‘Super elevation development from the normal cross slope to the zero Cross slope point on the tangent. ) Transition curve Tangent run out ‘Super elevation run off Tangent distance The development onto circular curves has been location of super elevation Continuous concem to designers throughout the world. This concer is due to the fact that design super elevation is Not available for the curve radius at the PC. This results in the vehicle ‘experiencing 2 to 3 sec. where lateral acceleration tends to force the driver to adopt a natural spiral curve during entry and exit. This problem can be prevented by: a) Widen the curve to give drivers this “extra width as well as to give additional width for swift path of large vehicles, Provide @ proportion of super elevation run off. This proportion tends to minimize the adverse effects of lateral acceleration and improves the safety of the transition from tangent to circularcurve, c) Provide traffic lights at the point of transition from tangent to circular curve. Provide pavement markings at the Point of transition from tangent to Circular curve. oS py 0) tt The longitudinal profile along the Centerline of the road, It is made up of a Series of grades and vertical curves. a) Cross-section of a portion of the toads on vertical curves 'b) Elevations of point on the curve c) Tangent offsets Vertical alignmentee eter arto ke mlarauaie Zz Pe | Sera eer eco cea _WV/eR WV2/eR V= design speed in koh = super elevation sid frction ‘min. radius of curvature in m. we tanora)= w -v tanloro)= tan(o +a) = tan 0 +tan a 1-tan 6 tan a tno=e (superelevaton) tan a.=f (sidefiton) e+f wierajpe ttt orale se 1-6f= almost equal to zero A voces NGINEER, 3.6)" g(e +f) a iat +e) ve R=—— 127(e +f) min. radius of curvature super elevation in m/m f = coeff. of side friction or stig resistance V= design speed in kph Brae De 1145.916 2 Impact factor= o fesign speed of car in kph 81 misec? = radius of curvature in meters EI Preor ke cae 2 tne= x = 9.81 mis? @= angle of embankment V= vel. ofa carin m/s = radius of curve in m.Aes eau) eerrTCe aL ous Rigs wa curve ay Saale t Pus E vi m(ora)= ( o @z angle of banking tan =U . vz max. speed in rs 1 radius of Curve = 9.81 misec? 2.26 CE Board Nov. 1998 ‘Ahighway curve has a super elevation of 7. Find the radius of the curve so that there will be no lateral pressure between the tires and the roadway at a speed of 40 mph? Solution: v=40 mph 2.27 _CE Board Nov. 2001 A railway curve having a radius of 420 m. has a distance between their rails of 1.5 m. and the outer rail is 15 cm. higher than the inner rail. Find the max. speed that a train Could move along this curve so that there will be no lateral andthe rate, pressure on the wheels PORTATION & TRAFFIC E: NGINEERING rere Solution: 2.28 CE Board May 2015 Compute the impact factor for a horizontal curve radius of 400 m if the design speed is 120 kph.V = 33.33 m/s (33.33)? 9.8(400) Impact factor = 0.283 Impact factor = 2.29 Problem A highway curve having a radius of 400 ft. is banked so that there will be no lateral pressure onthe car's wheel at a speed of 48 kph. What is the angle of elevation of the embankment? Solution: _ (1333) tan o= 554(121.95) 2.30 Problem speed of a highway curve of 109 a es kph. If the coefficient of friction between the tires and the road is 0.60, what is the maximum speed at which a car can round the curve without skidding? 2 tno = 1806) 9.81(100) 0= 184" tan 9 = 0.60 o=3t"v not? ov 2 wal * op ye2g.ett00)tan 494° 233836 Peers > ‘D=7 m- = 2 N08 ateBr B eee aaa V, =V, -at O=V,-at V,=at fi =V? + 2S O= (at)? + 2aS a’ +t? =2aS - 4) __ -9728 (147 (981) 2.68 Problem A cargo truck having a weight of 4000 Ib. skids through a distance of 46 m. before colliding with a parked Toyota land cruiser having a weight of 2000 Ib. After collision both vehicles skid through a distance equal to 10 m. before stopping. If the Coefficient of friction between tires and pavement is 0.6, compute the initial speed of the cargo truck. Solution: ve SH Vv ‘5 /=tim Ve0— Va—e — Cotsion Collision foe ll =2gfS, vi = 2(9.81)(0.6)(10) v,=10.85ms ‘Momentum before impact = momentum after impact WY Hy 9 9 4o0ov, _ (4000+2000 9 g V, = 16.275 m/s Before colision : w(V? -V2) -W,fS, = 2g “68 23 ayes = {182780 = VE 981) (16.275)° - V2 =- 544.512 V, = 28.40 ms V, = 102.23 kphENGINEERING truck of weight 6000 Ib. hits a rcedes Benz having a weight of 1600 Ib, 4 both the vehicles skid together through a distance of 5 m. before coming ‘top. compute the initial speed of the ° 0 truck if it does not apply brakes . collision. Ass. coeff. of friction = 0.60. Solution: Y > onisin 4 Colton (sti (athe —S;=10m- ‘After coalition : +W, -(W, #+W,) £5, OD “vy view -f82= + 2g 0.60(5)= owe ” 29 V, =7.67 mis (vel.of impact) Momentum before impact = momentum after impact We AW) 9 9 (6000 + 1600)V, g 6000V, = 7600V, vy = Zeonrs7) 2 6000 V, =972ms 9.72 (3600) 2.70 Problem Avan having a Weight of 8000 Ib. hits a Parked Toyota car of weight 2000 Ib. and both vehicles skid together through a distance of 6 m. before coming to stop. Compute the velocity of impact if the van applies brakes and skids through a distance of 4 m. before collision. Assume Coefficient of friction is 0.50. Solution: VAN Vine Vi f_-J eS TOYOTA (tetas biota F Logg] Patt cr ‘applied Velocity of impact Vi Ve Impact i After collision : -FS, a (e-va) Fe(W+w)t W, St=628- =" K=0 1 jam density | 110 K= density K= 55 vehicle / mile ®@ Max. capacity oa 2H020)- 2 kK 628 = Hy K In| = 55(62.8)- — (55° 9 Hy (+ pa, = 55(62.8) ‘10 where: Que, = 1727 vehicles / hour q = average volume of flow in vehicles/hour ® Speed of max. flow (space mean speed) m= speed max. flow cy te K= density Homi K © = jam density 628 =628-—— mi 110 b, =314mphA known to hi stant, there 3 Oe pot ae the max. value of the jam 60 Kp that could possibly occur during were 2400 vehicles point along the PLEX. The highway was have @ capacity of 3000 with a free flow speed of the extension of SLEX Is ave a free-flow speed of 60 kph roa capacity of 3600 vehicles per hour. i in a given hour 3344 vehicles were countered at a specified point along this highway, comy ofthese 3344 pute the space mean speed vehicles. a 836 = 60u=u? w = 60u+836=0 u=38kph 2.142 Probl ‘A section of the Cebu-Balamban Trancentral Highway has a free-flow speed of 95 kmihr and a density of 175 vehicles per km. Ifthe space mean speed is 30 kph, detenine the jam density In vehicles per m, @ screeneesPecatonica Space Mean Speed Versus heme FTN 2210115 Meme The jam density on the approach of the traffic flow on a single of Juan Luna Street is 120 vehicles per km, with a density on the approach of 40 vehicle per hour. If the space mean speed is 40 kph, determine the mean free speed in kph. Solution: be HH EW) \ b, m= 4,- (0) 4 3 120 = 3p, - Hy 1, = 60 kph 40=y, - 2.144 Problem A vehicle is approaching a signalized intersection at a speed of 35 kph. The density of traffic is 50 vehicles/hour. The red phase of the traffic signal is 20 sec. If the jam density is 110 vehicles/km, determine the speed of stopping shock wave. Solution: Given from an observation along EDs, during rush hour. Mean free speed = 64 kph Jam density = 120 veh/km © Determine the maximum flow of traffic, @ Determine the velocity at which the flow of traffic is maximum. @ Determine the density at which the flow of traffic is maximum. Solution: @ Max. flow of traffic Ku, Sue? 64 «eH nn = 1920 veh / hour Velocity at which the flow of traffic is maximum Ve hur V= %4 (64) = 32 kph 8 ® Density at which the flow of traffic is ‘maximum K= % (jam density) K = % (120) = 60 veh/hour The following data shows that the traffic flow on a single-lane approach to a signalized intersection. Jam density on the approach = 130 vehicle/km Density on the approach = 45 vehicle/km Space mean speed = 40 kph Determine the mean free speed.south (space mean speed) v= 190 vehicleskm (jam density) ye s5vericletm (density on the approsch) 4 x ®) p, 7H” yy, 070," ap) p, 261.2 kph (mean free speed) —- 2.147 Problem Observation of the traffic flow approaching a signalized: intersection indicates the following data: Mean free speed = 60 kph Jam density = 140 vehicle/km Density of the approach K = 45 kph Determine the velocity of the stopping wave in m/sec. Solution: Velocity of stopping wave : Solution: K = 110 vem (am density) H, = 64 kph (mean tree speed) Ku, oath ar Bon = A evenhan Upstream flow = 0.801760) Upstream flow = 1408 veh / hour A.car moves along Florida SR-400 at a max. Speed of 64 mph. If the maximum flow is . 1849 vehicles per hour, determine the density at which the flow is maximum in vehicles per hour. Solution: Ky, 2h vn K (64) 149-5) 4 K, = 115.56 vehicles Density at which the fw is maximum 11556 2 = 5778veh / hr 2.148 Problem Due to the closure of certain lanes of a highway (under repair), the capacity is teduced to 60% of its normal capacity. If the jam density of the highway is 110 veh/km and the mean free speed is 64 kph, determine the upstream flow if it is only 80% of its capacity. ‘A section of the extension of the Davao- General Santos route has a free flow speed of 50 kph and a capacity of 3200 vehicles per hour. Compute the density at maximum flow.TRANSPORTATION & TRAF! SaaS Density of max. fow = 3 (25 Density of max. flow = 128 vehicle / km 2.151 Problem ‘Two platoons of cars are timed over a distance of 0.5 km. Their flows are recorded. The first group is timed at 40 ‘seconds, with the flow at 1350 vehicles per hour. The second group takes 45 seconds with a flow of 1800 vehicles per hour. Determine the free flow speed. Solution: Group1: Average speed = ee = 45 kph Density = = = 30 vehiclesskm Group 2; ).5(3600) Average speed= 2) = 40 kph Densiy = “3 = 45 vehiclesikm y-45=m(x-30) y-4B=- 3 30) x + = 355 "3 Free flow speed = 55 kph The space mean speed of the cars Moving along the North Diversion Highway is 69 kph. The average spacing of the cars ig 65 m. Determine the jam density in vehicles per km if the highway has capacity of 3420 vehicles/hr. Solution: 1000 ity = 1000 = 454 Jam density 65 1 2.153 Problem A section of the (TPLEX) Tarlac - Pangasinan - La Union Expressway has the following flow density relationship: = 50K - 1.56K2 low in vehicles per hour K = density in vehicles per km Compute the space mean speed in kph if the density of flow is 14 vehicles per km, where Solution: = 50K ~ 1,58K2 3014) ~ 1.56(44)2 .9=K ps 394.24 = tp. Hs = 28.16 kphobserving a traffic at ui engi along the (NLEX) North : spell essa if you measure the n oe and average spacing of e as 3.2 sec. and 50 m. arn YO te tne flow of af, respecte mean speed of 40 kph, 70.3125 vehioestsec. = 0.3125(3600) q2t8 Given the following data as observed along the extension of (SCTEX) Subic-Clark- Tarlac Expressway: Free flow speed = 55 kph Traffic capacity = 3300 vehicles/hour Density = 40 vehicles/km Compute the jam density in vehicles per km, Solution: Ke 49 H, x = 4(3300) 6 K = 240 Given the following data’ as observed by a DPWH engineer at a ‘Specified point along the (SLEX) South Luzon Expressway. Jam density = 240 vehicles/km Free flow speed = 55 kph No. of vehicles counted in a given hour = 2100 vehicles. Compute the space mean speed in kph. Solution: K —)ur-K u+q=0 (3) mes 240 s u? -240u + 2100=0 vu? -56u + 481.25 =0 u= 44.08 kph Four racing cars competing on a 2 km tri- oval track at Rizal Memorial Stadium. The four cars are traveling at constant speeds and the corresponding laps covered as ‘shown in the table. Cars__| Speed (kph) | Laps Covered A 195, 39 B 190 38 c 185. 7 D 10 [36 Compute the time-mean speed for these vehicles in kph. Solution: Time mean speed : __ 195(39) + 190(38) + 185(37) + 180(36) we 39 +38 + 37 + 36 by, = 187.67 kphTION & TRAFFIC ENGINEER, 2.158 Problem The free mean speed on a roadway along Quirino Avenue Is found to be 80 kph. Under stopped conditions the average spacing between vehicles is 69 m. Determine the capacity flow in vehicles per hour. Solution: 1000 k = 1000 69 K, = 145 vehicles/km (jam density) 4g 145= <9 80 q= 2900 [2150 Problem] 160 Problem A section of the TPLEX (Tartag Pangasinan - La Union Expressway) hag the following flow density relationship, = 50K ~ 1.564? where q=flowin vehicles/hr K = density n vehicles/km Compute the space mean speed in oh the density of flow is 14 vehicles/km, Solution: q= 50K - 1.56K? = 50(14) - 1.56(14)? = 304.24 q=K us 394.24 = 14 Us bs = 28.16 kph In a given hour 2100 vehicles were counted at a specified point along the (SLEX) South Luzon Expressway. If the jam density is 240 vehicles per mile, determine the space mean speed at these vehicles in mph. ‘Assume a free flow speed of 55 mph. K, Hint: —Lu?-K,u+q=0 B Solution: K, <1 ut -K u+q=0 B, 20 ve -2a0u+2100=0 vu? - 85u + 481.25=0 U= 44.08 mph 2.161 Problem You are the engineer observing a traffic at a specific location of (NLEX) North Luzon Expressway. If you measure the average headway and average Spacing of passing vehicles as 3.2 seconds and 50 m, respectively, compute the flow of traffic if it has a space mean speed of 40 kph. Solution: st 3.2 = 0.3125 vehicles'sec 4 = 0.3125(3600) = 1125 veh / hr. qof traffic Is 44 mph peo see tO vehimile. If the det mph, find the density at te Ma me, ee Roxas Blvd. x2 4eveh / mile a jong McArthur Highway Is A oe have how of 1796 vehfnr and a free flow of 50 mph. If the density is 44 vehimiles, compute the Jam density in vehicles/mile. ‘Solution: K - =p, ]K-= onf-k] aan an ih tant eee The capacity of NLEX (North Luzon Expressway) 's 3200 vehicles per hour and hhas a free flow of 50 kph. At 9:00 AM, 2000 Vehicles were counted and observed to pass by at a specified point of the expressway. Compute the jam density in vehicles/km. Solution: 2% 4 x = (3200) 80 K, = 256 vehicles / km ‘Studies have shown that the traffic flow on a single lane approach to a signalized intersection on US 87 and |-40 in Texas Expressway has a jam density of 130 vehimile on the approach. Determine the mean free speed if the density on the approach is 45 veh/mile and the space mean speed is 40 mph. Ke K 13000 40 ¥4(45) 130 5200 = 130, -45u, 85 p, = 5200 vy, = 61.2mph 40=H,-lor NSIS HIGHWAY SAFETY AND ACCIDENT ANALYSIS er eC ae vehicle miles of travel (HMVM) eae eMac (100,000,000) ADT XN x.365xL R = the accident rate for 100 milion vehicle miles = the number of accidents during period of analysis ADT= average daily traffic time period in years L= length of segment in miles rer ee ent eek 0 Ree feta A(1,000,000) ADT XN x 365 R = the accident rate for one million entering vehicles ADT = the average daily traffic entering the intersection from all legs N= time period in years ___fafal + injury accidents fetal + injury + property damage = length of a segment of the road Us = Space mean speed ae d= length of a segment of the road t= time of observation n= no, of vehicles q= Kus = rate of flow in vehicles/hour K= density in vehicles/fhour/mile Us = space mean speed PAM Tr as “Volume of trafic in vehicles / hour highest vol. every 5 min. x 12 No.of vehicles per km ‘ = Vol.of traffic in vehicles / hour ave. speed of car in km / hr Average density = no. of vehicles per km 1000 ave.density PHF. Spacing of vehicles = Note :1 km=1000 m. Gabycoletcur Mca ANd CE ihe) eet S=VteL S= ave. center to:center spacing of cars in meters V= ave. speed of cars in meters action time in seconds L = Length of one car in meters c= 0) 8 C = Capacity of a single lane in vehicles*hourime headway in $20. ce cpacty i 88° 1000) og vy average veloc in ph Ht spacing gevth 1 reaction tne in sec. 1 = length of one car in meters ements Puy n up= time mean speed ‘Suj= sum of all spot speeds (kph) n=no. of vehicles reeked jetween cars y= sum of the reciprocal of spot 4, 1 speeds n= no, of vehicles Us= space mean speed ADE mee Us space mean speed in kph em K=densty of trafic in vehicles / km R, =—SUTOf vehicle lengths _ ‘ength of road way section 15. Variance about the Bere Means speed: * o ujtus 4, o¢ = variance about the space mean speed t= time meas speed Us = space mean speed P.HLF. = peak hour factor Pp = SUT Of flow rate none hour ‘max. peak flow rate x12 rage Daily Traffi Exe Sy 2.166 Problem The average of 24-hour traffic counts collected every day in the year. These counts are used to estimate highway user revenues, compute accident rates, and establish traffic volume trends. ES a) Average annual daily traffic (AAD?) b) Average daily trafic (ADT) ©) Peak hour volume (PHV) ) Vehicle miles of travel (VMT)eS 2.167 Problem The average of 24-hour traffic counts collected over a number of days greater than one but less than a year. These counts are used for planning of highway activities, measuring current _ traffic demand and evaluating existing traffic flow. a) Average annual daily traffic (AADT) Average deily traffic (ADT) c) Peak hour volume (PHV) d) Vehicle miles of travel (VMT) 2.168 Problem A measure of travel usage along a section of road. It is the product of the volume (ADT) and the length of roadway in miles to which the volume is applicable. This measure is used mainly as a base for allocating resources for maintenance and improvement of highways and to establish highway system usage trends. a) Density of traffic b) Traffic volume ©) Traffic capacity Vehicle miles of travel (VT) The maximum number of vehicles that pass a point on a highway during a period of 60 consecutive minutes. This volume is used for functional classification of highways, geometric design standards selection, capacity analysis, development of operational programs, and development of parking regulations, a) Traffic volume b) Traffic capacity 5S ¢) Peak hour volume (PH) ) Density of rac | INE ace CesT & Average Daily Traffic TUTOR CM TTF y Gverice Tm segment of a highwa = (100,000,000) (ADTHIN)(365)(L) where: R = the accident rate for 100 itn vehicle miles A= the number of accidents during thy period of analysis ADT = average daily traffic N= time period in years L= length of segment in miles i) b) ewe Coe Gentering Evenicies g tor g a geist ttt Mena A(1,000,000) (ADT)(N)(365) where: R = the accident rate for 100 milion vehicle miles ADT = average daily traffic entering the intersection from all legs N= time period in years 2.170 CE Board Nov. 2015 The number of accidents for 6 years recorded in a certain section of a highway is 5892. If the average daily traffic is 476, determine the accident rate per million entering vehicles. Solution: R= A(t,000,000) ‘ADT(N\(365) __ 5892(1,000,000) R=: are(eyaes) ~ 5?RTATION & TRAFFIC EN 2.171 CE Board Nov. 2016 The number of accidents for 5 years .orded In a certain section of a highway js 5432. if the average daily traffic is 476, e the accident rate per million entering vehicles. ‘Solution: = Alt,000,000) R= AoT(N(368) __§432(1,000,000) R= ~776(5)(365) — 2.172 CE Board Nov. 1998 Data on a traffic accident recorded on a certain intersection for the past 5 years has an accident rate of 4160 per million entering vehicles (ARMV). If the average daily traffic entering the intersection is 504, find the total number of accidents during the 5 year period. = 5211 p= A 000,000) ~ ADT (N)(365) __ A(1,000,000) M1 45365) ‘A= 3826 (number of accidents) 2.173 _Probiem From the given data of traffic counts for a certain portion of SCTEX are tabulated as shown: . Length of segment = 6 miles Average daily traffic (ADT) = 7500 Number of crashes per year = 28 Number of fatal crashes per year = 4 Determine the appropriate value of the crash rates per year. Solution: = -A{100,000,000) (ADT)(NY(365)(L) = 28(100,000,000) 7500(1)(365)6) Appropriate value of rash rate = 12247(4) 3 ‘Appropriate value of crash rate = 27.3 = 17047 Left tum crashes (per year over the past 4 years) were 10, 20, 18, 34. Cause of crashes: High speeds, no left turn phase Average daily traffic (ADT) past 4 years = 8600 Avera, daily traffic (ADT) after implementation = 9800 if the crash reduction factor CR = 0.54, compute the expected reduction in crashes if the countermeasures are implemented. Solution: A peryoars 62208814 Average crashes per year = 22 = 22(0.54)(9800) Crash prevented a = pr er yes “8600 Crash prevented per year = 13.5 say 14 crashes [2avsProtiem A 20-mile section along Route 60 with partially controlled access with an average daily traffic (ADT) of 60,000. Before: (Partial) Total crashes = 15 (accident rate) After upgrading: (Full) Total crashes = 10 (accident rate) Find the yearly reduction in crashes by upgrading to full access control.(ADTYNN@65XL) = 100,000,000) 000186) 20) ‘A=65,70 total crashes After upgrading : _ A( 100,000,000) OTIS) A(100,000,000) 00001 886)(20) A=438 total crashes No. of crashes recorded = 65.70- 43.8 No. of crashes recorded = 21.9 say 22 crashes Local residents in Tarlac attempting to pass a heavy traffic highway has an accident rate of 8 for 1,000,000 vehicles miles of travel Hf the length of the road is 42 miles with an average daly traffic of 480, determine the estimated yearly reduction in total crashes if the crash reduction factor i 0.28. 15: R - 102 ‘Solution: 00,000) ADT(L)(365) = AC.00,000 -480(12)(365) A=168 Estimated reduction n crashes = 0.28168) Estimated reducionn rashes = § crashes / yr It Is observed that 50 tratfic crash, occurred on a 20-mile long section i Route 120 In one year. If the average dai, traffic on the section was 5500 Vehicle, determine the rate of fatal crashes per 1% million vehicles-miles if 6% of the two crashes Involved fatalities. Solution: Re ‘A(100,000,000) (ADT)(U(368) = 50(100000000) 194.53 $5500(20)(365) Rate of fatal crashes = 124.53(006) ate of fatal crashes = 7.42 crashes _ 2.178 Problem The average annual daily traffic (AADT) of 15,000 vehicles per day occurs at q highway segment 0.2 miles long. In a three. year period, there have been 6 crashes resulting in death and or injuries and 12 involving property damage only. The average crash for similar types of roadway is 380 per 100 million vehicle-miles for a 3- year period, of which 120 involved death and 255 caused property damage only. ‘Compute the traffic base and the average 3-year crash rate for this type of facility. Solution: rate r= MOTI 16000(0.2)(3)(365) 100,000,000 Trafic base (TB) =0.08285 veh / mile Average 3-year crash rate = 3(120) +255 Average 3-year crash rate = 675 crashes Traffic base (TB) =Z 479 Problem for fatalities per 100 million TH clenmile has been slowly decreasing veh automobiles and light trucks for Japs, sport utlity vehicles and (orivans) For the years 2007 to 2012, the tion y = 0.08x + 1.16 can be used to mate the rate of fatalities per mitin yohicle miles for light trucks during this period and the function y = - 0.03x + 1.04 can be used to estimate the rate of fazalties per 100 millon vehicle-miles for automobiles during this period. For both functions, x Is ‘the number of years since 2007. Base on this.data, estimate the year in which the fatality rate for light trucks equaled the fatality rate of automobiles, Solution: y= 0.08% +1.16 1 .08x +.1.16 = -0.03x + 1.01 0.05x = 0.15 x23 Year in which fatality rates are equal = 2007+3 = 2010 2.180 Probiem A traffic engineer of MMDA observes the | traffic on Monday morning of January on a rural primary road. The tabulated results ON @ Tee Dhaene a were as follows; Hourly Timeot | YUM | Expansion observation Factor Traffic (HEF) 7:00-8:00 AM 400 2 8:00-9:00 AM 530 22.05 9:00-10:00 AM 650 18.80 700 47.70 650 18.52 Daily Expansion Factor for a rural primary road ~ (DEF) Day of Week DEF Sunday | 9.515 Monday 7.012 Tuesday 1121 Wednesday 6.582 Thursday [7.012 Friday 5.724 {___Saturday [6510 Monthly Expansion Factor for month of Jan. (MEF) = 1.756 Compute the annual average daily traffic (ADT). Solution: 24 - hour volume for Monday corrected for (HEF): ° Vv = £00(28)+590(22.06)+ 65 18.8)+ 70017 10} 650(18.52) 5 V = 19903, Correction for (DEF) Monday : Total 7-day volume = 19903(7.012) Total 7-day volume = 139560 Average 24-hour volume = oe Average 24-hour volume = 19937 Correction for MEF : AADT = 19937(1.756) ‘ADT = 35009 ' The maximum allowable rate of crashes at intersections is 9 per million entering vehicles. At an intersection of 2 roadways, average daily traffic (ADT) values are 10,000 and 8,265. Determine the maximum number of crashes per year before corrective action is needed.Solution: ADT = 10000 +8265 ADT = 18265 ._ ACt,000,000) ADT(N)(365) 9= A(1,000,000) 18265(1)(365) A= 60crashes 82 Prob The accident rates for 100 million vehicle miles of travel caused by people attempting to pass a heavily traffic 2 lane rural highway is 6.0. The length of the road is 10 miles with an average daily traffic ADT of 36000. Determine the estimated yearly reduction in total crashes if the crash reduction factor is 0.25. Solution: = (100,000,000) ADT(L)(365) _A(100,000,000) ~ 36000(10)(365) A=7.89 say 8 crashes per year Estimated reduction in crashes = 0.25(8) = 2crashes / year 60 ’ fatal injury Severty ratio = ————_-_____ fatal injury + property damage Data on a traffic accident recorded for th past 5 years on a certain stretch of a two, lane highway is tabulated as follows, Year Property Injury Fatal Damage 2010 110 42 4 2011 210 54 2 2012 182 60 5 2013 240 m4 7 2014 175 4 8 Total: 917 324 4 Compute the severity ratio. Solution: os a+ injury Severity rao = = ay + injury + property damage 244324 Seventy ralio= 77 324-917 Severity ratio = 0.275 Z 184 Problem A 20 mile section of the Cavite Coastal Road had the following reported accidents including property damage only accidents (PDO). It is required to compute the accident rates for injury accidents for a period of 5 years from 1980. Year Fatal Injury Property Ave. Daily Accident Accident Damage Trafic (PDO) 1980 3 40 110 12000 1981 1 52 215 12500 1982 5 60 170 16000 1983 8 4 250 13500 1984 7 96 160 14000sont gues =34+ 1454847 injury woo yega #60474 #96424 pverag® 42000 + 12500 + 13000 + 13500 + 14000 —— 5s. « 5 = 13000 ‘A(100,000,000) R= ON) 4 (100000 00) R= 3000 (6) (365)(20) £72.92 accident rates for injury accidents _ 85 Probiem ‘A45-mile section of the Kalayaan Road had the following reported accidents for a period of 6 years from 1992. It is required to compute the accident rates of all accidents. Year Fatal Injury Property Ave. Daily ‘Accident Accident Damage Traffic (PDO) 1992 4 46 120 10000 1993 2 52 200 10500 19946 70 190 11000 1995 8 65 140 11500 1996 5 82 240 = 12000 1997 10 8 180 12500 Cea Ed Solution: Total number of accidents = fatal + injury + PDO Number of fatal accidents =44+2+6+8+5+ 10 Number of fatal accidents = 35 Number of injury accidents = 46 + 52 +70 +65 +82 + 98 Number of injury accidents = 413 Number of property damage (PDO) = 120 + 200 + 190 + 140 + 180 Number of property damage = 1070 A=35 +413 + 1070 A= 1518 (total number of accidents) ‘Average ADT = 10000+ 10500 + 11000 + 11500 +12000 + 12500 6 ‘Average ADT = 11250 p= (100,000,000) ‘ADT(N)(365)(L) p= 1818(100,000,000) 11250(6)(365)(15) R= 41.0 accident rates of all accidents eee Ole Tee oe ee Million Entering Vehicles cr=avr+ 2 ste, ave ™ where: CR = critical crash rate per 100 million entering vehicles AVR = average crash rate for the facilty type TE = test factor, standard deviation at a given confidence level 7B = traffic base per 100 million entering vehiclesTRANSPORTATIO 2.186 Problem Give ength of segment highway = 0.3 miles Average annual daily traffic (AADT) = 1600 vehicles/day Test factor = 1,96 for 95% confidence level For a 4-year period: Average crash rate per million entering vehicle Property damage = 250 Fatal injury (death) = 120 Calculate the critical crash rate. AVR = 730 equivalent crashes/milion entering vehicles _ NAADT)(L)(365) 400,000,000 4(16000(0.3)(365) 100,000,000 TB = 0.07008 vehicle/mile per 100 million vehicle/mile TB= 196 Critical crash rate: 1B TB= cr=avr+ 25 ete JAR 7B CR=730+ 95 _ 44.96 0.07008 CR = 937 crashes eens eRe tM [catenin UEP prevented = NGRVADT afr improvement (ADT before improvernent) N= expected number of crashes if countermeasure is not implemented and if the traffic volume is the same CR = crash reduction factor for a specific countermeasure ADT = average daily traffic 2.187 __ Problem iT be improvement = 6624 fore AD’ ) (averag, over a 3-year ADT after improvement = 9200 CR reduction factor = 30% of crashes occurring be Numt year = 10, 12, 14 (over the 3-year befor, improvement priod) Determine the expected reduction, number of crashes occurring after implementation of the countermeasure, Solution: Ave. number of crasheslyear = aeuen ‘Ave. number of crashes/year = 12 Crashes prevented = N(CR)(ADT after improvement) (ADT before improvement) = 12(0.3)(9200) 6624 = Scrashes Per era) Factor for Multiple | Fi Wel ae cole Pee Le Single cece CR = CRi +(1- CR) CRe + (1 CRy)(1- CR) CRo+... where: CR = overall crash reduction factor CR:, CRe, CR: = crash reduction factor fora Specific countermeasureau tnt eatin along LEX, thag sures with crash reduction of CR = 38%, CR: = 26%, = 22% are proposed. Determine the overall crash reduction factor, cou! a: R= OR: +(1-CRIICR2 #(1-CRi)(1-CR.)CR, R= 0.38+(1-0.38\0.28)+(1-0,38)(1-0.26)0 22) R= 0.642 A queue is formed when arrivals wait for a service or an Opportunity such as the arrival of an accepted gap in a main traffic stream, the collection of tolls at a tollbooth or of parking fees at a parking garage. Oversaturated queues = are those which the arrival rate is greater than the service rate, Saturated queues = are those in which the arrival rate is less than the service rate. Under-Saturated Infinite b cmmamniainsek TTP eee Under-saturated infinite queues when both arrivals and service times are exponentially distributed and there is one channel. psd 1 (MPO is Caled trac rtenstyy eee lumber of unit: lay | eee . a En) = (n) aa where: Ein) = expected number of units in the ‘system A= arrival rate H® Service rate PST er renee : of waiting to be served firs x E(m) = : H(u-A) “jg Average waiting time in the queue E(w) = H(H-A) Loren PET TT CeO m eMC) queue and service) NOC ee Pp TPee a i (CT Terr lriclect me Ly s ceenemmemendlll 11121112) Mieeememnensanettl PU vehicles in the system a ay om-(3) where: a , —=trafiic intensity u N=no.of units inthe system 24 Probability of spending time GMMR RS) 2211 Mice Plt) =1-0¢%"" 34 Probability of waiting time Ca eeem kek ea Mec Pc ae eer) é Ome Tm S rm be free * sonia ION & TRAFFIC aN Probabilities of a Queue { (CnC Cge CCl ire LL) Matai PTC LRN Ce 5 3 Expected number of units in Lane eee P YP t-(N+1)P" + NpH E(n) (4 " | An off-ramp traffic must stop at a single tollbooth at the entrance of the Highway 78, The arrival rate at the tollbooth is 8 vehicles per hour. If the service rate is 86 vehicles per hour, determine the number of vehicles waiting to be served. Solution: N=124 say 13 vehiclesarrive at the vat notel in Las Vegas to see the boxing w n of Manny Pacquiao at the rate of 4 icles Per minute. It took the attendant 3p seconds to process the parking tickets, Determine the rate in which the vehicles e after getting their tickets in venicles!min. Solution: 30 ir = — =05min. EW) § 4 EV)=— > 2.191 Problem : Vehicles arrived at the entrance of San Juanico Bridge in Tacloban at a rate of 180 vehicles per hour. Vehicles must stop at the toligate where vehicles will have to:pay atoll fee upon entering the bridge. it would take 15 sec. per vehicle for the attendant to issue a trip ticket. Compute the traffic intensity at the bridge. Solution: Arival rate : 2p sdvehiin 60. , Average dep, ato = 7 = 4 vein Traffic intensity = : =075 Mae Scie Vehicles arrive at a stop sign at the corner of P. Del Rosario St. and Osmefia Blvd. at an average rate of 250 vehicles per hour. Average walting time at the stop sign Is 12 Sec. per vehicle. if both arrivals and departure are exponentially distributed, what is the average length of queue. Solution: = 250 (arrival rete) (1)(3600) 12 = 300 vehicles/hr. pe (rfc intonsty) ye p= 250-0933 308 ‘Average length of queue : 3 S (ave. length of queue) ye = 4,15 say 5 vehicles 2.193 Problem On a given day, 425 vehicles per hour arrive toll booth located at the end of ~ an off-ramp of the South Super Highway. If the vehicles can be serviced by only a single channel at the service rate of 625 vehicles per hour, determine the average number of vehicles in the system. Solution: a No. of vehicles in the system = fo. ovis inthe sytem = <= 425 625 - 425 No. of vehicles in the system = 2.125 say 3 No, of vehicles in the system =re ‘The number of vehicles that can enter the onramp of Subic-Clark Expressway Is controlled by a metering system. If the vehicles can enter the expressway at a rate ‘of 500 vehicles per hour, and the rate of arrival of the vehicles at the on-ramp Is 400 vehicles per hour during the peak hour. Determine the expected number of units ‘waiting to be served in the system. Solution: _ Fm) ut) (400y 500(600 - 400) E(m)=32 say 4 -195 Problem Off-ramp traffic must stop at a single tollbooth. The arrival rate at the tollbooth is 45 vehicles per hour. If the service rate is 60 vehicles per hour, determine the number of vehicles waiting excluding the vehicles being served. E(mn) = ‘Solution: AP asta Sar a 2.196. Problem enger cars arrive at the stop sign ee rate of 280 per hour, fue waiting time at the top sign Is 12 tet both arrivals and departure exponentially distributed, what wouig the average delay per vehicle in min ‘Assume both arrival and departure rajy, are exponentially distributed. Solution: 1.= 280 = (13600 12 u=300 ‘Average delay per vehicle in seconds or waiting time : “u-2) = _ 300(300 - 280) ww = 0.04667 hrs. w= 0.04667(60) w= 28 minutes 2.197 Problem The average queue length at the intersection of the two roads with a stop sign is 4 vehicles. If the arrival rate of vehicles at the stop sign is 300 vehicles per hour, determine the service rate of the Toad in vehicles per hour. Assume both arrival and departure rates are exponentially distributed. w1=362vehicles / hour (service rate ee | Cars have a long queue on a stop sign. if the total time delay of queuing is one minute, compute the traffic density if the service rate of the road is only 360 vehicles per hour. Assume both arrival and departure rates are exponentially distributed. Solution: Total time of delay : et pea t= 1 minute = 0.01687 hrs, t ooreer= 360-2.= 60 2.=300 vehicles, Trafic density : ENGINEERING CY 2.199 Problem The arrival of Vehicles at a toll gate of rcelo Fernand Bridge connecting Mandaue City and Lapu-Lapu City 1s 40 vel hicle per hour. Average service rate is 1.2 min. per vehicle, © Determine the th of queue excluding the vehicle being served. ® Determine the probability that no more than 5 cars (including vehicles being Served) are waiting. ® Determine the average waiting time in the queue in minutes, Solution: © Length of queue 2. = 40 vehiclefhr (ava rate) 2 = sovetisehe (cone rate fl i. Length of queue = —2_ ma A (40) 50(50 - 40) Length of queue = 3.2 vehicles Length of queue = ® Probability that no more than 5 cars are waiting “ef “ (2) =0.262 probebilty thet more 50. than 5 cars are waiting P=(1-0262 P= 0738. probabil that no more than Scars arewating ® Average waiting time in the queue t= 48 min.2.200 Problem {In a toll booth at the end of an off-ramp of the TPLEX, 400 vehicles/hr arrive and the service rate of the toll booth Is 600 vehicles/hr. © Determine the percentage of time that the operator of the toll booth will be free. @ Determine the expected number of vehicles in the system. @ Determine the waiting time for the vehicles that wait. ‘Solution: © Percentage of time that the operator of the toll booth will be free a Mi 2. = 400 vehiclesihr (arrival rate) 11=600 vehiclesinr (service rate) A _ 400 : m0 0.667 taf esty P(o) = 1 - 0.667 P(0) = 0.333 P(0) = 32.3%f the time ® Expected number of vehicles in the system E(o) = E(n)= = 2vehicles 600 - 400 ® Waiting time for the vehicles that wait 1 E(v) = —— WF 1 600-400 E(v)= 18 sec. E(v)= = 0.005 hrs. 2.201 Probl ‘An off-ramp toll booth Is installed fo, vehicles coming from the SLEX. The arriya, rate is 50 vehihr. and the service rate jy 60 veh/hr. @ Determine the number of vehicieg waiting to be served excluding the vehicles being served. Determine the length of ramp require to accommodate all exiting vehicles 80% of the time. Assume average vehicle length is 6 m. and space between waiting vehicles Is 1.5 m, Determine the average waiting time In the queue in minutes. Solution: Number of vehicles waiting to be served ‘excluding the vehicles being served 2 xv Fem) ua) 2. = 50 vehicles/hr 1 =60 vehicles/hr (so? 66460 -50) E(m) = = 4.17 vehicles Length of ramp vine ey H _(s0\" (10.80) = (2) 0.8333"" = 0.20 N+1=882 N=7.82 say 8 vehicles Ramp length = 8(6) + (8 - 1)(1.5) Ramp length = 58.5 m Ramp length = BOK) SESwaiting time in the queue bverone we e)* fp) 50 ew” G0) he arvval times of vehicle atthe entrance of a baseball stadium has a mean value of 30 vehihr. if it takes 1.5 min. for the issuance of parking tickets to be bought for occupants of each car. line the expected length of © Prove, not including the vehicle being sorved. © Whats the probability that there are no more than 5 cars at the gate including the vehicle being served? © What will be the average waiting time of vehicle in the queue in minutes? Solution: ® Expected length of queue, not including the vehicle being served AFFIC ENGINEERING ‘mee 199 ® Probability that there are no more than 5 cars at the gate including the vehicle being served moms os P(n>N)= (2) = 0.178 Probability that less than 5 vehicles at the gate : P=1-0.178 P=0.822 ® Waiting time of a vehicle cS Eiw)= wm) 30. 9700-30) E(w) = 4.5.min, 400 vehicles per hour arrive at a single toll booth located at the end of an off-ramp on the TPLEX. If the vehicles can be serviced at the rate of 600 vehicles per hour, determine the percentage of time the operator of the single toll booth will be free. . E(w) = = 0.075 hrs. Solution: = 400 vehvfhour 4 = 600 veb/hour For the operator to be free, the number of vehicles in the system must be zero. pete Poo)=1-% u Plo) =1- 0 = 0333The toll booth on the on-ramp of SCTEX controls the number of vehicles that can enter on the ramp at any one time. It allows only a maximum of 10 vehicles to be on the ramp at any one time. If the vehicles can enter the SCTEX at a rate of 750 vehicles/hr and the rate of arrival of vehicles at the on- ramp is 600 vehihr, © Determine the probability of 6 cars being on the ramp. @ Determine the percent of time that the ramp is full. @® Determine the expected number of vehicles 'on the ramp during the peak hour. Solution: © Probability of 6 cars being on the ramp N= 10 vehicles ® Percent of time that the ramp is full 4-P 0) = Pin) [ele 1-08 40) =| 1-28 “ P(10) [ age: |e" 0.023 SPORTATION Pe gal od oe eae & Expected number of vehicles on the ran during the peak hour f Pp ft-(N+ 1)" +NPH E(n) {e-Ses] z 08 1-(10+ 10.8)" + 190 ~ Ein) [a] 1-(053 | [08 Ji-te1+08s] en-( 8] 7-0.0859 | E(n) =2.97 say 3 _—_ 2.205 Problem The maximum number of vehicles that can enter the on-ramp of SCTEX is controlleg by the metering system which allows g vehicles to be on the ramp at any en tine due to heavy traffic in the expressway. The rate of arrival of the vehicles at the on. ramp is 420 vehicles/hr and ther ate that the vehicles can enter the expressway is 525 vehicles/hr. @ Determine the probability of 4 carg being on the ramp. @ Determine the percent of time that the ramp is full. @® Determine the expected number of vehicles on the ramp during peak hour, Solution: Probability of 4 cars being on the ramp 0.20 p(4) =| 270 _\(0,4096) = 0.0946 ow (saa | =a0.20 (8) = ( 20 min. Departure rates:= = 4 vehimin for all 9(20) +3 (t-20) = 4 180 + 3-60 = at t= 120 min. = 2 hr. after 8:00 AM Time the queue will dissipate =10 : 00 AM 2.230 Problem Vehicles begin to arrive at a toll booth at 7:50 AM written arrival rate of ‘AM(t) = 4.1 + 0.001 with t in min, and A(t) in vehicles/min. The toll booth opens at 9:00 AM and process vehicles at a rate of 12 veh/min throughout the day when will the queue dissipate? Solution: M(t) #33424 From 7:50 to 8:00 AM, t= 10 min, 10=3.3+42.4t t= 2792 min. Time at which service becomes constant at 10veh / min: t=10+2792 t= 12.792 min.Vehicles begin to arrive at a toll booth at 8:50 AM with an arrival rate of Mt) = 4.4 + 0.004t with tin min, and A(t) in vehiclesimin. The toll booth opens at 9:00 ‘AM and process vehicle at a rate of 12 veh/min throughout the day. When will the queue dissipate? Solution: Arrival = Janae Arrival = (4.1 + O01t)at Arrival = 4.11 + 0,005t? Departure = 12(t- 10) 9:00 - 8:00 = 10 min. ater arival ‘Arrival = departure (so that queue will dissipate or so that there will be no queue) 4At+ 0,005? = 12(t- 10) t= 1534 min, Vehicles arrive at a toll booth according to the function A(t) = 5.2 0.20t where A(t) is in vehicles per minute and t is in minutes. The toll booth operator process one vehicle every 20 seconds. Determine the time that the 20 vehicle to arrive waits from its arrival to its departure. Solution: A(t) =5.2-0.208 Arrivals = [ (tat Artvals = [ (6.2 -0.20t)dt Arrivals = 5.2t- 0.1017 Q(t) = Amivals - Departure Q(t) =5.2t- 0.108? - 20 when Q(t) = 0 5.2t- 0.101? - 200 t? -52t+ 2000 t=4.183 min. (time the 20th vehicle arrives) 60 - = — =3vehimin. a) 3t-20=0 2.233 Problem Vehicles begin to arrive at a remote parking lot after the start of a major sporting event. They are arriving at a deterministic. but time-varying rate of A(t) = 3.3 - 0.1t where 2M(t) is in vehimin. and t in min. The parking lot attendant processes vehicles (assigns ‘spaces and collect fees) at a deterministic rate at a single station. A queue exceeding four vehicles will back up onto a congested street, and is to be avoided. How many vehicles per min. must the attendant process to ensure that the queue does not exceed four vehicles? Solution: Arrival rate =f 2(t)at Arrival rate = f(3.3 - 0.11)dt Arrival rate = 3.3t- 0.05t? Departure rate = f yedt Departure rate = jit33-H 009 (32) song = 241 voh / min _ SIGHT DISTANCE FOR HORIZONTAL SURFACE sight distance = is the length of roadway ‘ahead visible to the driver. sight distance = the sight ag ‘ong enough to enable a vehicle to overtake and pass another vehicle on a twolane “highway without interference from opposing traffic ing sight distance = the minimum Stine requed to stop a vehicle traveling near the design speed before it reaches a stationary object in the vehicle path, This stationary object may be another vehicle or some other object within the roadway. Minimum stopping sight distance = is equal fo the distance traveled from the same time the object is sighted to the instant the brakes are applied plus the distance required for stopping the vehicle after the brakes are applied. BS Cea) BCE ia yeencn ita BUS een tea Ym > Nese Dea, ig Dace " . Bat Ho0 = Stopping sph ditance V1= velocity in meters/sec. perception-reaction time = coefficient of fction between tires and Pavements G= average grade of roadway 2.234 Problem Determine the minimum stopping sight distance on a - 3.5% grade for a design speed of 110 kph. Coefficient of friction between tires and pavement is 0.28. Driver's reaction time (including perception time) is 2.5 sec. ew” SMG (3056) S=3056(25) + 5 59y0.28 -01035)TATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING In an intersection collision one of the vehicles leave 48.78 m. of skid marks. A skid mark analysis indicates that the vehicle was traveling 80 kph at the onset of braking. Assuming the median-brake reaction time of 0.66 sec. estimate distance from the point of impact to the 2.236 Problem A vehicle traveling at a speed of 80 which accelerates 3.41 mis?, perception reaction time for the driver ig 2.5 sec. If the maximum grade of the roaq is - 4%, compute the minimum sight distance. Veo 22225 3 VE=VE-2a8, (22.22)? = V? - 2(1.5)(48.78) V, = 25:30 mis 8,=Vi S, =25,30(0.66) S,=1670m. Distance from the point of impact to the vehicle position when the driver initially reacted : S=S,+8, S=1670+48.78 S= 65.48 m. 56m. (lag distance) -_v 8.* a6) ee 41 oat =035 = (22 _ 2 2(9.81)(0.35 - 0.04) $, =81.18 m. (braking distance) Minimum sight distance : S=S,+S, $= 55.56 + 81.18 S= 136.74 m.ATICAL PARABOLIC ‘CURVES re Se a g237 Problem h of a ‘summit vertical curve is the ler gent grades for the vertical " are +3% and -2%. Compute the the summit curve. curv’ radius of vertical summit curve has tangent grades of +5% and 3.8%. The horizontal distance from the P.C. to the highest point of the curve is 113.64 m. Determine the length of _ the curve. Solution: got 9-9 0054 1364= 75-0036 L=200m ee 2.239 Problem : A vertical summit curve has its highest point of the curve at a distance of 48 m. from the P.T. The back tangent has a grade of +#6% and a forward tangent grade of -4%. if the stationing of the P.T. is 10 + 100, determine the length of vertical summit Curve in meters. PP ORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINeERine ema Solution: L=120m = 2.240 Problem On a railroad, a + 0.8% grade meets l, a0. grade at sta. 2 + 700 and at elevation om The maximum allowable change in grade per station is 0.2%. Determine the length of the curve. Solution: re 8ch 7 08 +04 a 02= n=6 L=6(20) L=120m A vertical parabolic curve has a length of 280 m. It has an initial and final grades of +3% and -4%. The elevation of the P.C. is 30 m. and is at station 10 + 120. © Find the value of K (length of curve for every 1° of change in slope). @ Find the stationing of the highest point of the curve. ' ® Find the elevation of the highest point of the curve.Solution: @® Value of K et Kea A=9,-9, A=3~-(-4) AST ® Stationing ofthe highest point of the curve S=Kgi $= 40(3) $=120m Stationing of highest point = (10+ 120) + (120) =10+240 @ Elevation of the highest point Using slope diagram method: h=area of shaded section = 120(003) 2 h=18m Elev.A=30+1.8 Elev.A=31.8m Galo} NN & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING Check : L H=5 (9, -9,) y= 2000344) (100) H=245 y 245 (207 (40)? y=18 Elev. A= 30 + 0.03(120) - 1.8 Elev. A=31.8m —— 2.242 Problem A 45.2% grade is followed by a -2% grade of a vertical summit parabolic curve a station 2 + 230 with an elevation of 194.6) m. The parabolic curve is 450 m. long. @® Compute the length of curve per 1° change in grade. ® Compute the elevation’ of the highest point of curve, @ Compute the stationing of point ¢ whose elevation is 185.35. Solution: © Length of curve per 1° change in grade A=g, -9, A=52-(-2) A=72 L _ 450 K= A 72° 625m ® Elevation of the highest point of curve S=Kgi S= 62.5(5.2) S = 325 m. (location of highest point of curve from P.C.)- ‘s=325m “sm , diagram method : using slope ‘ h = area of shaded section 0.02(125) ne n= 125m Elev. A= 194.60 - 225(0.02) + 1.25 Elev. A= 191.35 m. stationing of point C whose elevation is 485.35 1.188380 p= 2082(828) 2 h, =845m. y, = 191.35- 185.35 y=6m Using square property of parabola, 845 _ 6 Gare X=27386 Stationing ofA = (2-+ 230) + 100 Stabioning of A= 2 + 330 Stationing of C = (2 + 330) - (273.86) Staining of C= 2 +056.14m 2.243 Problem A symmetrical vertical summit curve has tangents of +6% and -4%. If the stationing bt aeton of the P.T. is 10 + 020 and ™. respectively, compute the elevation and stationing of the highest point Of the curve, Length of curve is m. Solution: ree Lf sear Elev. of highest point of curve = 142.63 + 0.96 Elev. of highest point of curve = 143.59 m Stationing of highest point of curve = (10 +020) -48N & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING eee A vertical summit parabolic curve has tangent grades of +2.8% and -1.6%. If the length of the curve is 110.46 m, compute the radius of the vertical curve. 4 110.46 = K(4.4) 2.245 Problem A back tangent grade of a crest vertical curve is +3% intersects a minus 2% grade at station 4 + 350 and at elevation of 190.50 m. If the length of curve is 250 m, determine the elevation of the highest point of the curve. Use slope diagram method. Solution: 40380 B= 1905097 shen ref = 196750 | t By ratio and proportion : 0.03 0.02_ s, 20-5, S, = 150m. from P.C. Elev. P.C. = 190.50 - 125(0.03) Elev. P.C. = 186.75 m h= area of shaded area diag. he ‘a0 =2.25 Elev. of highest point of curve = 186.75 + 2.25 Elev. of highest point of curve = 189m. a 2.246 Problem A vertical summit curve connects a +6% grade to a -3% grade at the P.l. at station 150 + 00 whose elevation is 48 m. A crossroad is located at station 150 + 70, Elevation of the centerline of the crossroad is 37.50 m. ® Compute the length of the vertical curve needed to make the highest point on the vertical curve come out exactly over the centerline of the crossroad at station 150 + 70. @ Compute the clearance between the profile grade on the vertical curve and the centerline of the crossroad. @ If the design speed is 120 kph, determine the minimum length of the curve required considering appearance criteria. 1302000 1nd 130400 . het psa of cave pn d8 en 7 Hnhes prey Lo35 pr. Toss ad g1= 3738 | Cros Bron yists70 “0, 3-70 a — + S, r 2 on | i 003 Lao 2-70 By rato and proportion : 006 _ 0.03 y+70 4-70 L 0.06 &sro(5-70\ es] Li 2 L +70= G5 70} 5 +70=L-140 L+140= 21 - 280 L=420m. ® Clearance between the profile grade on the vertical curve and the centerline of the crossroad 130600 EL=dtm ‘ Ma “d | sss0 a Elev. of PT, = 4g. 210(0.03) = 44 70m Elev. of A=4170 +24 =43.80m Cera betveon And essed ® Length of Curve criteria itV= 129 yee O° eopearance V> 60 kph and A > 2%, where: A grade of .5% +1%, the (Sta. 10 + 060 restricted to 0, length of the vertical Parabolic sag curve in meters. {is followed by a grade of grades intersecting at the vertex ). The change of grade is 14% in 20 m. Compute the n=15 L=15(20) = 300maay Nate NS 2.248 CE Board May 2015 A -6% grade and a +2% intersect at STA 12 + 200 whose elevation Is at 14.375 m, The two grades are to be connected by ‘a parabolic curve, 160 m long. Find the elevation of the first quarter point on the curve. Solution: tank aes HE (,-9) H s (002+ 0.06) H=16 et (aay ~ (oy _ (07118) (80) y=0.40 Elev. A= 14.375 + 40(0.06) +0.40 Elev. A= 17.175 m. 2.249 Problem A -6% grade and a +2% grade intersect at STA 12 + 200 whose elevation is at 25.632 m. The two grades are to be connected by a parabolic curve, 160 m long. Find the elevation of the first quarter point on the curve. 5 (4,-s) He (008-002) H=-1.6m. (sag curve) (4oy , (80° y, 16 y, 040 Elev. of P.C. = 25.632 + 80(0.06) = 30.432 Elev. of first quarter point: Elev, = 30.432 - 40(0.6) + 0.40 Elev, = 28.432 m. 2.250 Problem A descending grade of 4.2% intersects an ascending grade of 3% at sta. 12 + 325 at elevation 14.2 m. These two grades are to be connected by a 260 m. vertical parabolic curve. Ar einforced concrete culvert pipe with overall diameter of 105 cm. is to be constructed with its top 30 cm. below the subgrade, What will be the invert elevation of the culvert?Lmestpim of cre oot By ratio and proportion : 42 _ 0.03 ws S 0.0728= 260(0.03) $= 108.33 h=area of shaded section 0.03(108.33) —— h3.625 Bev. P.T,= 14.2 + 0.03(130) Elev. P.T.= 18.10 Elev. of 18.10 - 1.625 Bey, of A= 16.475 m. Elevation ofinvert of culvert = 16.475 -0.3- 1.05 Elevation of invert of culvert = 15.12 m came 229 | 2.251 Problem ‘A 300 m. vertical parabolic sag curve are Connected by tangent grades of -5% and +1'% which intersects at station 10 + 050 and elevation 374.50 m. ® Compute the length of curve per 1° change in grade. ® Compute the distance from the P.C. to the lowest point of the curve. ® Compute the elevation of the lowest point of the curve. Solution: © Length of cuve per 1 change in grade @® Distance from P.C. to the lowest point of the curve Si=Kgr 50(5) S1= 250m. from the P.C.TION & TRAFFIC GINEERING Check : Using slope diagram 0.01 S,= 9, -9, = 2 0.05(800). PC = “hog non 7 am ome: Elevation of the lowest point of curve: using slope diagram Elev. of PT = 374.50 + 150(0.01) Elev. of PT = 376 m. ‘Area of shaded diagram = h n= 20) =0.25 Elev. of A= 376 - 0.25 Elev. of A = 375.75 m 2.252 CE Board Nov. 2016 A -25% grade is connected to a +1.0% grade by means of a 180 m. vertical curve. The P.L. station is 100 + 00 and the P.l. is at elevation 100 m. above sea level. What is the stationing of the lowest point on the vertical curve? ose Using slope diagram method. 180-S_ S_ 0025 (0.01 18-001 $=0.025S 0.035S= 1.8 $=51.43m. Check using formula: =k 9,°9, __0001(180) 01-(- 0.025) $=5143m, ok s s x=90-51.43 x=3857m Stationing of lowest point = (100 + 00) + (38.57) Stationing of lowest point = 100 + 38.57 2.253 Problem A vertical curve joins a -1.2% grade toa +0.8% grade. The P.I. of the vertical curve is at station 75 + 00 and elevation 50.90 m. | above sea level. The centerline of the roadway must clear a pipe located a | station 75 + 40 by 0.80 m. The elevation of the top of the pipe is 51.10 m. above sea level. What is the minimum length of the vertical curve that can be used? Solution: Pe.PP (g,-%:) L 8 L (.0.012-0.008) 3 x= =-0,00250L (negative sign indicates 4 @ sag curve) 2 G4) “y(068 : 2-40L +1600 C = qoonst) 088 +E _ LE -160L +6400 oor 4(0.68) 272. = 12 - 160 + 6400 001 mas - 160L +6400 UE -432L + 6400 =0 L=416.64 say 417 m. 2.254 Probiem A vertical curve joins a -0.5% grade to a +1.0% grade. The P.l. of the vertical curve 's at station 200 + 00 and elevation 150 m above sea level. The centerline of the Toadway must clear a Pipe located at Station 250 + 70 by 0.75 m. The elevation of the top of the pipe is 150.40 ™. above the ea level. What is the minimum length of Vertical curve that can be used? = ; [001-(-0.005)] H=O0otgeL Elev. A= 150 +70(0001) Elev. A= 150.70, Elev.B = 150.40 +075 Elev. B = 151.15m y= 151.15- 150.70m y= 045m _ 0.001881(4) oe) ~ TOL + 4900 = 59.84L. L - 2801 + 19600 = 239.36L L -519.36L +1960 = 0 L= 478.39 m.The length of a sag vertical curve is 420 m. with tangent grades of -2% and +4% intersecting at a point whose stationing is at 160 + 00 and elevation of 60 m. above sea level. A pipe is to be located at the lowest point of the vertical curve. The roadway at this point consists of two 3.6 m. lanes with a normal crown slope of 2%. If the lowest point on the surface of the roadway must clear the pipe by 0.75 m, what is the maximum elevation of the top of the pipe? Solution: fomae! json 075m 082m | | Bown | _ 280 Using spe agra "9-9 g, = 22.02(420) " -0.02-0.04 S,= 140m, Elev. of P.C, = 60 + 210(0.02) F1.=6280.m , x 28 0206)! | [=007m sn 6m ([O7Sm ORM Top of rive 1 i 1.<61578m Elevation at point A = 64.20- 1.4 Elevation at point A = 62.80 m. Elevation of the top of the pipe = 62.80 - 0.822 1.978 m 2.256 Problem Avertical sag curve has tangent grades of. 1.5% and +3.5%. If the length of curve per 1% change in grade is 32.13 m, find the maximum speed allowed to pass through this curve in kph. Solution: K=32.13 A=-15-(35) A=-5 (sag) L=AK L=5(32.13) L= 160.65 AV? L=-— 395 svt 395 V= 112.66 kph 160.65 =symmetrical Parabolic i ae curves fcal highway curve is at times ved t0 include a particular elevation at a " yation where the grades of the forward oo yard tangents have aeady been ond ened. itis therefore necessary to use a sl with ‘unequal tangents or a compound which is usually called “unsymmetrical* an mecal parabolic cure where one of tends fom the PC. 10 a point orate iow the vertex and a second seal rich extends fom this pont tothe pate order to make the entire curve smooth oe continuous, the two parabolas are so and cle 0 that they will have @ common at the point where they joined, that is aa pont directly below the vertex. Lotus consider the figure shown below: Ly = length of the parabolic curve on the left side of the vertex. L,= length of the parabolic curve on the right side of the vertex. 41= slope of backward tangent 42 slope of forward tangent Considering triangles AVD and ABC. (91-9) be Solving for Ly: 2H _(o1- 92) Le ty Ly Fly DLs + 2HL2= Ly Le (91-g2) Lalletor-92)- 2H] = 2HL Lye La @i-G2)-2H Applying the squared property of parabola, in solving for the vertical offsets of the parabola.” a? os Oo? Location of the highest or lowest point of the curve, L a) From the PC when=2 H 2 use: $= 8222 (rom the PT) igy @® When “5+ 267 The lowest point of curve is on the right side. p20 +100. + | Lowest point 0.05 (100)2 2 (267) S_= 93.63 m. Sta, of owest point of curve = (10 + 300) - 93.63 Sta. of lowest point curve = 10+ 206.37 Elements of a spiral curve: S.C. = spiral to curve C.S. = curve to spiral S.T. = spiral to tangent Ts = tangent distance Te = tangent distance for the cure 2 PFensangle of intersection of spiral 6 ! easement curve angle of intersection of simple curve tangent to spiral radius of simple curve degree of simple curve Jong tangent short tangent extemal distance of the spiral curve long chord of spiral transition offset from tangent at S.C. " distance along the tangent from the T.S. to S.C. ak = offset from tangent at any point ° ‘on the spiral aY = distance along tangent at any point on the spiral 49. Se = Spiral angle at S.C. oi = deflection angle at any point on the spiral, it is proportional to the square of its distance. 21. L, = length of spiral length of spiral from T.S. to any point along the spiral 8 c " EMA ao NS oda Natit 1. Spiral angle at any point on the spiral o= (19 RL te 2. Spiral angle at S.C. 0. tu. ( 8, 8,= ares 11. Offset distance from tangent at S.C, B X= oe Offset distance from the tangent at any point in the spiral B XX = a Deflection angle at any point on the spiral wle Distance along tangent at any point in the spiral a =L-—__ ORE Distance along tangent at S.C. from TS. B y,=L,- wR Tangent distance for spiral ok Xx, 1 weg )ny External distance xX.) 1 g-(R eed -n Angle of intersection of central simple curve kk = I-28, 0) Length of throw aX Pra12. Super-elevation where K = velocity of car in kph i ez 0.0079 K? R 13. Super-elevation considering 75% of K to counteract the super-elevation = 0.004 K oFTR 14. _ Desirable length of spiral 136 K* R 15. Deflection angles vary as the squares of the length from the T.S. iv We 16. Degree of curve varies directly with the length from the T.S. OL pt 2.259 GE Board Nov. 2015 A spiral easement curve has a length of 100 m. with a central curve having a radius of 300 m. Determine the offset distance from the tangent to the third-quarter point of the spiral. Solution: TS aang pirat Serena in cane Tieng of oat eel Wao Pea aaans v xe RL 37 ; (100) ** 5(300)(100) = ** 6(300)100) x= 234 —_—_—— TTT 2.260 CE Board Nov. 2075 A spiral easement curve has a length of 120 m with a central curve having a adiug of 300 m. Determine the offset distance from the tangent to the third-quarter poin, of the spiral. . Solution: = (00))_ 6(300)(120) x= 3.375 msement i asl tna central angle having a radius 400 ne Determine the degree of spiral at srs ma soution: 9 ee (degree of simple curve) =R 445.916 0°30 p=38te . 3 peayeeofspirehwhen L= 7 L, eA) L=75m aie ris sate 100 = 286" 2.262 CE Board Nov. 2015 ‘The degree of curve of the central curve of a spiral easement curve is equal to 6". If the max. design velocity of the car passing ‘thru the spiral curve is 75 kph, determine the required length of spiral. 2: Solution: V=7368 kph —— ‘A spiral 80m. long connects a tangent with a 65° circular itulat cure, Determine the ngle atthe first quarter point. fel a tan0 Speer @ + 202 2 2 ~e= (207 7(176.28)(60) $= 0.01418 rad. = 0.01418(180) x $=0,8125" s 65 Problem The length of the spiral curve is 82 m. and the radius of the central curve of the spiral curve is 260 m. Compute the length of throw. Compute the deflection angle at the eng point of the spiral if the length of spiral ig 80 m. with a degree of curve of the centra} curve of a spiral easement curve is 6.5", = 1145916 «176.20 65 The spiral easement curve has a length of spiral equal to 80 m and the radius of the central curve of the spiral curve is 192.84 m. Compute the deflection angle at the end point of the spiral. sdoron eS Seated angers2.268 Problem Aspiral easement curve has a length of 80 mand the radius of the central curve is 200 m. Determine the max. velocity that a car could pass thru the spiral curve. Solution: _ 0.036 V" TR _ 0.036 V" B= 200 V=76.3 kph 2.269 Problem The design speed of a car passing thru an easement curve is equal to 80 kph. The radius of the central curve of the spiral curve is equal to 260 m. long. © Compute the value of the rate of centrifugal acceleration in misec for this speed. ® Compute the length of the spiral curve based on the centrifugal acceleration. ® Compute for the length of throw. © in vate of ong eccebraten c= 80. Th+V ls OD C= 0.516 ms? ® Length of spiral curve: 1-215 8 oR 1, = 20215 808 °° 0.516 (260) L,= 82.05 m, ® Length of throw: Xe 4 ote Xe= aR X= (82.05) ~ 6 (260) X= 4.32 432 4 P= P=1.08m. The tangents of a spiral curve forms an angle of intersection of 25° at station 2 + 058, Design speed is 80 km/hr. For a radius ‘of central curve of 300 m. and a length of spiralof 52.10 m.. © Find the stationing at the point where the spiral starts. © Find the stationing of the start of central curve. © Find the length of central curve.TRANSPORTATION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING Solution: ® Stationing at the point where the spiral starts. a Le othe mR! 2 5210 Fay, (6210)*) 25 7 tbo aay] T, =92.64m. Stationing @ T.S. = (2+ 058) - 92.64 Stationing @ T.S. = 1+ 965.36 ® Stationing of the start of central curve. Sta. @S.C.= Sta. @T.S. + Le Sta. @ S.C. = (1 + 965.36) + 52.10 Sta. @ S.C. = 2+ 017.46 ® Length of central curve. Le, 180 Soe g, = 210 , 180 * 2(300) "or S, =4975° k=1-2S le 25 -2(4.975) l= 15.05" Length of central curve: 1 S=R. |. 7—p Tt S$ = 300(15.05°) 780 $= 788m. A simple curve having a degree of curve equal to 6’ is connected by two tangents having an azimuth of 240° and 289° respectively. It is required to replace this curve by introducing a transition curve 80 m. long at each end of a new central curve which is to be shifted at its midpoint away from the intersection of the tangents. © Determine the radius of the new central curve if the center of the old curve is retained. @ Determine the distance which the new curve is shifted away from the intersection of the tangents. ® Compute the length of throw. Solution: © Radius of central curve:R= 490.99 m. - (807 190.00-R. = 24 R- 4683.76 R, -24R; = 6400 R? - 190.99 R, + 266.67 =0 190.99 + 188.18 stance which the new curve is shifted ° pier from the intersection of the tangents. h=Ri-Re h= 190.00 - 189.59 h= 140m. (amount the new curve is shifted away from the intersection of the tangents) @ Length of throw: 2 Pear, - _ (607 ~ 24(189.59) P=1.41m. A simple curve having a radius of 200 m. has a central angle of 50°30’. itis required to be replaced by another curve by Connecting spiral (transition Curve) at its ends by Maintaining the radius of the old Curve and its center but the tangents are Moved outwards to allow transition, Part of the original curve is Tetained. The new Intersection of the tangents is moved outward by 2 meters from its original Position along the line connecting the intersection of tangents and the center of the curve, © Determine the length of the transition Curve (Spiral) at each end of the central curve, @ Compute the spiral angle: ® Compute the central angle of the Central curve from the S.C. to C.S. Solution: ® Length of the transition curve: L2=P (24) Re L2= 1.81 (24)(200) L_= 92.95 m. (length of spiral)® Spiral angle. by 180" 8. 2R0 8, = 13°19" ® Central angle: k=I-2S¢ k= 50°30'- 2(13°19) |= 23°52" (central angle ofthe new curve) 0.036(140)° R R=395.14m = v = ae +f) (140)? ~ {2i(e +0.20) 250 = 73 Given a horizontal curve with a 400 meter radius have a design speed of 90 kph. Compute the minimum length of transition curve necessary for a smooth transition from tangent alignment to the circular curve. Solution: = 0036V" Rk = 01036(90)° ar) L=65.61m Li L 2.274 Problem A ‘1-km long racetrack is to be designed with turns 250 m. length at each end. Determine the super-elevation rate for a design speed of 140 kph and a side friction factor of 0.20. 2.275 Problem A horizontal curve has a radius of 400 m, Compute the minimum length of the spiral necessary for a smooth transition from tangent alignment to the circular cune, Assume that the maximum super-elevation rate should not exceed 0.08 and a max, side friction value of 0.12. ‘Solution: 2 R= 127(e +f) -_V me 127(0.08 + 0.12) V = 100.80 kph Length of spiral : .036v?with a 410 m. ont ngth of spiral smooth transition from e circular curve If way of the Northern Luzon Ames yee width of 3.6 m. per lane ay ‘a design speed of 100 kph. It has a 400 m. radius of central curve. Determine the length of spiral if the difference in grade between the centerline and edge of favelway Is limited to 1/200. Assume friction factor f = 0.12. Solution: D = width of one lane L, = length of spiral e= super-elevation rate | = (100 , * 10126) / = 0.08 (super elevation rate) =. a PW nian ae oe Ls = De (200) Le = 3.6(0.08)(200) Ls = 57.60 m. say 60m (muttiple of 20 m) as 2.278 Problem A circular curve with a radius of 350 m. is Connected by 60 m. spiral transition curves to tangents with a deflection angle of 0.349 rad. If the stationing of the TS is 105 + 40, determine the stationing of the ST. L, = 360(0.349) L,=12215m. Stationing of S.T. = (105 +40) + 60 + 122.15 +60 = (105 + 40) + (2+42.18) = (107 +8215)ION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING eee TT ie oe ee Ls [oy t1 111% - Mien Design speed = the maximum safe speed that can be maintained over @ specified section of highway when conditions are so favorable that the design features of the highway govems, Stopping sight distance = the distance required to see an object 150 mm high on the roadway, it is intended to allow drivers to stop safely after sighting an object on the roadway large enough to cause damage to the vehicle or lost of control. Cceeededll SILL enough to enable a vehicle to overtake and sing traffic. Passing Sight Distance = the sight distance long pass another vehicle on a two-lane highway without interference from opposi Total passing sight distance: S=d1+ d2+d3+ d+ where: dy = the distance traversed during perception and reat point of encroachment on the left lane. dp= distance traveled while the passing vehicle occupies left lane listance between the passing vehicle at the end of its maneuver and the opposing vehicle .ction time and during the initial acceleration to the ds dy = distance traversed by opposing vehicle for two-thirds of the time the passing vehicle occupies the left lane or sometimes taken as 2/3 dz Opposing vehicle appears when passing vehicle Passing vehicle reaches point A. 5 A First phase \ B— Fate 5399 Prol werlmass ratio passenger car righ Powe eration lane at 48 kph and pa ae lane at 70 Koh tina Heed length of the acceleration lane nen the 200 .eleration rate Is 3.4 mis?. —r rouge Acceleration Lane (1944)? = (13.33)? + 28.4)S $= 29.44m, —— Passing Sight Distance * (Overtaking Distance) ina * Two-Lane Highway *# Compute the passing sight distance that vehicle A could move while overtaking the slow moving vehicle B before meeting the oncoming vehicle C. Speed of car A= 96 kph Perception-reaction time = 2.5 sec. Average acceleration = 2.4 misec? Time the passing vehicle occupies the left lane = 10,4 tee. . Distance the end of she esting vehicle at Vehicle = 84 m, Iver and the opposing Solution; The driver of the down to the Chances for overteking, Passing vehi 4, = \, t, 4, = 2667(104)= 277.37 m. 4, =84m. 4,= ; (27737) = 18491 Passing sight distance: $=d, +d, +4, +4, § = 68,60+ 277.37 + 84+ 184.9 = 61488 m.Compute the minimum passing sight distance for the following data: Speed of the passing car= 90 kph « Speed of the overtaken vehicle = 80 kph Time of initial maneuver = 4 sec. ‘Average acceleration = 2.4 kphisec. Time passing vehicle occupies the left lane = 9 sec. Distance between the passing vehicle at the end of its maneuver and the opposing vehicle = 80 m. Solution: Onpsing veil then asine vee Passing vehicle atherpo 8 Pasig sight distance Ma passing sight estance= 2 +4, +4, go Win passing sit distance = $d, +d, d, = distance between passing vehicle at the end of its maneuver and opposing vehicle d,=Vt but d, 4,= ame, =225 m. Nn posing distance = $226) +80 in passing distance = 380 m. Sight Distance for Vertica; heared LAL Mite} Dire ees s a) WhenSL 9) K= length of vertical curve in meters for 1% change in grade A=Qi-ge e) R= 100K R= radius of parabolic curveing sight distance o ForeMneight of eye level from the pavement 2108m poe hight of objet 060m For sto For passing sight distance ® pz 1.08m f= 108m pesign standards used in the a Philippines Distance Driver Eye Object Se Height (m) Height (m) Car Stopping 1.08 0.60 Sight Distance Truck Stopping 2.33 0.60 Sight Distance warouer Set 1.08 0.60 is Pasar Sant 1.08 4.08 jis Car Headlight to Road surface Sight 0.60 0 Distance Truck to Car Tail Sight 2.33 0.60 Distance © California standards length of vertical curves “L” a) When design speed V < 60 kph Use L = 60m b) When grade breaks A = g1 -gzis less than 2% UseL = 60m ¢} When V > 60 kph and grade break > 2% Use L = 2v @) When V > 60 kph but grade break < 2% Use = 60m Design standards foy distance y ng sight cones, are Sight distance for sag vertical helght ot based on an assumed headlight mm and divergence of the headlight beamot Sag Vertical tie © WhenS 60 kph but A < 2% L=60m b) When V < 60 kph L=60m o) When A< 2% L=60m d) When V> 60 and A> 2% LevGINEERING 82 Problem ‘Assume S 83.32 ok as assumed Coefficient of friction between the road pavement and the tres = 0.18, ® Elevation of highest point of curve: © Determine the stopping sight distance. @ Determine the length of curve. ® Determine the elevation of highest point on curve, Solution: © Stopping sight distance: g, = 205113192) = 0.05 +0034 §,=7852m. = tee72 (1667)? | H2£@-g) 5 1603] * Fo81(0.15 +008) au 5-829. . ue ants +0034) H=139 ® Length of curve: SS _ (534) (65.96) oy gen = = < Elev. of highest point PL = 42:30 12,56(0.034) -0.91 = 40.963 m.4 istance for a Pes ad ere (ella i-th aw sical ave eee provide a stopping sight which 190 m. Height driver’s eye stance pavement is 1.07 m and the the the object ahead is 0.15 m. aight ot ne minimum length of a crest te for a design speed of mecal CONE {go Krk. ean gL 200 (yh + h,) L228- A AQ," % a=005-(-1) 2 200 (Vi.07 + Vos) L=2 (190) - ——>;——— L=1105m ok S>L Check for Appearance Criterion : Grade break = 1.5% < 2% UseL,,, =60 m. Rte DULL Lh Lt Riana A vertical parabolic curve has a sight distance of 130 m. The curve has tangent eaten Of +2.8% and -1.6%. If the height of driver's eye from the pavement Is 1.08 and the height of the Object is 0.50 m., xo ® Compute the max, ‘Speed of the car that Can pass thru this curve © Compute the length of the vertical Curve in meters for every 4 grade, ry 1% change in ® Compute the equivalent radius of the vertical curve, Solution: © Max. speed of the car Assume S>L A=g,-9, A=28-(-1.6) A=44% > 2% ao i +s) 44 L=121.38m. ok as assumed L=2v 121.38 =2V V= 60.69 kph Check : V>60, and A> 2% Lew L=2(130)- ® Length of the vertical curve in meters for every 1% change in grade L=KA 121.38 = K(4.4) K=27.59m @® Equivalent radius of the vertical curve R=100K R= 100(27.59) R= 2759 m.Passing Sight Distance for aac: (9) Vertical Curve 2.285 Problem Compute the Jength of vertical curve that will provide passing sight ince for a design speed of 100 kph at the intersection of + 1.40 % grade with a - 0.60 % grade. Solution: 2 swG v= 22 = 1667 ms ; se16e7 3) + te _ $= 83.32m, Compute the minimum length of vertical curve that will provide 190 m. stopping ‘sight distance for a design speed of 110 kph at the intersection of a + 3.5% grade and a-2.70% grade. Solution: Using appearance criterion. V> 60 kph A>2% UseL=2V L=2(110) L=220m. Use L = 220m. where V= 110 kph ION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING Petite leedt lig Tele (Soy nee hig br TTeS) ® for Sag Vertical Curve « DPWH requirements: Headlight height = 0.60 m A one-degree upward divergence of the light beam is used in computing the length of the ‘sag vertical curves. @ When SL L -2s-| +388] where L= length of sag curve = the distance between the vertical and point where the one degree upward ‘single of the light beam intersects the surface of the roadway or stopping sight distance A= algebraic difference in grades in (%) ® Comfort criterion av? 395 where: L= length of sag curve A= algebraic difference in grades in (%) V = max. velocity of vehicle passing thru the sag curve in kphimum na - 0.7% grade and ‘or a road with 110 kph The vertical curve must si spe headlight sight distance. ravi the mini one ort grade soli et as L? 790355 A=9,-% a=05-(-07) azt2 2 1.2 (220) += i990 +35 (220) L=653m But $>L_ not ok Ty S>L 120+35S (se 120 +3,5(220 1220). 20°85) ) L=-301.7m Since L <0, no vertical curve is needed to Provide stopping sight distance. © Comfort criterion Av? Ls Ae y= 12(110)" 35 | L=3676m, | i RAFFIC ENGINEERING — Eon Note: For smail total grade change can be ‘Sharp to cause discomfort without violating sight distance standards. AASHTO ‘Suggest @ comfort standards which is AV? qual fo L=—— * 395 where: Note: Appearance criterion ® When V = 110 kph > 60 kph Grade break = 1.2% < 2% Use Lain = 60 m, ® When V< 60 kph Grade breaks < 2% Use Lmin = 60 m. ® When V= 100 kph > 60 kph Grade brakes > 2% Use L = 2V Therefore, use L = 60 m. 2.288 Problem Compute the minimum length of vertical Sag Curve that will provide 130 m. stopping sight distance for a design speed of 80 kph at the intersection of a -2.30% and a +4.8% grade. Solution: ‘Assume S60kph Grades brakes 7.1 > 2% Use L = 2V L=2(80) L= 160m, Check for comfort criterion: AV? l= 7.480)? 105 L=11504m Use L = 115.04 m. stance for Compute the minimum length of vertical curve that will provide 190 m. stopping sight distance for a design speed of 100 kph at the intersection of a - 2.6% grade and a+ 2.40% grade. Solution: V = 100 kph > 60 kph A=9,-9, A=26 -(-24) A=5 Using appearance criterion V>60 kph A>2% Therefore L=2V L=2(100) = 200m. “$90 +35 (190) L=229.94 m. ok as assumed Use L = 126.58 m. Horizontal Curves @ When SL e L+2d=s S-L detk 2 (AC)? = (AD)? + m2 (AD)? = (AO)? (R= My? (AO)? = (AE)? +R (AD)? = (AB)? + R2-(R-My? * Solution: (AD? =d+R2- Ree RM Me (AD)? = 2 +2 RM ye (AC)? = (AD)? + ye (AC)P= 2+ 2 RM M24 Me (Ac =d2+2RM woy?=(S)*s oR 8 betac=5 2 -Ly2 £ = sony St=82-281+12+8RM 8RM= 281-12 wht — 2.290 CE Board May 2015 A highway curve has a radius of 80 m and a length of 90 m. tf the required sight distance is 60 m, how far off the center of the road could you allow the bushes to grow?Reikod arn aan a aac 2.291 Problem The clearance to an obstruction is 40 m. and the desirable sight distance when rounding a horizontal curve is 600 m. Determine the minimum radius of horizontal curve if the length of curve is 550 m. long. Solution: —$=600 m— ~ —-L=550 m— 550(2(600) - 550] 7 (40) R=1117.19m. ee ee 2.292 Problem A building is located 5.8 m. from the centerline of the inside lane of a curve section of highway with 120 m. radius. The road is level. Perception-reaction time is 25 sec. and coefficient of friction is 0.35. Determine the appropriate speed limit in kph considering the stopping sight distance. NGINEERING s ~ (120) $=74.62m etches between stations way mas 40 with a uniform ground wig! i on ae side slope of 2: 1 and width seavay is 12m. of stato om 5+ 7 5+ 140 206.75 m? rvature correction between comput es ifthe road Is on a 5 degree the “i ‘which turns to the right of the cross cy etegons incu asy=126- [S8) ALA] As, = 48 m2 5N & TRAFFIC ENGIN att Pr) &1=4(0)) 4 01=3 (28) 61=- 12 (neg. towards the center of curve) As, = 206,75- [S45 , 2118) ] cy Asp = TA.75 2 = 3 Dy I wis .82= 3 (45) €2 =~ 15. (neg. towards the center of curve) _ 1145.916 a) 145.916 s R R = 229m. L Vo= DR (Ast @1 + AS2 €2) Vez Fem ((48)(- 12) + 74.75 (- 15)] V-= = 370.58 m>RANSPORTATION & TRAFF! 1c ENGINEERING ished Grade of Roadway 07 CE Board May 2008 The center height of the road at sta. 7 + 110 is 2m. fill while at sta. 7 + 160 it is 1.2 m. cut. From sta, 7 + 110 to the other station the ground makes a uniform slope of 4.8%. © Compute the slope of the new road. @ Find the distance in meters from ‘station extended. © Compute the stationing of the point where the fill is extended. 7 + 110 in which the fill is ® Slope of the new road: Slope = 8 = 0.016 ® Distance in which the fill is extended: 0.048x = 1.2 + 0.016(60 -x) 0.064x = 2 x= 31.25 @ Stationing of the point where the fill is extended: Sta. = (7 + 110) + (31.25) Sta. = 71+ 141.25 2.308 CE Board Nov. 2015 From station A with center height of 1.4 m, in fill, the ground makes @ uniform slope of 5% to station B whose center height is 25 m. in cut. Assuming both sections to be level sections having a width of roadway of 44m. and side slope of 2:1 for both cut and fill, compute the cross-sectional area of cut 48 m. from sta. A. Distance from sta. A to sta. Bis 60 m. Solution: Fined renee Ax 22180 195 A= 35.123 sq.m.tation 0 + 040, with center height of fe fill, the ground line makes a 4 rm slope of 5% to station 0 + 100, une center height Is 280 m, cut. sume both sections to be level sections with side slopes of 2: 1 for fill and 1.5; 1 forcut. . © Find the grade of the finished road 8, o Find the area at each station. @ By end area method, find the amount of cut and fill. @ Between these two stations, is it borrow or waste? Roadway for fill s 9.00 m. and for cut it is 10.00 m. Solution: © Slope of roadway: {ished rs Slope of roadway = - 2% (downward) @ Area at each station: 2s 90-2844 ION & TRAFFIC ENGINEERING = {14.60 8 1.40) A= 16.52 sq.m. (fi) A= 0+ 1840) 28) A= 39.76 sq.m. (cut) Volumes of cut and fi: 1.40 - 0.02 x= 0.05 x 0.07 x= 1.40 x=20 60-x=40 L Vol. of fil= 5 (Ay + Az) Vol. offit= 2 (1652 +0) Vol, of fil= 165.20 cum. L Vol. of cut = 5 (Ay + A) Vol. ofeut= $2 (30.76 +0) Vol. of cut = 795.20 cu.m.® Since the volume of cut is excessive than the volume of fil, it is then necessary to throw the excess volume of cut as waste by an amount equal to 795.20 - 165.20 = 63.00 cu.m. 2.310 Problem The ground makes a uniform slope of 5.2% from STA 8 + 890 to Station B. At STA 8 + 890, the center height of the roadway is 4.13 m fill. At the other station, the center height is 7.57 m cut. If the finish road has a uniform grade of - 2.6%, what is the stationing of B? Solution: 0,052L = 7.57 + (4.13 - 0.026L) 0.078L = 7.57 + 4.13 L=150 Formula: |= Haz * Hew - 4.13 +757 0062 - (0.028) L=180 Sta. of B= 8+ 890+ 150 Sia. of B= 9+ 040 2.311 CE Board May 2015 The grading works of a proposed National road shows the following data. FHD = 50 m. LEH = 450 m. Cost of haul = P0.25 per meter station Compute the cost of borrow. Solution: cc =—2- +FHD LEH C s C,(20) = — +50 480-5 C, = P5.00 2.312 Problem The cross-sectional area of station 2 + 210 is 40 m? in fill and at station 2 + 810 is 60 m? in cut. The free haul distance is 100 m. The balancing point is at station 2 + 510, The ground surface is sloping upward from station 2 + 210 to station 2 + 510 and also uniformly upward from station 2 + 510 to station 2 + 810. Determine the stationing {along fill) of the limits of free haul. Solution: Fup=100 Faosiaoning of limits of free haul along the fil = (2+ 510) ~ 55.05, 22445495 The grading works of the portion of the proposed expansion- of the North expressway shows the following notes. Free haul distance = 50 m. Limit of economical haul = 450 m. Limits of free haul distance is from sta. 1+ 272 to 1+ 322, Limits of economical haul is from Sta. 1 +052 and 1 + 502 Assume the ground Uniformly from one Seta ® Determine the overhaul volume, ® Determine the Volume of borrow, ® Determine the Volume of waste, Solution: ® Overhaul volume: Overhaul volume = 2545+ 40.60 Overhaul volume = 3962.25 @ Volume of waste = 42.18+ 188 Volume of waste = 4908.82 cu.m. @ Volume of borow = 8240152 Volume of borrow = 1898 cu.m.270 @®TRANSPOR From the mass diagram shown of an earthworks, the following data were computed as follows: Free haul distance = 60 m. Cost of borrow = P10/m? Overhaul = P5.00 per meter station Compute the cost of overhaul. Overhaul vol. = 2000(78 - 60) + 1000(80 - 60) +1000(66 - 60) + 2000(68 - 60) Overhaul vol = 78000 om? Cost of vena = RS) = P19500 2.315 Problem The following are the data on a simple summit mass diagram. STA MASS ORDINATE (m*) 0+000 -80 0+ 500 +130 Initial point of limit of freehaul distance = +600 Initial limit of economic haul = +200 Freehaul distance = 60 m. Limit of economical distance = 400 m. Cost of haul = P120 per cu.m per meter station. AFFIC ENGINEERIn, Determine the volume of waste in @ Determine the volume of borrow, m @ Determine the overhaul volume ih m cu.m. @ Determine the length of overhay tt total cost of hauling Is P192,009," % Solution: @ Volume of waste: Volume of waste = 200 + 80 Volume of waste = 280 m? ® Volume of borrow: Volume of borrow = 200 + 130 Volume of borrow = 330 m? ® Overhaul volume: Overhaul volume = 600 - 200 Overhaul volume = 400 m? ® Length of overhaul: 192,000 = 120(400) x 20 x= 80m.7316 summit mass diagram from a single (0 + 100 to 0 + 800 of a proposed stipsion of Santander Highway. Has the rowing technical data. yass ordinate of the initlal limit of economical distance = +600 m?> Free haul distance = 50m. Limit of economical haul = 450 m. Cost of borrow = P500 per cu.m. Mass ordinate of station 0 + 100 = - 80 m? Mass ordinate of station 0 + 800 = - 130 m @ Compute the overhaul volume in cu.m. @ Compute the length of overhaul in meters if the total cost of hauling is 105,750.00 @® Compute the total cost of borrow. Solution: . © Overhaul volume: Overhaul volume = 600 - 200 Overhaul volume = 400 m? le ara alles ENGINEERING hemmed =2A! ® Length of overhaul: CC teH=- +FHD 450 = 220.20) , 55 Cy Ch = P25 per cu.m./ meter station Total cost of haul = P105750.00 105750 = 3 609 L=211.50m. ® Total cost of borrow: Vol. of borrow = 200 + 130 ~ Vol. of borrow = 330 m? Cost of borrow = 330 (500) Cost of borrow = P165,0001. Natural Harbors xising ; ost i Coustat + oN a ee Harbor Per Port , Faxiiies Cae A & Harbor font Pebdies The basic criteria to be considered in developing a proposition as to the roles of a country’s ports may b e classified into the following four groups: ® The national and regional development Policies of the country @ The transportation infrastructure of the hinterland and its prospects ® Existing port capacity and potential for development ® Cargo forecasts for each port Oa eae las) (as of 2013) Rank Port Country 1 Shanghai China 2 Singapore Singapore 3 Shenzhen China 4 Hong Kong Hong Kong South 5 Busan Kowa Ningbo- 6 Zhoushan China 7 Qingdao China 8 Guangzhou China ; United Arab 9 Dubai Emirates 10 Tianjin ChinaProblem 3.4 Generally the width of the harbor entrance Harbors can be broadly classified as: should be___ 1. Natural harbors I. Semi-natural harbors a) 30m Artificial harbors ES p) between 0.7 - 1.0 times thy IV. Commercial harbors length of the design ship ©) between 2 - 6 times the beam of 5 a) |, andillonly the design ship b) |, liland IV only 50 ©) I liland IV only 3 0m 4) Allofthe above 3.5 Problem 3.2 Problem A port is a harbor in which terminal facilities are provided. The different types of ports are as follows: 1. Ocean port Inland port ML Entry port IV. Free port |, land til only | b) | lland IV only | c) Il, Mand IV only 5 q Allof the above a) 3. Probi | The harbor entrance should, if possible, be | located onthe ___ of the harbor. | | a) windward end | b) outer end | So) leeside 4) inner end | The maximum current velocity through the harbor entrance should not exceed __ 2.5 m/s or 4 knots 1.5 m/s or 3 knots 3 mis or 5 knots 1 mis or 1.5 knots a) oF py ° a) 3.6 Problem The stopping distance of a ship will depend on factors such as ship speed, the displacement and shape of the hull, and horsepower ratio. The stopping distance of a loaded ship 100m 150m 10 to 12 times the ship's length 7 to 8 times the ship's length a) 6) °) ur gypoe 3.7 Problem than one ship has to be whe edted along the berth, a en nce length of ___ should be owed between the adjacent ships. pr a) 20m b) 40m c) 60m sed) 04 times the length of the largest ship _ 3.8 Problem Fora single-berth pier, the clear water area between two piers should be _ to allow for tugboat assistance. 5 a) 2 times the beam of the largest ship plus 30 m. b) 2 times the beam of the largest ship plus 50 m. ) 200m 4) 2times the length of the ship plus 30m. 3.9 Problem For harbor basins, the width required to permit a ship to swing freely into a berth is for berths at 45°. *F a) 1.5times the length of the ship ) times the length ofthe ship ©) - 8 times the beam of the ship plus 30m, 4) 6 times the beam of the ship plus i 180 m. ‘| 3.12 roblem RTA Goin EE whey aS 3.10 Problem For harbor basins, the width required to Permit a ship to swing freely into a berth is —— for berths at 90°, a) 1.5 times the length of the ship SS b) 2times the length of the ship ©) 8 times the beam of the ship plus 30m. d) 6 times the beam of the ship plus 180m. The safety distance between two moored tankers or moored tanker and a passing Ship, will depend upon the overall layout of the harbor, the number of tugboats assisting in the berthing or unberthing ‘operation, the environmental conditions ‘and the population of in the area. The safety distance between a moored oil tanker and a passing ship shall be: a) from 30 - 50 m. TF b) trom 50-150 m. ©) from 150-200 m. 4) from 50~ 100m . The size of water area for anchorages will therefore primarily depend on the number, type and size of ships, which require protection and the type of mooring system available. ‘The water depth at an anchoring area should preferably not exceed approximately ___ due to the length of the anchor chain of the ship. The bottom condition must not be too hard, otherwise the anchor will be dragged along the bottom and not dig into the sea bottom: a) 30-50m —c) 25-60 Sb) 50-60m, —d)-_«60-80m.Waves, Wind, and Tides 3.13 Problem Waves continue to grow after they reach a velocity equal to __ but at a decreasing rate. Energy losses from friction, transfer of energy into currents and the development of white caps means the wave will not grow until the wave speed reaches the wind speed. The wind speed is 146 kph. a) 36.5 c) 326 SS b) 48.67 d) 46.87 3.14 Problem The ratio of the wave length to its height for ocean waves is between: a) Qand 15 US pb) 17 and33 co) 12and 18 dé) 20and34 3.15 Problem A very long standing wave on a large but limited body of water generally occurring when a storm dies down after producing a wind tide is called: ET a) Seiche b) Shoal 3.16 Problem Waves generated by storms, which occur outside area of observation. Ebb d) Skewd 5 a) Swells ©) Skewd b) Shoal d) Ebb An instrument use to measure the intensity of wind. a) Buchanan's scale b) — Fiboracci scale 5S ¢) Beuforts scale d) Antwerp scale ————— 3.18 Problem ‘A wave generated in deep water, when reaching shoaling waters, changes not only in its height but also in its length but the period will. . 5 a) remain constant b) increase c) decrease d) None of the above 3.19 CE Board Nov. 2016 ‘An open water of navigable depth is called: a) Shoal b) ° Skewd c) — Significant depth cS qd) Fairway 3.20 Problem Waves are formed by the frictional drag of wind across the water surface. This is a process of transferring energy from wind to water. Water particles are moved from their position by the wind, and then returned to the original position by gravity, which is a restoring force. These waves are called: a) Deep water waves b) Significant waves ES c) Gravity waves d) — Equivalent depth water wavesé sure against a vertical wall due to Moss calle: a) Wave decay b) Dynamic pressure ) Rankines active pressure wg Clapotis os spange in the dissection of travel of the ae e with change in depth of water which - wave energy along the enon unevenly Is called: 5 a) wave refraction b) wave diffraction ) wave reflection d) wave frequency 3.23 Problem Waves generated by wind that are acting ‘on the sea surface bordering on the port site. 5 a) wind waves b) ocean waves ©) _ breaking waves d) depth water wave 13.24 Problem Wind generated waves which are created in the deep ocean at some distance from the port site and the wind that created them may be too distant to be felt in the port or may have stopped blowing or changed, its direction by the time the wave reach the 5S a) Swell waves b) Seiching waves ¢) Breaking waves d) Wakes ) Swell waves 5S b) Selching waves ) Breaking waves 4d) Wakes ee 3.26 Problem Waves created by large, sudden impacts, such as earthquakes, voleanoes or landslides that ends up in the ocean. a) Storm surge b) Swell waves 5 ¢) Tsunamis 8) Clapotis See 3.27 Problem Waves in which the ratio of water depth to the wave length is greater than 0.5. a) Intermediate water waves b) Breaking waves ) —Shallow-water waves "3 qd) Deep water waves 3.28 Problem Waves in which the ratio of water depth to the wave length is less than 0.50 but greater than 0.40. 5S a) Intermediate water waves b) Breaking waves ©) Shallow-water waves d) Deep water wavesTS AND HARBOR 3.29 Problem Waves in which the ratio of water depth to the wave length is equal to or less than 0.40. a) Intermediate water waves b) Breaking waves Shallow-water waves d) Significant waves 3.30 Problem ‘Waves which fall forward since the forward velocity of the creast particles exceeds the velocity of propagation of the wave itself. In deep water, this normally occurs when ‘the wave length L is less than 7 times the wave height (L <7 H) and in shallow water when the depth d is approximately equal to 1.25 H (where H is the wave height). a) Intermediate water waves EF b) Breaking waves c) _Shallow-water waves 4) Significant waves 3.31 Problem The distance that the wind blows over the sea in generating the waves is known as: a) _clapotis ©) seiche b) wakes = ©") fetch The ratio of the wave height to its wave length is called: a) wave period b) wave propagation c) slope © q) steepness 3.33 Problem The arithmetical mean value of the highest, ‘one-third of the waves for a stated interval, a) Average wave height b) Critical wave height 5X ¢) Significant wave height d) Intermediate wave height 3.34 Problem An abnormal rise of the sea level that occurs when a typhoon passes by. This rise above normal level on this open coast is due to atmospheric pressure reduction as well as due to wind stress. a) Hurricane b) Tsunamis 5S ¢) Storm surge d) Tornado 3.35 Problem Waves with an extremely long period that mainly occur when there is a sudden large scale sea floor movements associated severe, shallow focus earthquake. a) — Significant waves © b) Tsunamis c) Storm surge d) Deep water waves 3.36 Problem The falling tide is known as: tS a) Ebb tide b) Flood tide c) _Neap tide d) Allofthe above= tension of the generating pets nation ofthe wind is called: in 91 trough 3 shoal seiche 538 Problem ference in height between the mean et high water and the mean lower low ver is called: Diurnal range * ‘ Mean sea level c) Mean range d) Residual water level _— 3.39 Problem The highest tides which occur at intervals” ofhalfa lunar month is called: 1 2) Spring tides b) Semi-tunar tides ©) Semi-diurnal tides d) Ebb tides 3.40 Probiem The datum line for design of port facilities in accordance with charts, which is being used by the Phil. Ports Authority (PPA). OF a) MLLW ce) RWL b) LL d) HWL The type of tid rvs mens en andthe ide gerne 2 8h fal ining and sun are additive, 2% ©f the moon "F a) Spring tides >) Lunar tides ©) Diumal ides 4) Ebb tides TT The PPA (Phil. Ports Author water level that guarantees ae for safety of the ships berthing on a Certain Ports and harbor, below the mean lower low water should be equal fo: a) 0.15 m100.30m b) 0.42mt0040m "Fo 0.15-0.40m 4) 0.12-050m ee 3.43 Problem ‘When the lines Connecting the earth with the sun and the moon form a right angle, that is the moon is in her quarters, then the actions of the moon and sun are Subtractive, and the lowest tides of the month occur, this is called: 5S a) Neap tide b) Lunar tide c) _Diumal tide d) Ebbtide3.44 Problem Owing to retardation of the tidal wave in the ocean by frictional force, th tevolves daily around its axis and as the tide tends to follow the direction of the moon, the highest tide for each location is not coincident with conjunction and opposition but occurs at some constant time after new and full moon. This interval which may amount to as much as two and ‘a half days is known as: a) Diumaltide b) Lunar tide FF oy Age ofthe tide 4) Semi-diumal tide 3.45 Problem Generally, the average interval between ‘successive high tides, which is half the time between successive passages of the moon across a given meridian is: a) 12h. and 45 min, b) this. and 45 min. ) t2hrs. 5S) 12hvs. and 25min, 3.46 Problem In many parts ofthe world, the high waters reach their greatest height and the low waters at the least height, soon after the time of full and new moon. These tides are called: Spring fides b) Flood tides ¢) Neap tides @) Ebbtides 3.47 Problem The difference in height betwoen ig, water and low water at a tidal station jg called: a) diumal range SF b) tidal range ) mean range d) extreme range 3.48 Problem When the daily high waters are usually at their least height and the daly low watery their greatest height soon after the moon ig in quandrature. This tides are called: 5 a) Neap tides b) Spring tides ©) Flood tides 4) Ebbtides 3.49 Problem * Waves formed! by moving ship or boats are called: 1S a) wakes b) swell ©) breaking waves 4) seiching 3.50 ~ Problem Waves formed by earthquake disturbances, @) Storm suge b) Breaking waves 1 ¢) Tsunamis d) Wakesers aaaenas o formed by gravitational attraction of a) seiching c) wakes by swell "Sd tides 5.52 Problem the spread of energy along a wave crest is called: . a) refraction b) reflection c) _ shoaling s@ d) diffraction _—_— 3.53 Problem ‘The bending of waves as they slow down, 6 a) refraction b) reflection ¢) _ shoaling 4) diffraction Waves under the influence of the winds that generated them are called: a) wakes ©) swell = b) sea 4) seiching 3.55 Problem Waves that have propagated beyond the initial winds that generated them are called: a) wakes = UP ¢) swell b) shoal 4) seiche The distance th; water Is calleg at a wind blows across the a) off-shore >) shoal ©) on-shore "Fy fetch The time that a wind blows acros: water is called: the a) diffraction b) refraction ©) period duration ee The average of the highest one-third of the waves are called: a) Average wave height b) Critical wave height © ¢) Significant wave height 4) Intermediate wave height es The highest tide which occurs at intervals of half a lunar month when the sun, moon and earth fall in line. Spring tides ' b) Neap tides ©) Flood tides 4) Ebb tides3.60 Problem The lowest tide of the month when the lines connecting the earth with the sun and the moon form a right triangle, that is when the moon is in its quarters are called: 5 a) Neap tides b) Spring tides. c) Diumal tides d) Semi-diumal tides Fe 3.61 Problem Tides that occur twice its lunar day is called: a) Neap tides b) Ebb tides ©) Diumal tides EF qj Semi-diurnal tides oe High crested waves caused by the rush of flood tide up a river or by meeting of tides are called: * a) Storm surge 5S pb) Tidal bores oc) Swells d) Shoal a Prevailing winds which are seasona blowing in one direction over part of the + and in the opposite direction the remainder of the year. © a) Monsoon b) Winds in inter-tropical zone o) Windward side d) Leeward side ———— 3.65 Problem The side of a structure facing the direction from which the wind comes. a) Forward side b) Backward side 1 ¢) Windward side d) Leeward side _ 3.66 Problem The opposite side of a structure facing the direction from which the wind comes. a) Forward side b) Backward side c) Windward side « qd) Leeward side 3.67 Problem 3.63 Problem The circulation of masses of air more or less parallel to the earth's surface. a) Monsoon 5 6) Wind c) Wind pressure d) Breeze The graphical representation of the direction, frequency and intensity of winds at a particular location over a period of time is known as: a) Tropical wind gauge b) Wind intensity gauge °F ¢) Wind rose d) Wind index5.68 Problem use to measure the intensity and Ape of winds, Scale a Beaufort's a Antwerp Scale c) Richter Scale 4) Buchanan's Scale oo 3.69 Problem ‘The periodic rise and fall of the ocean ters produced by the attraction of the ‘toon and Sun. a) Ebb c) Wake b) Wave © ad) Tides a — The highest tides in the world where a rise of 100 ft has been recorded occur in ®F a) Bay of Funday ) Miami, Florida ©) San Francisco Bay 4) Venice, ttaly The average of the high water over a 19. year period is known as: ) Mean higher water b) Higher high water c) Highest high water SS q) Mean high water [ 3.70 Problem Tides which occurs only one high tide a day is called: a) _Neap tides b) Spring tides 6 ) Diurnal tides d) _Semi-diurnal tides 3.71 Problern if one of the two daily tide is incomplete, that Is it does not reach the height of the previous tide, then the tides are referred to as: a) Neap tides 5® b) Mixed diurnal tides ©) Diumal tides 4) Semi-diumal tides 3.74 | Problem The average height of the higher high waters over a 19-year period, Mean higher high water b) Higher high water ¢) Highest high water d) ‘Mean high water 3.75 Problem Average of the low water over a 19-year Period is called: a) Lowest low water b) Lower low water © c) Mean low water d) Mean lower low water3.76 Problem The higher of the two high waters of any diurnal tide day. a) Mean higher high water © p) Higher high water c) Highest high water d) Mean high water _ The lower of the two low waters of any diurnal tide day. a) Lowest low water TS b) Lower low water c) Mean low water d) Mean lower low water 3.78 Problem The average height of the lower low waters over a 19-year period. a) Lowest low water b) Lower low water c) Mean low water 1 q) Mean lower low water lini AND HARBOR 3.80 Problem ‘The lowest height of water of spring tides, ES a) Lowest low water b) Lower low water c) Mean low water d) Mean lower low water ee 3.81 Problem The height of the mean high water above mean low water. a) Mean higher high water b) Higher high water 5S ¢) Meanrange d) Mean high water 3.82 Problem The mean of the height of mean high water above the mean low water is referred to as: 3 a) Mean sealevel b) Mean lower low water c) Mean range d) Mean high water 3.79 Problem : The highest height of water of spring tides. a) Mean higher high water b) Higher high water SF ¢) Highest high water d) Mean high water 3.83 Problem | The difference in height between the mean higher high water and the mean lower low | water. | a) Mean sea level b) Mean lower low water c) Mean range 5S qd) Diurnal rangence at certain locations are eiated tangle or soar typeof wav nih py the rush of flood tide upsin the es py the ing of tides as in the meetit ‘where the highest tide of cof of Furie Inthe word Is refered 00 ost 2) Shallow water wave v)Deepwalt Wave ¢) _Soltary eo Tidal bore 3.85 CE Board May 2016 ata point where the water depth is Avato the wavelength of greater to eavioressed in terms of the parameters of nificant wave. Deep water wave * 3 Equivalent depth water wave height Highest wave 4) Significant wave _ 3.86 Probiem ‘Anypothetical wave having a wave height and period equal respectively to average values of the wave height and period of the largest 1/3 of all waves in the train as counted in the order of greater wave a) Deep water wave b) Equivalent depth water wave height ©) Highest wave 5 q Significant wave 3.87 Problem ‘A maximum wave height and wave period of the maximum wave height in wave train. a) Deep water wave b) Equivalent depth water wave height 5 o) Highest wave d) Significant wave 3.88 Problem Waves which occur in water having a depth less than one half of the wave length and the influence of the bottom changes the form or orbital motion from circular to elliptical or near-elliptical. © a) Shallow water wave ») Deep water wave ¢) Significant wave d) Highest wave 3.89 Problem 4 Waves break under the following conditions: |. When the forward velocity of the crest particles exceeds the velocity of the propagation of the wave itself I When the wave height exceeds (1/7) of the wave length in deep water lll When the wave reaches shallow water where the depth is equal to about one and one quarter of its height. a) only b) only ©) Monty SF d Allofthe above3.90 Problem The water level that guarantees about 9gy, betwee ts tn an n two consecutive cree of tide Is safe to ships seems to be suitable ‘sealeg: from the expression of the technica) i resolution of the International Water Waye a) _ wave pfad Congress. Such water level, which jg mb) eve eae 0.15 m. ~ 0.4 m. below MLLW should be 7 tomy aude used for design of ports. ee © a) Design Low Tide (DLT) 3.91 Problem b) Low Water Level (LWL) c) Residual Water Level (RWL) The height between the trough and the d) High Water Level (HWL) crest of a wave is called: ee. a) period —— [395 Problem 5 ¢) amplitude 3.95 Problem d) Ah fequeney Residual water level (RWL) for gravity type is expressed as: 3.92 Problem 6S a) 1/3 (HWL-LWL)+LWL The wave form travels over the water b) 213 (HWL-LWL) + LWL surface and the time for two consecutive co) 1/3 (HWL-LWL) crests to pass a point is called: 4) 28(HWL-LWL) 5S a) wave period b) oscillation c) amplitude d) frequency 3.96 Problem . 3.93 Problem The speed of the wave form which travels over the water surface for a certain wave period. type is expressed as: a) 1/3 (HWL-LWL) +LWL CS p) 2/3 (HWL—-LWL) +LWL oc} 1/3 (HWL-LWL) a) Steepness of wave 4) 213 (HWL-LWL) °F bh) Velocity of wave propagation ©) Instantaneous velocity d) Average velocity of wave | | | | | | | Residual water level (RWL) for shoot pile | | | | |i 07 Problem we and wave speeds are shape of the displacement of water gover and the functions of the following a) fandl! only by bland Il only ) Mand IV only 4) Ailofthe above Oe qhe elevation of the crest above the through of the wave. a) Wave length b) Wave shoals c) Wave period 1 d) Wave height = 3.99 Problem The interval of time for two wave crests to pass the same position in space. a) 2seconds b) 3seconds " ©) period d) frequency 3.100 Problem Large waves (long period) can be Generated only when the fetch (distance ver which the wind blows) is large. Waves: Gpitinue to grow after they reach a velocity — of the wind speed, but at a decreasing rate. a) 28 ) % Fy) 1 )-% aren eee 3.101 Problem The flow of energy along the wave crest in @ direction at right angles to the direction of wave travel is called: a) reflection ¢) refraction b) deflection 8 qd) diffraction 3.102 Problem A type of wave where the depth Is less than % of wave length but greater than 1/25 of the wave length. Transitional water wave b) Shallow water wave ©) High water wave 4) Deep water wave 3.103 Problem A type of wave where the depth is less than 1125 of wave length. a) Transitional water wave 5 b) Shallow water wave c) High water wave d) Deep water wave3.104 Problem The highest point of the wave is called. 5S a) wave crest b) wave trough ¢) wave height d) wave length ‘The lowest point of the wave. a) wave crest 53 b) wave trough ¢) wave height d) wave length 3.106 Problem The distance between the highest point and the lowest point of the wave. a) wave crest b) wave trough TS ¢) wave height d) wave length 3.107 Problem The vertical distance of the wave crest and the wave trough. a) wave crest b) wave trough SS c) wave height @) wave length eee eon) 3.108 Problem From the Sine wave curve shown, what to you call the value of “L"? LL wave rest Toave cre a) Period of wave b) Frequency of wave cc) Wave height ES g) Wave length 3.109 Problem From the Sine wave curve shown, what ig the value of h? wave crest | [rave crest Ih | Nae | a) Length of wave trough b) Still water depth © ¢) Amplitude d) Height of wave trough — 3.110 Problem From the Sine wave curve shown, what do you call the region x? Crest length region ) Trough length region ¢) Transition region d) Periodthe Sine wave curve shown, what do fe ithe region y? iti |wave crest crest | were level a) Crest length region @ b) Trough length region ) Transition region d) Period From the wave behavior, indicate what zone is covered by the distance x. ‘ocean bortom a) Deepwaterzone | b) Shallow zone ¢) Transition zone 5 @ Shoaling zone What zone is covered Mill water tevet by the distance 2 ‘2cean bottom a) Deep water ) Shallow zone Transition zone 4) Shoaling zone ee 3.114 Problem What zone is covered by the distance “27 sill water level ‘acean bottom a) _ Deep water zone © b) Shallow zone ¢) Transition zone @) —Shoaling zone ee 3.115 Problem The average height of the sea for all stages of the tide obtained from systematic observations of sea level at equal intervals over a long period of time along a given Coastline is called: SS a) Mean sea level b) Mean low water c) Mean lower low water d) | Mean ocean level3.116 Problem The process of widening, enlarging, cleaning, or deepening of channels in harbors, rivers and canals to maintain the idea depth of berthing areas due to fast siltation rate is known as: a) Disiltafion b) Meandering 5 ¢) Dredging d) Excavation The periodic rise and fall of sea level in response to the gravitational attraction of the sun and moon as modified by the earth's rotation. a) Rotational tide b) Storm surge ©) Gravitational tide EF @ Astronomical tide 3.118 Problem ‘A phenomenon involving abnormal oscillations of the water level with a period of approximately a few minutes to a few tens of minutes. It occurs when small fluctuations of the water level are generated by micro scale variations of the atmospheric pressure by an air front or a low pressure in the outer sea and the components of those oscillations whose period is the same as a natural period of the harbor are amplified through resonance. Seiche b) Storm surge ©) Tsunami 4) Astronomical tide es PORTS AND HAR 3.119 Problem The flow of seawater in the horizonta, direction that accompanies a tidal variay of sea level and is thus periodic, EF a) Seiche b) Storm surge ¢) Tsunami d) Tidal wave ee 3.120 Problem The time of rotation of the earth with respect to the moon and the planets, which is approximately 24 hours and 50 minutes, a) Highest astronomical tide b) Lowest astronomical tide 5 ¢) Astronomical tidal day d) Ebb tidal day 3.121 Problem The chart datum for harbor works is generally the: a) Lowest observed water level © b) Lowest astronomical tide ¢) Mean tidal-high water level d) Mean tidal-ow water level 3.122 Problem The rise of sea level due to the greenhouse effect between years 2000 and 2050 is assumed to be.about: 0.25 m to 0.30 m db) 60.12mto0.20m ) 0.06 mto0.2m d) 0.16 mto0.25m| nd fall of the water level due to no 8 in ‘the atmospheric pressure is am mately equal to: 0.9 cm rise or fall of the water a evel for 1m bar fall or rise in atmospheric pressure 0.30 cm rise or fall of the water level for 1 m. bar fall or rise in atmospheric pressure 0.25 cm rise or fall of the water level for 1 m. bar fall or rise in atmospheric pressure 4) 0.6m tise or fall of the water level for 1 m. bar fall or rise in atmospheric pressure 3.124 Problem o) ° Wind generated waves but are created in the deep ocean at some distance from the t site and the wind that created them may be too distance to be felt in the port nd may have changed its direction by the time the waves reach the port. a) Long waves b) Wind waves )_ Sieching Fd) Swell a 3.125 Problem Waves, which have a very long period, typically from 30 sec up to the tidal period of 12 hr and 24 min. and are mostly found in enclosed or semi-enclosed basins such as bays or port basins. a) Ocean waves 5 b) Seiching c) Swell waves d) Wind waves 3:126 Problem The reguia surface ot Tn Mle is and fal ofthe shores is called: 8, Observable along their 8) Wave "© b) Tide ©) Period of wave 4) Curent oe The average height of all low waters at any place over a sufficiently extended period time is called: , “4 * a) Spring range b) —Diumal range ©) Extreme range °F @ Mean low water re 3.128 Problem The tidal current setting into the and estuaries along the coast is cadet a) Ebb current ») Lunitidal current 5S ¢) Flood current 4d) Slack water current on a ‘The return current toward the sea is called: a) Ebb current b) Lunitidal current ©) Flood current d) Slack water current3.130 Problem The period during which the current is Negligible while it is changing directions is called ___. It is the period during which the current is less than 1/10 of a knot or less than 0.169 fps. a) Tum of the current b) Spring water ©) Diurnal time EF dq) Slack water ‘The average time interval, in solar hours and minutes from a lunar transit to the next ‘succeeding high water at a given place as determined by an extended set of observations is called: EF a) High’ water Junitidal intorval of the place b) Upper meridian transit ©) Higher high water interval d) Higher water slack 32 Problem The maximum height reached by each rising tide is called: a) Trough b) Ebb © ¢) High water d) Crest a) Trough Low water co) Neap d) Ebb ss 3.134 Problem The straightline stretch of open water available for wave growth without the interruption of land is called: ES a) Fetch b) Wave length c) Neap d) Ebb — 3.135 Problem The interval of time between successive crests of the water waves passing a stationary point of reference is called: a) Amplitude b) — High-water lunitidal interval © ¢) Wave period d) — Lunitidal periodoie Pela a ecm arene Waves:d L/2. A. Wave length of deep water waves: -( t -( an L=1.56T? where: L = wave length in meters ‘= wave period (time for wave to travel a distance L) 1g = acceleration of gravity (9.81 m/s?) Wave velocity of deep water B. waves in terms of wave length i a peat 9 vs 1.2495 vi where: 9 = acceleration of gravity (9.81 mvs?) C. In deep water wave breaks normally will occur when the wave height exceeds one- seventh of the wave ‘length. When the wave reaches the shallow water where the depth is equal to 1.25 of its height, the waves will usually break. et 7 d=1.25H L= wave length in meters d= depth of waterlocity for deep water vel rerms of period “T” fave o vives I t gece anv ms v2156T whee velocy (ms) 2 wave velocly a ve period in sec. — n Yolanda hits the country ro we ‘storm surge in Tacloban wit! by wave period at a point having a city. Ve 36 m. in the ocean Is 6.4 sec. do ge te height of the wave ifithas a om Golpress of 44 seh een water waves: > SP =s195 (deep -water wave) = Seopness 163900014) H=895m Problem Tropical cyclone “Inting" will hit the Country with an estimated forecast velocity Of propagation of wave equal to 80 kph. Determine the approximate length between crest of the wave in meters, ‘Solution: v= 4240v0 8 ve 36 V=22ms 221.200 L = 316.50m.3.143 Problem The velocity of propagation of wave during the typhoon Ondoy is equal to 120 kph at a certain point in the Pacific Ocei Determine the approximate depth of the ‘ocean at that particular point. ‘Solution: 120 = 14 23333 ms v 36 33,33 | + ve 1.249 VE 33.33 = 1.249 VE L=712.11mm at 2 mn 2 The path of the typhoon “Dindo” passes thru Batanes Island at a certain location whose depth of water above the bottom of the sea equal to 150 m, Determine the approximate velocity of wave propagation in kph. v=1.249 VE v=1.249 300 V=21.63 ms V=21.63(36) V=7788 kph TC alsa Pacific Ocean, near ‘Surigao City, the ieee ot water is 0.43 km.. What Is the Sporoximate vale of the wave seed ofa wrami, which will cause & Wave length (between the crest of wave) equal to 800 m? Solution: L=800m d=430m v=4.249 VL v= 1.249 600 v=3632mis v=35.32(3.6) v= 127.2 kph _ 3.146 Problem A tsunami also called seismic sea wave of tidal wave is a catastrophic ocean wave, usually caused by a submarine earthquake ‘occurring less than 50 km beneath the sea floor, with a magnitude greater than 6.5 on the Richter scale. Under water or coastal landslides or volcanic eruptions also may cause a tsunami. The term tidal wave is more frequently used for such a wave, but it is a misnomer, for the wave has no connection with the tides. If the depth of water at a certain point in the ocean is 1200 m, determine the velocity of the wave propagation in kph.1 typhoon ponies with an estimated wind speed of oo This causes a storm surge in 410 FOP Cy wth a period of 7.47 sec. ina ing a depth of 9 m. Compute the i! past tavine wave fit has a steepness of piaHint L * 4.567 —_— 0 21567 petse(7any y26706m Heosd t 14=67.05(0-14) H=1219m. _ During the Typhoon Katrina, the wave length which is caused by the strong winds is equal to 20 m. long at a point where the depth of water Is 4m. Determine the wave period in sec. for a shallow water wave. ack 2 2 4c. 7 210 t=( Fann (2) m L 981T? m= 28h ( 2nld an inn (220) 20= 1.56 "(0.85013) T= 3.88 sec, ae 3.149 Problem During the typhoon Neneng, the length of dap water waves 96 m: cessed by oreog winds near Batayan Island. Compute the velocity of wave in kph. Solution: 2 vet Qn L=1567? 96 = 1.567" T =7.84 sec. V=12.24 ms V=12.24(36) V= 44.06 kph3.150 Problem PAG-ASA issued a warning on the western ‘seaboard. The forecast predicts waves having a wave length of 280 m. at a point hear the Scarborough Shoal in the West Philippine Sea having a depth of 150 m. Determine the wave period that causes this wave length. Solution: L d2- 2 10> 20 = 149 Ls 28 ye 9 v= 1.2495 VE v= 1.2495 [280 V=20.91 ms t22hy 9 V=156T 20.91 = 1.56T T= 13.40 sec. 3.151 Problem The velocity of propagation of a deep water wave caused by Typhoon “Senyang” is equal to 40 mph at a certain point in the ocean. Estimate the depth of still water level at this point in fathoms. Solution: 9 vy = 40(6280) 3600 V = 58.67 fps _ 2n(58.67)? 32.2 L=671.67f. L d= 2 Nir a " g nv} g a n S & gz = : d= 55.97 fathoms Note: | 1 fathom = 6 ft. 3.152 Problem Tropical cyclone “Inting” hit the coy with an estimated forecast of wave mY of 120 kph. The cyclone causes surge with a frequency of 0.199 hi Compute the length between the cre the deep water wave. " Solution: « ‘ gt i Qn L=1.56T? f = frequency L= 1569.17)? = 131.18 m.length of a deep water wave is wane 60 m. long. Compute the wave equal that causes this wave In kph. yelocity solution: 21567 160 21,56 T? 210.13 see. yet56T ye 1.56(10-13) ye 156ms y= 56:69 KPA ooo ocity of 4.2 mis causes a deep Tre oration in a period of 6.67 mpute the depth of water. se. 00 42 015= L=28m. get 3 (condtion for deep - water wave) d=14m. Bianca Eee Wave Height and a ETL CEN OR tits A hypothetical wave having a wave height and period equal respectively to average values of the wave height and period of the largest 173 of all waves in the train as counted in the order of greater wave height is called Significant Wave Height. Hmax = 1.87 Hy where: Hmex = max. wave height Hs significant wave height 3.155 Problem Compute the maximum wave height if it has a significant wave height of 3.4 m. high. Solution: Hinax = 1.87 He Hac = 1.87(3.4) Hex = 6.36 m. Buu) i. Small arlile) Significant Wave Height Hm = 0.6 Hs where: Hn = arithmetical mean value of all recorded wave heights during a period of observation Hs = significant wave heightWhat is the arithmetical mean value of al recorded wave height during a period of ‘observation if R has a significant wave height of 4.24 m. Solution: Hn = 0.6 He Ha = 0.6(4.24) Hn = 2.541. a Saint-Venant and Flamant ee se A water particle at the surface of a deep-water wave oscillates about 2 point whose height above the stil water “h,” is given as: Le weave length where: ho = distance from the still water level to the center of rotation of waves H= height of wave or amplitude d= depth of still water L = wave length a= distance from the still water depth to the crest of wave i of a dey wave length pth Tag the typhoon atthe Por of Ny de oro is 310 m. The depth of gry ty, 0.90 m below the Conterting “ty ion of the wave. If the st a7 oe aa of the rough distance of Or oan i ts “a tom bottom ater is 49 m. above the bet ocean. e308 S| rf tine om a Har tt wn ob a Dep war waves aH ‘Steepness = L758 _Problem 4. pagation produces ee 00m. anda wave height 4 d 3s is re depth of still water in the ‘ St determine the elevation of rest above the still water level, finan tmaenns pil anon ee aH cot 20d neg OT st) aan 255"] v(m 300 1,2176 Ekv.of wave crest above the still water : we Bev. =80+h, + 5 Bev, = 80+ 1.76 + 125 Bev, = 9426 m. 3.159 Problem | The amplitude of a deep-water wave is | 24m. the depth of water from the bottom 4 to the crest of the wave is 46.2 m., ‘determine the horizontal distance between the crests of the wave. Assume the center Of rotation of the wave is 0.3 m. above the stil water level, Solution: dee (deep weter level Depth war waves H=24m (amplitude) Ho ptm d=46.2-1.2-0.3 d=44,70m. L=2d L=2(44.70) L=89.40m, — jaracteristics of L Waves: d < L/25 Waves with a relatively long wave length compared to the water depth d< 1/25 are called Jong waves. A. _ Length of wave for long waves L=T yod where: fave length in meters T= wave period in sec. 9 = acceleration of gravity (9.81 m/s?) = depth of waterB. Wave velocity for along wave v= dod where: : V= wave velocity in m/s = eccleration of gravy (9.81 ms") d= depth of water ne Compute the waye length caused by strong winds along the coast of Ormoc City for @ wave period of 17.56 sec. If the depth of water is 4m. Solution: L=Tyod L= 1752/9844) L=10m. dl 4. 5 = = 000606 < 95 0.04 (0K) This is a long wave. eT 3.161 Problem The wave length of a long wave at a depth of 4.8 m. is 122 m. Determine the velocity of the wave propagation in kph. Solution: 448 V=6.86(3.6) = 24.7 kph eee les arNCT Torn ~ Determine the wave height of a long Wave equal a meters if thas a steepness of 1/9, ty Solution: For along wave - ve vod i L=9(18) L=162m. L = — forlongwave 95 162 = =648m. q ys] v= Jad v= 49811648) Vv =7.97 ms V=7.97(36) = 28.69kph 3.163 Problem Determine the period (in seconds) to cause 3 wave length of a long wave equal to [25 m. Solution: L=Tyod dl for long waves d= 135 5m, (depth of water)Relationship of Deep- Em Length and the TEL h hace eh) ngth (Applicable only for ve pan ee ne ene Pa ee bs tanh 28 i, U 3 A where: l= deep-water wave length Liz shallow-water wave length d= depth of water A wave generated in deep-water, when reaching shoaling water Changes not only {ts height but also its length. The wave Period however remains constant. For a depth of 1.25 m, the shallow-water wave length is 20 m., determine the deep-water nee 3.166 Problem The shallow-water wave length is 24 m. and the deep-water wave length is 64.2 m Determine the depth of the shallow water. Solution ihren Brinn 2 tann 2 = 0.37383 2a —q0087 d=4.5m.rks face) The distance that a wind blows across the water is called Fetch. Heo47 WF where: = empltude of wave in fet = wind velocty in mph F= length of etch in miles Compute the amplitude of the wave during typhoon wt a wind veloc of $0 knots the length of the fetch is. 500 miles. H=0.17 57.58(500) H= 288i _ p=cV? where: = wind pressure inp = constant (00266) V= velo of wind n mph nda Rass 3.168 _ Problem ey en rossure in KPa if a pl Condy Solution: pzoV? = 00027 p=16ps! _ 16(981) 328)? pao) y p= 00ree kPa eee ‘A hypothetical wave height of wave corrected for the effects submarine topographic changes such, retraction and difraction of wave ty excluding wave shoaling and breaking 1, be expressed in the significant way height. a) Deep-water wave 1& p) Equivalent deep-water wave ¢) Highest wave d) Significant wave _ The maximum value of significant wave | height during a certain period is known as: F® a) Max. wave height t) Highest wave height ) Hes significant wave height Hiewaves resulting from the ‘ranstor is goverred by the actors: yond ofthe wind 1 Fggho distance over Which the wind + ows of v8 of time that the wind blows ' Frequency of wave action 4A, and Il only {land IV only ih. and IV only gy Notthe above oo 5 472 Problem to grow after they reach a 1 to ofthe wind speed-but easing rate. Energy losses from se transfer of energy into currents fe evelopment of white caps means a wil not grow untl the wave speed meres the wind speed. a) 28 ¢ 5 wh 0° 4% ee 3173 Problem when waves enter a shallow water: | Wave speed decreases 1. Wave length decreases iL Wave speed increases 1. Wave height increases \. Wave length increases W. Wave period does not change F a) 1,0, Vand Vionly b) Il, 1V, Vand VI only ) |, ll, and IV only 4) Ht, and Vi only Give the efferent types of breaking waves, i Siting breaker Plunging breaker WL Heaving breaker '. Collapsing breaker V. Pitching breaker Vi Surging breaker @) (I Mand tv only >) MLV, Vand Vi only * ¢) 4 ,1Vand Vionly 4) Il, Vand VI only Determine the elevati ion of the residual Fase etel (RWL) for a gravity type if the following data are as follows: Elev. of MLLW=0m (datum) Elev. of HWL = 44.26 m Elev. of LWL = -0.23 m Solution: H=1.26+023 H= 1.49 H_1 . 3° 3 (1-49) = 0.50 y=0.50-0.23, y=0.27m Elev. of RWL = +0.27 m3.176 Problem low Determine the elevation of the design tide (DLT, which ls the water fvel that guarantees about 96% of tide, which to the ships using the gravity type. level) OF WL = 41.45 m (Highest water Fy crRWLe#0.25m (Residual water level) Solution: Hates ast H=145+h 4 enso2s 3 1th eos 3 145 +h=3h+0.75 2h=07 h=0.35m. < 040m. ok Elev. of DLT = -0.35 m. ee 3.177 Problem From the figure shown, compute the distance from the top of the structure (quay) to the residual water level (RWL), Use gravity type method, | ora s1-0 RL Twi 030 (0.5m 4m ‘Solution: 15m) pwees1so ‘ Yan =I aps Determine the elevation of the residual Water level (RWL) for a sheet pile type if the following data are as follows: Elev. of MLLW (datum) = 0.00 m Elev. of HWL = + 4.26 m Elev. of LWL =- 0.23 mSTAN cAslaaiakeas! 21473=0.99 m H=1.26+0.23 H=149m 2 3 y=099-023 y= +0.76 m. (elevation of RL) 5 (14s)=0.99m ‘According to the tide table (1991) of NAMRIA, the port of Cebu has a frequency oftide below MLLW is 213 timesiyear. The present data observed by the PPA reveals the following results: Elev. of HWL = + 1.30 m (High water level) Elev. of RWL = 0.74 m (Residual water level) Determine the present elevation of tide below MLLW using a sheet pile type analysis. (Design lomtide) Allowable h = 0.16 to 0.40 m Fu=heo7 H=130+h 2 3 (190+h)=n+074 2.60 + 2h=3h +2.22 = 0.38 m. below MLLW (ok less than 0.40 m) 180 Problem In design of port and harbor facilities, seismic effects must be taken into consideration. if A is equal to the dead weight, B is equal to surcharge, and C is equal to design seismic coefficient, find the seismic force using seismic coefficient method. oe a) (a-Z]e °) (3 sa)e 4) (A+28)C »(tse 3.181 Problem The magnitude of surcharge during earthquake in designing port and harbor facilities. a) Double the surcharge considered without earthquake b) Times 3 of the surcharge considered without earthquake % of the surcharge considered without earthquake 4) 113 of the surcharge considered without earthquake 1hy=2.70 3=1.20 190 1020",.060 °° Sow 6m hy=2.70 4m Locate the elevation of residual water Level (RWI Regional seismic coefficient = 0.15 Factor for sub soil condition = 0.80 Coefficient of importance = 1.20 Unit weight of concrete = 2.45 tlm? Estimate the design seismic force. Solution: 1 Ri z= WL= 3) RWL= i (1.8)=060 Dead load: Consider 1 meter length of quay Wt. of concrete = [4(0.50)(2.45) +5,50(0.3)(2.45)] 1 WI of concrete = 8.94 tf We of rocks above RWL = 1.80(2.7)(3.2)(1) Wt of rocks above RWL = 15.55 tf Wt of rocks below RWL = 2.8(3.2)(2)(1) Wt of rocks below RWL = 17.92 tf Total DL = 8.94 + 15.55 + 17.92 Total DL = 4241 tf ‘Surcharge = 2.50(3.5)(1) Surcharge = 8.75 tf sent oe ( ismic forc® = seismic | DL + 8° coeff. Design seismic coeff. = 0.15(0.80)(1.20) Seismic foros -o( 24 * **) Seismic force = 6.55 tf /m a , The cross-section of the quay plays a important role from earthquake disaster in the port of Ormoc City. Horizontal seismic coefficient = 0.14 Coeff. of friction at the base = 0.60 Weight of rocks above the residual Water level (RWL) = 156 kN Weight of rocks below the RWL = 179 kn Weight of the entire concrete structure = gg kN ‘Surcharge = 87.5 kN Compute the design seismic force for checking of sliding of the structure recommended by the Phil. Ports Authority (PPA). Surcharge " Seismic force=| DL+ ———= | Seis ic force: a } mie Surcharge = 87.5 kN 1 seisoin | | | Y p94N2 For checking of sliding of the structure, toe roarge ad Is considered behind the Sie only. ‘Surcharge = 87.5 kN ¥ wyaisoun senitrae(0+ SHEE) ge Surcharge = 0 pL=156+179+89 DL=424KN Seismic force = (424 + 0)(0.14) = 59.36 KN Design of piers in an area of seismographic disturbance must be designed to resist seismic forces. Determine the seismic force in kN/m that must be used in the design if it carries the following loads: Dead load = 424 kNim Live load = 188 kN/m Regional seismic coefficient = 0.14 Factor for subsoil condition = 0.80 Coefficient of importance = 1.20 Solution: Seismic coefficient = 0.14(0.8)(1.2) = 0.1344 |. Setmic force = seismic ooeficient (OL + 4b) Seismic force = 0,1346(424 + 98) Seismic foroe = 68.62 kN /m LG r lar Frequency of a | Nindhcpaall Wave on anamadl o=K yod where: @= angular frequency K= wave number 22h L L = wave length in meters d= depth of water PAG-ASA issued a gale warning in the Eastern Seaboard of the country. PAG-ASA, forecast estimates that the wave length will be 144 m. long. Determine the angular frequency of the wave if the depth of the water at that particular location is 19 m. Solution: @=K ygd _2n Key a 144 K = 0.04363 (wave number) =k ye = 0.04363 (9.8119) @ = 0.596bene ELLA RL 0k 3.186 Problem Aterm used to describe a marine structure for the mooring or tying up of vessels, for loading and unloading cargo of for embarking and disembarking passengers. a) Dock b) Pier ) | Wharf 5 gj Allofthe above ee 3.187 Problem A dock which is parallel to the shore, which can be used for docking on one side only. a) Bulkhead 5 c) Wharf b) Pier d) Jetty —_—_— 3.188 Problem ‘A dock which is similar to a whart often referred to as such, IS backyp y ground as it derives its name from the very nature or supporting ground in the bac, a a) Bulkhead Groin c) Jetty d) Breakwater — wooo. 3.191 Problem Marine structures for mooring vessels. Dolphins b) Groin c) Jetty d) Breakwater A dock which projects into the water, which may be used on docking for both sides. a) Bulkhead IF b) Pier ©) Wharf d) Breakwater An artificial basin for vessels when the basin is pumped out. a) Drydock b) Wet dock c) Quay d) Jetty 3.192 Problem Type of dolphins which are designed to take the impact of the ship when docking and to hold the ship against a broadside wind. Therefore, they are provided with fenders to absorbed the impact of the ship and to protect the dolphin and the ship from damage. Breasting dolphins b) Mooring dolphins c) Fixed mooring berth 4) Bollards+S AND HARBO 3 193 Problem ‘of dolphins which are not designed Phe impact of the ship, as they located {0 ack of the face of the dock where they not be hit. They are located about 45° wath bow and stern. a) Breasting dolphins (& b) Mooring dolphins ) Fixed mooring berth ¢) Bollards ———— 3.194 Problem ‘A marine structure consisting of dolphins for tying up the ship and a platform for supporting the cargo handling equipment. a) _ Breasting dolphins b) Mooring dolphins 0 ¢) Fixed mooring berth d) Bollards tS 3.195 Problem A breakwater is a structure constructed for the purpose of forming an artificial harbor with a water area so protected from the effect of sea waves as to provide safe accommodations for shipping. When a breakwater supports a roadway, this is called: i a) Quay b) Pier © ¢) Mole d) Jetty ler and Bollards Bollard is the moorini ig fitting for mporing Ships during a storm installed : the outside or outside/inside of the erth far from the water line and “bitt” in ene close fo the waterline of t arth to be used for mooring shi in ordinary condition. a stins DOCK FITTINGS SINGLE MOORING BITT = <> cunars coma inact axe TYPICAL MOORING ACCESSORIES 1 It “'DOUBLEBITT —‘BOLLARD = (CLEAT OPEN CHOCKcORNERNOORING —Cxosen cock eee NS cable sie POWER CAPETAN MOORING BOLLARDS A) Single and Double Pillar: Tt i TUL General mooring applications where rope angles is not steep. Single pillar type should be used with lines from one ship only. Suitable for warping ships along berths, etc. B) Tee-head: E 1 ‘Al general mooring applications including steep rope angles. Any one bollard should preferably be allocated to line from one ship only. c) Sloping Lobe: All general mooring including steep rope angles. Lin two ships may be attached interference. Hi Generally when bollards are pulled upwarg as shown, then what type of bollards arg used? a) Single mooring bitt Tee-head shape ©) Sloping lobe d) Single pillar4 497 __Problem | mall quay wall where the mooring At Sty not be pulled upward, then what oro pollards are used? . Bollards Single mooring bitt b) _Tee-head shape ¢) _Sloping lobe Single pillar type SS ‘3.198 Problem | fitting for mooring shi mooring ‘2 1g ships : ea a storm installed at the outside or | outsideinside of the berth far from the water line is called: a) Bitt 1 b) Bollard ) Cleat d) Closed chock 3.199 Problem | The mooring fitting for mooring ships | during a storm instaiied close to the water line of the berth. © a) Bit Bollard o) Cleat d) Closed chock A type of mooring bola which is sulta for warping ships along berths ¢ mee Single and double pittar Tee-head ©) Sloping lobe 4) None of the above — 3.201 Problem A type of mooring bollard where all general mooring applications including steep rope angles. Any one bollard should preferably be allocated to lines from one ship only. tt has a normal maximum working capacity of 150 tons, ) Single and double pillar "S b) Tee-head ©) Sloping lobe d) None of the above es 3.202. Problem AA type of mooring bollard where all general mooring applications including ‘steep rope angles and lines from two ‘ships may be attached without interference. It has a normal max. capacity of 200 tons. a) Single and double pillar b) Tee-head 5S 6) Sloping lobe d) None of the aboveieee CLR tet 3.203 Problem The structure that protects the harbor from ‘stormy waves and permits calm in the harbor is called: 1650 parson emt cored ks S = ‘BREAKWATER WITH TETRAPODS a) Dock 5S ¢) Breakwater b) Wharf d) Jetty ee 3.204 Problem A solid structure, which projects into the ‘sea perpendicular to the shore to berth vessels, is called: ‘cover stone Dock Wharf Breakwater Jetty a) b) ¢) oS a 3.205 Problem A platform builtin the harbor parallel to the shore and backed up by ground is called: | Ports AND HARBOR 3.206 Problem A platform built parallel to the shore or breakwater within the harbor to berth vessels is called: a) Dock SS b) Wharf c) Quay d) Jetty 3.207 Problem A rubble mound and or a concrete Structure that protects the harbor area from wave action. Shore ~ 25 om terapads REAKWATER WITH TETRAPODS Breakwater Jetty 3.208 Problem A structure for retaining or to prevent earth or fill from sliding into water. Groin Bulkhead a) b) oF gy 4) a) oF py °) a Breasting dolphin Bulkhead Breakwater Berth structure ee ae ll _AND HARBOR | ical configuration of the seabed, measurements of depths of water in the n, etc. and also information derived | om such measurement, Bathymetry b) Oceanography ) Hydrology d) Fathomology | 3.210 Problem A vertical post to which the eye of a mooring line can be attached. Bollard b) Dolphin c) Gravity wall d) Tetrapods 3.211 Problem A shore protection structure usually built perpendicular to the coastline to retard littoral transport of sedimentary materials. SF a) Groin c) Breakwater b) Bulkhead d) Jetty | A berth structure which projects.out into the water from the shore, or a berth ‘structure at some distance from the shoreline is called: a) Groin ©) Breakwater b) Bulkhead 5S" @) Jetty 3.213 Problem A berth structure sheriise. Projecting out from the a) Groin 0) >) Wharf Breakwater "Fg Pier ace 3.214 Problem A sheltered place where the ship may receive or discharge cargo. It includes the harbor with its approach channels and anchorage places. 5S a) Port ¢) Basin b) Harbor @) Quay ee A sheltered place where the ship may receive or discharge cargo. It includes the harbor with its approach channels and anchorage places. a) Groin ©) Breakwater "S b) Quay d) Jetty A platform or deck structure built below the top deck level and supported on bearing piles. The main function of the platform is to reduce the lateral soil pressure over the upper portion of the sheet wall a) Sea wall b) Quay “ 53 ¢) Relieving platform 4) Revetment3.217 Problem A berth structure with no direct connection to the shore, at which the ships can berth. Berthing can take place on either one or both sides of the structure, Sea island c) Relieving platform b) Breakwater 4) Revetment » Navigation Channels 3.218 Prob! For good manoeuvering control, the ship requires deeper water depth than the absolute minimum requirement from loading of the ship, tidal variations, trim, etc. If the speed of the ship is 5 knots, determine the required depth of the channel if the ship has a max. daft of 7.8 m. Solution: Desired ratio of channel depth to max. draft of the ship = 1.3 4.g = Dep ofchannel fora speed of Draft of ship {ess than 6 knots) Depth = 1.3(7.8) = 10.14m, 3.219 Problem | | | | At the berths where the movement of the largest ships to be accommodated takes place at the higher states of the tide, the underkell clearance may be achieved by dredging a berth box in front of the berth structure. If the length of the largest ship that uses the berth is 180 m., compute the area of the berth box in sq.m. The beam of the ship is 32 m. wide. Solution: L=1.2 Leip W=1.5(B) L=1.2(180) W=1.5(32) L=216 w=48 Berth area = 216(48) Berth area = 10368 m? Note: The berth box should have a length of 1.2 times the overall length of the largest ship and a width of 1.5 times the beam of the Jargest ship that will use the berth. 3.221 Problem For ships above 40,000 ton displacement, the surge should not exceed: AA ship having a speed of 8 knots is floating on a channel depth of 15 m. Itis required to determine the approximate draft of the ship under this speed. Solution: For a speed greater than 6 knots : 415 = Debth of channel Draft of ship| 15 aft = 2. = De 1g 710m.ships above 40,000 ton displacement, for ow should not exceed: wneyaws! a) 1.0m b) 05m 08m d) 1.2m 3.223 Problem From a certain point along the Sulu Sea, the elevation of the sea level having an atmospheric pressure of 14.8 mbars is | 585 m. If the atmospheric pressure is only 6.6 mbars, what will be the elevation of the sea level at the same point? | Solution: For every 1 mbar increase in pressure, sea level will decrease by 0.9 om or 0.009 m. For every 1 mbar decrease in pressure, 2a level will increase by 0.9 om or 0.009 m. Elev. of sea level = (14.8 - 6.6)(0.009) + 58.5 Eley, of sea level = 58.574 m LT eet re Wind Le ty ENS em tee Set Elite) 0s) id 3.224 Problem When the type of dock and its general features have been determined, it will be necessary to establish the lateral load for which the pier is to be designed, Lateral loads from the ‘mooring lines pull the ship into or along the dock or hold it against the force of the wind or current. The maximum, wind force will be equal to the exposed area of the broadside of the ship in a light Condition multiplied by the wind Pressure to which a shape factor of 1.3 has been applied, which is a combined factor taking into consideration the reduction due to height and the increase for suction on the leeward side of the ship. Compute the design wind pressure in Pa of the pier when ships are berth on both sides of a pier. Wind velocity is 78 mph. Solution: Wind pressure: p=0,00256v2 p= 0,00256(78)2 p= 15575 pst Design wind pressure = 15.575(1.3) Design wind pressure = 20.25 psf = 971.33 Design wind pressure = 971.33(1 + 0.50) Design wind pressure = 1457 Pa Note: When ships are berth on both sides of the pier, the total wind force acting on the pier as a result of wind on the ships, should be increased by 50% to allow for wind against the second ship.3.225 Problem An ocean-going vessel, MV Sebastian, has a displacement tonnage of 46,400 long tons and’a loaded draft of 37.5 ft. and has an exposed area of 30000 sq.ft. when the ship is berthed on the on the pier. The vessel will dock without the aid of tugboats. If the max. wind velocity is 70 mph in a direction normal to the pier, what is the total wind force (tons) which the vessel exerts against the pier considering a factor of 1.3 to allow for suction on the leeward side of the ship. .00256V2 (wind pressure in psf) 1 ton = 2200 Ib. V=velocity in mph Solution: Velocity pressure: Pp 54 psf p= 12.54(1.3) = 16.31 psf Total wind force which one ship exerts against the pier in tons: = = = 22244 tons a 3.226 Problem Solution: p= 0.00256V? p= 0,00256(75)? p= 14.4 psf p= 14.4(1.2) = 17.28 psf Wind force which one ship exerts against the jer = 17-28(28000) - 949,93 tons 7200 Additonal wind fore ofthe second ship = ; (219.93) = 109.96 tons Total horizontal wind force on the pier = 219.93 + 109.96 = 330 tons eeu eso | nels and Waterways A) Single Lane Channel _—_ Bank ‘Clearance Cth ae Maveverng lane, ‘The world's largest tanker from Ireland has a DWT of 326000 tons. It has an exposed area of 28000 ft? when it is berthed on the pier. The max. wind velocity is 75 mph in a direction normal to the pier. If a second ship is berthed on the opposite side of the pier, compute the total horizontal wind force on the pier considering a factor of 1.2 to allow for suction side on the leeward side of the ship. Hint: p = 0.00256V? (wind pressure in psf and V in mph) (Chanel wide Width of manoeuvering lane = ranges from 1.6 to 2.0 times the beam width of largest ship using the channel For large ship, an angle of yaw of 5° can add an extra width equivalent to half the beam to the manoeuvering lane, due to the effect of cross current and or winds. _ g«§ . ahr ee@ = ranges from 1.0 to 2.0 Bask oe gan of fhe ingest ship using rechannel Recommended total channel bottom idth for single lane channel should be 46 to 6 times the beam of the design oe depending on the sea and wind condition. For oil and gas tankers, a minimum bottom width channel should be 5 times the beam of the ship. B) Two-Lane Channel Channel width To avoid excessive _ interaction between two ships traveling past one another, either in the same direction or in the opposite direction in a two-lane channel, it is necessary to Separate the two manoeuvering lanes by a ship clearance lane, The clearance lane = min. of 30 m. or the beam of the largest Ship should be Provided. Recommended total channel width will vary between 6.2 to 9 times the beam of the ship Bank clearance = 2 times the beam of the largest Ship using the channel, Manoeuvering lane = 2 times the beam Of the largest Ship using the channel. Channel with curves Should have larger width of channel compared to a straight channel, Width of Manoeuvering lane for a Curve channel should be increased to4 times the beam of the largest ship in the Curve channel, Width of harbor entrance should be equal to the length of the design ship. Max. current Velocity through the harbor entrance should Not exceed 1.5 mis oF 3 knots. Cy ye stance of Shi ® For Ships in ballast = 3 to 5 times the ship's length ® For a loaded ship such as oil tanker =7 to 8 times the ship's length Min. Diameters of Turning Bite) DCTS) pe ae tye Basin + © For ships without tugboat assistance =4 times the length of the ship @ For ships having tugboat assistance = 2 times the length of the ship ® With the use of main propeller and rudder and the bow thrusters = 1.5 times the length of the ship @ Where the ship is tuned by warping around a dolphin or pier and usually with tugboat assistance under calm conditions = 1.2 times length of the shipUke el Lis) | Aaa a ee oe, 1 es Length of dredge area = 1.25 times length of largest ship to use the berth, with tugboat assistance Length of dredge area = 1.5 times the length of largest ship to use the berth, without tugboat assistance Width of dredged tidal berth = 1.25 times the beam of the largest ship to use the berth 3.227 Problem To avoid excessive interaction between two ships traveling past one another, either in the same or in the opposite direction in a two-lane channel, it is necessary to separate the two manoeuvering lanes a ship clearance lane. What would be the distance of the clearance lane provided if the beam of the smaller ship is 24 m. end the beam of the larger ship is 28 m. | || i | py | | FE ST Bett pe / \ / Gann! wide ~ Solution: d= ship clearance beam of largest ship but not less than 30 m. d=30 m > 28 Use d= 30m. ss sssesrennsreresessssaiik eae) The width of a restricted channel should be measured at the bottom of the dredge beq with a manoeuvering lane depending oy wind, current and the manoeuverability of the ship wherein container ships, car carriers, passenger ships —_ present considerable windage area and ma therefore require more channel width than their beam would suggest. Ships displaceg from the channel centerline towards the banks of the channel will experience a bank suction effect due to the asymmetrical flow of water around the ship and this will cause a yawning movement, To counter act this, an additional bank clearance must be added to the manoeuvering lane on both sides, Determine the minimum width of the single | lane channel if the beam of the largest ship is 24m. wide. Solution: Bank _ Clearance poop Manoewvering lane Clearance te | | ‘Channel width — Min. manoeuvering lane = 1.68 Min, manoeuvering lane = 1.6(24) Min, manoeuvering lane = 38.40 m Bank clearance = B = 24 m. Total width of channel = 24 + 38.40 + 24 Total width of channel = 86.40 m. ~_ ag an mrtwo-lane channel with two ships using channel moving in opposite directions as beam width of smaller ship equal to y im. and a beam width of the largest ship a 36 m. To avoid excessive interaction two ships traveling past one another in opposite direction, it is ry to separate the two manoeuvering lanes by a ship clearance jane. TO minimize the suction and repulsion forces between the ships, a tlearance lane not less than 30 m. or the beam of the largest ship should be provided. Compute the minimum width of the two-lane channel considering a bank clearance lane on both sides assuming the channel is not exposed to crosscurrent or winds. The width of the two-lane channel should be measured at the bottom of the dredged bed and should be the sum of the lanes. Channel width Min, bank clearance = B= 36 m. (beam of largest ship) Manoeuvering lane is 1.6 times the beam of the largerst ship. Maneuvering lane = 1.6(36) = 57.60 m. Ship clearance = 36 m. (not less than 30 m. or beam of largest ship) Total width of two-lane channel = 36(2) + 57.60 + 36 = 165.60 m. Th argo ship is manoeuvering thru a One-lane channel. The beam of he ship Is 36m. Considering the Manoeuvering lane, the bank clearance on both sides and allowance for yaw of the ship when the Channel is exposed to Crosscurrent and wind, compute the minimum width of the single lane channel. Solution: Bank clearance = B (beam ofthe largest ship) Bank clearance = 36 m. Manoewerig ane= 188+ S (th elowance for yaw ofthe ship) Manocinering lane = 1528) + © =75.60m, ‘Min. width of channel = 36 + 36 + 75.60 Min. width of channel = 147.60 m. A four-berth pier and slip is shown in the figure. The length of largest ship is 180 m, and that of the smaller ship is 120 m. only. ‘Compute the minimum length of the pier.Sip, ia al ia 6) A 10} 0 {0 io F — 3 EP ° | iS ] a | oe bog” \410L1 (length of largest ship) Clearance = 0.10(180) = 18 m. Total length of pier = 180 + 120 + 18 + 25+ 25 Total length of pier = 368 m. Reem ACM mala The length of the cargo vessel afloat has a length of 180 m. It is required to determine the dimensions of the two-berth pier shown using the following data: Width of apron on the sides for two-way traffic: a= 8 m. Width of apron on the truck loading area: @= 12.8 m. Width of apron on the truck loading area: ¢ = 26 m. ‘Beam (width) of ship: B = 22 m. Area of transit shed = 8400 m? for one berth Determine the following: @ @ @ 8 Total length, L of the pier Total width, W of the pier Width of slip, S L= 180 + 25 + 25 L= 230m. Width of the pier “W" Area of transit shed: A= 8400(2) for 2 berths (ship) A= 16800 m? 128+ y + 26= 230 y= 194.20 A=by 16800 = b(191.20) b= 87.87 m.Width of pier: W=87.87+8+8 W= 103.87 m. @ Width of slip S $=2B+30 = 2(22) + 30= 74m. 3.233 Probiem When .more than one ship is to be accommodated along the berth, determine the minimum clearance length between the | adjacent ship if one ship has a length of 180 m. and the other ship has a length of Clearance = 0.10 of the longest length of ship Min, clearance = 0.10(200) = 20 m. Compute the approximate length of the anch anc “ chain of a ship having a length of Length of anchor chain = 1.5 length of ship Length of chain = 1.5(120) = 180 m. tong Breast mooring lines are used to reduce the sway and yaw motions and should be perpendicular to the ship. Spring mooring lines are used to reduce the ‘surge motion of the ship along the berth front. They should be as parallel as possible to the berth front. The between the berth front and the shipside should be equal fo or less than 10°. Head and stern lines = these can be used in ‘addition to the spring and breast lines to reduce the ship's motion.Elements of Standard Ships POR ol 1c Pe AeA t (1 Beeman 3.235 Problem The maximum distance from the water level to the highest point of the ship at the prevailing draft. 1S a) Airdraft b) Scanting draft c) Designed draft d) Ballast displacement oo 3.236 Problem The draft for which the structural strength of the ship has been designed. n a) Airdraft TS b) Scantling draft fi i c) Designed draft “RS a) Timdrat quate, at f 4 [3237 Problem The draft for which the fundamental design Parameters of the ship are based. a) Airdraft b) Scantling draft ES ¢) Designed dratt 4) Trimdraft 3.238 Problem The reduction of under keel clearance due to the suction effect induced by the higher current velocity between the sea bottom and the ship. oS a) Squat c) Aft b) Trim d) Keel ee 3.239 Problem The difference between the aft and the forward draft. a> hpetrim po > 7 SN Abed = hea EY a) Trim c) Stem b) Bow - d) Astem The point at the backend of a ship is called: a> hy=trimrn ——— hip is the front end of a si point at as hgetrin overall fegth ogi 3.242 Problem The distance from the stern to the midships. The backward motion of a Ship Is called: fae hastrin Ser a ie mad bw ro * = a Yee + The right side of the ship when facing towards the bow of the ship is called: a hastrim3.245 Problem A littoral drift that moves by tumbling, sliding or bouncing along the surface of the sea floor through the direct action of waves and currents. a) Offshore sediment b) _On-shore sediment ©) Suspended sediment 1S q) Bed load sediment —_— 3.246 Problem A littoral drift that is suspended in seawater by turbulence of breakers and others and transported by currents. a) Offshore sediment b) _ On-shore sediment 53 c) Suspended sediment d) Bed load sediment 3.247 Problem Refers to the sedimentary material moved in the littoral zone under action of wave and current. a) _ Littoral transport 5S b) Littoral drift c) Long shore transport 4d) On-shore transport 3.248 Problem ‘The movement of littoral drift. Littoral transport b) Foreshore c) Offshore d) — In-shore 3.249 Problem The movement of littoral drift parallel to the shore. a) Foreshore transport b) Offshore transport 5& ¢) Long shore transport d) _On-shore transport 3.250 Problem drift The movement of _littoral perpendicular to the shore. a) Foreshore transport b) _Off-shore transport ©) Long shore transport © q) On-shore transport 3.251 Problem littoral drift that moves as a layer of high- density flow near the bed surface. Sheet flow b) . On-shore sediment ©) Suspended sediment d) Bed load sediment1,1, and ll only {,lland IV only ¢)ill,and IV only d) Allofthe above ‘the region of shallow-water zone where high-density suspension of sediment is formed by the severe agitation and action of a large-scale vortices that are generated by the breakers. a) Offshore zone 5 b) Surfzone c) Swash zone d) On-shore zone ‘The regions of shallow-water zone wherein which in order for sand to be moved by the action of fluid motion (oscillatory movement) the current velocity of the fluid must exceed a certain value. This condition is generally called the threshold of movement. "© a) Offshore zone b) Surfzone ©) Swash zone @) —On-shore zone The region of shi the sand moverent ane zone where water, a) Offshore zone b) Surfzone 5S c) Swash zone 4). On-shore zone es 3.256 Problem Long shore sediment moves in either left or right along a coast, Corresponding to the direction of incoming waves. The direction with the larger volume of movement during a year is called: Predominant direction b) Long shore direction c) Offshore direction 4) Onshore direction The zone from low tide shoreline to the location of the upper limit of wave wash at high tide is called:I ee cabana 3.258 Problem The zone from landward boundary of foreshore to the coastline, where waves will reach during stormy weather is called Inshore _Ofshore Cou_Backshore Foreshore Meum High Wer, gh ie sorline . Law te shoreline a) Onshore b) Inshore Backshore d) Foreshore 3.259 Problem — The area on the ocean side where waves do not break normally. In many cases, the bottom slope is comparatively gentle is called: ot Ba! re bshre_ Oho Low he shoreine a) Onshore b) Long shore Offshore a) Fore shore 3.260 Problem The area between the offshore and the low tide shoreline, where waves break and long shore bars or steps are formed is called; Coan _Pkshore Foreshore Inshore Of High ide shoreline . Lew te shoreline a) Onshore Inshore ©) Backshore d) Foreshore 3.261 Problem When a model beach is constructed with natural sand in a wave channel exposed to waves over a long period of time, the beach profile will approach an equilibrium condition corresponding to the waves acting upon it. This equilibrium condition of the beach is classified into two types. Fore beach Step type beach (normal beach) Trough Bar type beach (storm beach)step type beach and shallow type beach Ik g Ba type beach and shallow type beach . ¢) Shallow type and trough type beach © YAWING 3.262 Problem The movement in the horizontal plane of a ship moving forward or backward at sea under the impact of current, waves, and wind gusts moving is called: a) Pitch FS b) Surge c) Sway qd) Yaw3.263 Problem ‘The movement in the horizontal plane of a ship which tends to rotate the ship about its vertical axis due to impact of current, waves and wind gusts is called: a) Pitch ) Sway b) Surge oF q Yaw ee 3.264 Problem The movement in the vertical plane of a ship, which tends to move it up and down due to impact of current, waves, and wind gusts is called: Heave a) Pitch oF o) Roll b) Surge 4) a 3.265 Problem ‘ The movement in the vertical plane of a ship, which tends to rotate the ship about its transverse axis due to the impact of current, waves and wind gusts, is called: ©) Heave 5S a) Pitch Roll b) Surge d) 3.266 Problem The motion, which cause the ship to rotate about the vertical axis of the boat, which is caused by seawater waves. Yawning b) Pitching ©) Surging 4) Heaving The horizontal motion of the ship along ity longitudinal axis caused by seaveate, waves Is known a8: a) Yawning "* o) Si b) Pitching d) Heaving ee, 3.268 Problem The vertical motion of the ship up ang down caused by seawater waves is known as: a) Yawning c) Surging b) Pitching °F d) Heaving 3.269 Problem The motion of the ship, which tends to rotate the ship about its longitudinal axis due to seawater waves is known as; a) Yawning " c) Rolling b) Pitching d) Heaving 3.270 Problem The motion of the ship, which tends to rotate the ship about its traverse axis caused by seawater waves is known as: a) Yawning ©) Roling ES b) Pitching d) Heaving 3.271 Problem The motion of the ship, which tends to move horizontally on its sides caused by seawater waves. a) Yawning ©3 ¢) Swaying b) Pitching dd) Heavingey We sions of numa Length berween perpendiculars a Overall length . 4 Dead Weight | oy Full Tonnage | Length | Brean | Load (own, _| ‘erath | Breadth | oro 30000 tons 218m_[ 30.2m [414m 40000 tons | 244m_| 32.3 | 122m 50000tons [266m | 323m 130m 60000tons [286m [365m | 138m Fea | vera | Moded | Ful OMe | Lena | Broad | Load 1000 tons 67m 10.9m_| 3.9m 2000 tons 83m 13.1m_| 4.9m C) Passenger Ships 5000 tons’ 409m_| 168m _ | 6.5m 10000 tons 137m_| 19.9m_ | 8.2m 42000 tons 144m_| 21.0m_| 8.6m 30000 tons 185m_| 27.5m_ | 14.0m 40000 tons 200m_| 299m _ | 11.8m $0000 tons’ 249m_ | 38.1m_ [147m 400000 tons [256m _| 39.3m_| 15.tm Gross Full Overall | Molded Tonnage Load ‘cr Length | Breadth | oe 20000 tons | 180m_| 257m |_8m 30000 tons | 207m _| 284m |_8m 50000tons | 248m | 323m | 8m 70000 tons [278m | 35.2m | 8m 450000 tons [286m | 443m _| 169m— Overall | Molded fut ow _| Length | Breadth | pea SO0tons | Stm | 90m | 33m ToOtons | 87m [95m] 34m E) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels ot | overati | Molded | Full Tonnage | Load | Length es a 6m [14m {164m [47m 10 on 185m_| 55m 4000 tons 207m | 63m 6000 tons | 154 m | 229m [7.0m 10000 tons | 182m 259m [74m ECE Le Cel 2-1 ata sete] , Weight Tonnage (DWT), Gross Tonnage (GT) and Poors E Tear -l am cedar ler) Gokpiece DT) pall | DT is displacement tonnage of ships A) Cargo Ships Less than 10000 DWT og(DT) = 0.550 + 0.889 log(DWT) + 10,000 DWT or more Jog(DT) = 0.541 + 0.913 log(DWT) B) Container Ships . log(DT) = 0.365 + 0.953 log(OWT, C) Ferries Long distance log(DT) = 1.388 + 0.683 log(GT) ‘© Short to medium distance log(DT) = 0.506 + 0.904 fog(GT) D) Roll-on/Roll-off Vessels log(DT) = 0.0657 + 0.909 log(DWT) E) Passenger Ships (Japanese) Jog(DT) = 0.026 + 0.981 log(GT) F) Passenger Ships (Foreign) log(0T) = 0.021 + 0.891 log(GT) 6 Car Carriers log(DT) = 1.915 + 0.588 log(GT) H) Oil Tankers Jog(DT) = 0.332 + 0.956 log(DWT)ight of the ship is the nee gece reef oy rd the added weight. weight wed wrzolw, wel weight (tons) serene, skh feo (1 ton/m’) ‘“ we (aa Protem having a dead weight tonnage aesost00 ‘on has a daft of 8.6 m. If the length of the ship and is molded breadth are 144 m. and 21 m. respectively, dawmine the virtual weight of the ship. telog (0T)=0.511 + 0.913 log (DWT) Salution: DWT = 12000 tons Deplcement tonnage: (DT) 1g (0T)= 0.511 + 0.913 log (DWT) by(01)= 0.511 + 0.913 log (12000) OT= 17491 tons Vitual weight = Displacement ‘tonnage plus added weight ‘Added weight onc) wet \ EOL, We egrctagy Y, 8365 tong esebht= 17191 + 8365 ual weight = 25556 tons A foreign Passenger ship hj tonnage (GT) of 30000 tons. It as a length of 207 m with a molded breadth of 25.7 m, Hf the full draft is 8 m, determi weight ofthe en ine the virtual Use log (DT) = 0.031 + 0.891 tog (aT) Solution: Displacement tonnage (D7): log (DT) = 0.031 + 0.891 fog (GT) log (DT) = 0.031 + 0,891 fog (30000) DT = 10474 tons ‘Added weight : W,= ED°LW, w= F een W, = 10405 tons, Virtual weight ofthe ship = DT + W, Virtual weight of the ship = 10474 + 10405, Virtual weight of the ship = 20879 tons BRETT utr) tliat elu aD) ’ and the Gross Tonnage (GT) for the Different Type Resamemieelik LA (---1-1( Semeeanenend Cargo Ships: GT= 0.514 DWT Container Ships: GT= 0.880 DWT Oil Tanker: GT= 0.553 DWT Roll-on/Roll-off Vessel: GT = 0.808 DWT3.274 Problem An oil tanker has a displacement tonnage (DT) equal to 27800 tons. The length of the il tanker is 158 m, Determine the gross tonnage (GT) capacity of the oll tanker. Use log (DT) = 0.332 + 0.956 log (DWT) GT = 0.553 DWT Solution: log (DT) = 0.332 + 0.956 log (DWT) og (27800) = 0.332 + 0.956 log (DWT) DWT = 20012.53 tons Gross tonnage (GT) = 0.553 DWT GT = 0.553(20012.53) GT = 11067 tons INN ha aiabatenh ieee) Standard Basin Depth for Different Types of Vessels: Design Low Tide (DLT) =-0.3m. Constructional allowance for 10 scoy protecting riprap is 0.5m. If there is scour protecting riprap, there iy no construction allowance needed. WEreoma rte des moo * | inmeters) Fullloaded draft = where: DWT= dead weigit tons 3.276 CE Board May 2016 3.275 Problem A cargo ship having a total weight of 50,000 DWT (dead weight tons) including its cargo floats on seawater having a specific gravity of 1.03. Determine the value of the full loaded (max.) draft. ‘Solution: Full baded crat= [OMT 4 5 1000 }50000 Full loaded draft = +55 A 7000 5=1207m Planned water depth is considered as follows for a ship with a draft of 7.50 m. Assume that there is a scour protection riprap layer. Standard water depth of berth for the ship =-7.5m Design low tide = -0.35 m Determine the design water depth. Solution:depth = standard water depth fe i tide nn ‘design low Pe ith for ship i- 3+ (035) is no scour prtsing lowance for extra dredging pe i usually 0.5 m. is taken jos item. te: In cas® there 3277 Problem iven data shown below, it is from the or ate peng prin ship having a 40,000 DWT (dead seght ton full load drop of the ship=-11m. =-0.3m n Low Tide (LT) oe cton allowance for no scour wotecting riprap = 0.5 m Design water depth =-11-03- 0.5 =+11.8m 278 CE Board No onie A rectangular barge is 20 m long, 12 m wide and 8 m deep. it enters the harbor of Cebu City having a design low tide (LT) equal to - 0.30 m. The harbor facility is Protected by tiprap to prevent ‘scouring. The weight of the barge when empty is equal to 1000 tons, Assuming sp.gr. of ‘Seawater to be 1.03 and that the max. depth of water in the harbor is 6.4 m deep, determine the maximum ‘welght In tons that the barge can carry Safely based on the Specifications of the (PPA) Phil. Port ‘Authority regarding standard water depth, BF = 12(6.1)(20)(1.03)(1000) BF = 1507920 kg W= BF W= 1507,920 tons Max. weigh it could cary = 1507.920 - 1000 Max, weight it could cary = 507.920 tonsAND HARBOR 3.279 CE Board May 2015, May 2016 A ship having a displacement of 20000 metric tones enters a harbor of fresh water. The ship captain recorded a draft of 8.4 m. while the ship was still in seawater (sp.gr. = 1.03). Obtain the draft in meters of the ship in fresh water if the horizontal section of the ship below the water line is 3000 m? in both instances. Solution: Fresh water Vol. displaced in seawater: We V (spr) te 20000(1000) = Vs(1.03)(1000) Va = 19417.48 m> Vol. displaced in fresh water: -20000(1000) = Ve(1000) V2= 20000 m? V2-Vi= (A) 20000 - 19417.48 = h(3000) h=0.194m Draft in fresh water = 8.4 + 0.194 Draft in fresh water = 8.594 m. —— 3.280 CE Board Nov. 1984 A cargo vessel weighing 200,000 kg is 14 m long, 8 meters wide and 4.5 meters deep. It will transport to Cebu 20 mm diameter by 6 meters long reinforcing steel bars. @® If a draft (submerged depth of the cargo vessel) is to be maintained at 3 meters, how many pieces of the bars can it carry if density of salt water equal to 1026 kg/m® and steel weighs 7850 kg/m, @ What is the draft from the cargo vessel when one half of its cargo is unloaded in fresh water?. ® If the draft of the cargo vessel in fresh water is equal to 2 m., determine the number of bars that it can carry.® Pieces of bars: x=n0, of bars 02" 4 We= 14.79 xkg (wt of stee! bars) Wy + Wo= BF 200,000 + 14.79x = 3(8)(14)(1026) X= 9786 no. of bars Wy (67850) x I | ® Draft from the cargo vessel: | Total weight = Wy + Wp W= 200,000 + 14.79(9786) W= 200,000 + 144736, W= 344736 kg When the caro vessel i Water te otslwaght is only i We 200,000 ie Wo= 272368 kg BF. = Wp= 272369 272368 = 48)(14)(1000) 4 243 m, (aati resh water) ® Number of bars that it can cany: (2X8)(14)(1000) = 200,000 + 14.79% X= 1623 bars ee 3.281 Problem A container ship 122 m, long and 12 m, wide displaced 8500 cubic meters of fresh water. It is placed in a lock 137 m. tong and 15 m. wide and then loaded with 3640 tons of steel. © Determine the draft of ship before the stee! Is loaded. © Determine the draft of the ship after the steel is loaded. ® Determine the increase in depth of water in the lock after the ship has been loaded with steel.© raf of ship before the stee! is loaded: 122(12) dy = 8500 dy = 5.806 m. ® ral of ship ater the steel is loaded When the steel is loaded: = 3640(1000) = 8.806 + F999(129)12) = 8.292 m. 3 Increase in the depth of water: 122(12)y = [ 137(15) - 122(12)] x 1464 = 591x y= 0.404x x+y +5.806 = 8.292 x+y= 2.486 y=2486-x 0.404x = 2.486 - x 1.404x = 2.486 x=4.77m, 3.282 Probl A ship of 7064 sq.m. horizontal cross. sectional area at the water line has a draft of 12.35 m in sea water when loaded to a capacity. In the fresh water at the entrance of the Panama Canal, it is observed that the ship draws 12.6 m. Sp.gr. of sea water = 1.03. @® Determine the weight of the ship and cargo in tonnes. @® Determine the ships displacement in cu.m. for fresh water. ® With an available water depth in the canal, what weight of cargo must be lightered so that the ship can barely pass into the locks with 0.1 m clearance below the keel? Solution:12.6, “4 ont «9 Weigh ofthe ship and cargo in omnes: = vol. displaced in sea water y+ 7064(12.6 - 12.35) = vol. displaced in fresh water V+ 1766 = vol. displaced in fresh water W= BF. = 1030V in sea water We BF. = 1000 (V+ 1766) 4030V = 1000 (V + 1766) V= 58,867 cum. W= (68,867)(1000) W= 58,867,000 kg. W= 58,867 tonnes ® Ships displacement in cu.m. for fresh water: V= 58,867 cum. in sea water V= 58,867 + 1766 V= 60.633 cu.m. in fresh water © Change of weight from a height of 12.6 m. 012.4 m, WA. of cargo to be lightered: W= 7064(0.2)(1000) W= 1412800 kg W= 14128 tonnes 9 from salt water (sp.gr. I to fresh water (sp.gr. = 1) sinks 62 cm. and after burning 72,730 kg, of coal rises up by 15.24 cm, ele ® Find the original draft in salt water. ® Find the original draft in fresh water. © Find the original displacement of the boat in sea water. Solution: ® Original ara in salt water, In figure A: Assume that the cross-sectional area of the ship is uniform = A BF=WVp 8F,= W 1000(1) [A (y + 0.0762)] = W W= 1000 A (y + 0.0762) @ In figure C:W= 1030 A, 1030 Ay = 1000 A (y + 0.0762) 4.03y = y + 0.0762 y= 254 ® Original draft in fresh water. Draft = 2.54 + 0.0762 ® Original displacement of the boat in sea water. In@ W= 1030A (2.54) W= 2616.24 e BF3= W- 72730 1000(1) [4 (y- 0.0762)] = W- 72,730 1000A (y- 0.0762)=W-72,730 @ In ® 10004 (2.54 - 0.0762) = 2616.2A - 72730 2463.8A = 2616.24 - 72730 182.44 = 72730 A= 477.23 m? In@ = W= 2616.2 (477.23) W= 1,248,529 kg W= 12,248 kN 3.284 Problem A cruise liner having a constant cross- sectional area of 1800 sqm. crusied Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific Ocean taking the Panama Canal route. The ship has a displacement of 10000 tons and an observed draft of 4.8 m. in the Gatun Lake Lock of the canal. What should be the ‘specified depth in Philippine standards of a refuge harbor in the Pacific due to a strong typhoon. Sp. gr. of the seawater is 1.02 and ‘assume 1 marine ton = 2240 Ib. The design low tide is - 0.3 m. inthe Panama Canal ‘marine ton = 2240 = 9.988 kN . . - 10000(9.988) Vol. displaced in seawater mean Vol. displaced in seawater = 9994.80 m’ | = 10000(9.988) Vol, displaced in Panama Canal “T981) Vol. displaced in Panama Canal = 10181.45 m’ (10184.45 - 999480) 1800 Diflerence in draft= 0.131 m Difference in draft = Draft in seawater = 4.669 m Specified depth in Phil. Standard = 4,669 +03 = 4.969 m1,